All (GT) Nitin Sir

JEE ADVANCED 2021 MOCK TEST @ UNACADEMY [ NITIN SIR ]
POWERED BY [ INDIAN SCHOOL OF PHYSICS ]
Max marks : 75 Time : 75 mins
Numerical response type [ +4 , -1 ]

IN
1. A series combination of 𝑛1 capacitors, each of value C1 , is charged by a

D
source of potential difference 4V. When another parallel combination of 𝑛2

IA
capacitors, each of value C2 , is charged by a source of potential difference

N
V, it has the same (total energy) stored in it as the first combination has. The
SC
𝑥𝐶1
value of C2 in terms of C1 , is . Find the value of x.
𝑛1 𝑛2
H
O
O
L
1. 16
O
1 C1 1
( 4V ) ( n2C2 )V 2
F
2
. =
2 n1 2
PH
16C1
C2 =
n1n2
Y
SI
CS
1
2. A particle of mass 1 kg and charge c is projected from a long distance
3
towards a non-conducting fixed spherical shell having same charge
uniformly distributed on its surface. Find critical velocity(in m/s) of
projection required by the particle if it just grazes the shell
IN
D
IA
N
SC
Key 1.63
H
O
O
2. Apply conservation of energy and conservation of angular momentum between points at

L
infinite separation and on the surface of the sphere

O
F
PH
Y
SI
CS
3. A non-uniform magnetic field B varies with x. It exist for 𝑥 ≥ 0, into the xy
plane. A particle having charge q and of mass m, enters the magnetic field at
the origin with speed 𝑣𝑖̂. It is seen that it travels along 𝑦 = 2𝑥 2 curve where
y and x are in meters. Find the value of B(in tesla)at x = 0 (𝐺𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑛: 𝑚 =
1𝑔𝑚, 𝑣 = 1𝑚/𝑠, 𝑞 = 1𝑚𝑐)
IN
2
Y y = 2x
D
Y
IA
vy B
vxi
N
X
SC
H
O
3. 4
O
2
dy
L
1+
dx
Radius of curvature of the curve r =
O
2
d y
F
dx
d2y
PH
2 dy
y = 2 x , = 4 x, 2 = 4
dx dx
Y
1 + 16 x 2 1
r= at x = 0, r =
SI
4 4
mv mV
r= B= =4
CS
qB qr
4. An infinite long conductor carrying current 𝐼1 is placed near to an infinite
long plane sheet carrying current 𝐼2 as shown in figure. The current is
distributed uniformly over the width of sheet b. If b=4a then the magnetic
𝜇𝑜 𝑝𝐼1 𝐼2
force per unit length between them is then p = ___________
4𝜋 𝑏
[𝑙𝑛 1 0 = 2.303, 𝑙𝑜𝑔 2 = 0.301]

IN
D
IA
N
SC
H
O
4
O
3.22
L
O
F
2I1I 2
4. F1 = 0
ln(1 + b / a)
4 b
PH
Y
SI
CS
5. Three identical capacitors C1 , C2 and C3 have a capacitance of 1.0 F each
and they are uncharged initially. They are connected in a circuit as shown in
the figure and C1 is then filled completely with a dielectric material of
relative permittivity r . The cell electromotive force (emf) V0 = 8V . First the
switch S1 is closed while the switch S 2 is kept open. When the capacitor C3 is
fully charged, S1 is opened and S 2 is closed simultaneously. When all the
IN
capacitors reach equilibrium, the charge on C3 is found to be 5 C . The

D
IA
value of r =
N
SC
H
5. 1.5
q = cV
O
C 1 = KC
O
L
O
F
PH
Y
SI
CS
6. In the xy − plane, the region y 0 has a uniform magnetic field B1kˆ and the
region y 0 has another uniform magnetic field B2 kˆ . A positively charged
particle is projected from the origin along the positively charged particle is
projected from the origin along the positive y – axis with speed v0 = ms −1 at
t = 0 , as shown in the figure. Neglect gravity in this problem. Let t = T be the
time when the particle crosses the x − axis from below for the first time. If
B2 = 4 B1 , the average speed of the particle, in ms −1 , along the x − axis in the
time interval T is
IN
y
D
IA
B2
N
v0 = ms −1
x
SC
B1
H
6. 2
O
D1 + D2
vav =
O
t1 + t2
2 ( R1 + R2 )
L
vav =
t1 + t2
O
mv
R=
F
qB
PH
Y
SI
CS
7. A particle having specific charge s is projected in xy-plane with a speed ‘v’.
There exists a uniform magnetic field in z-direction having a fixed
magnitude B0. The field is made to reverse its direction after every interval
2
of . Calculate the maximum separation (in m) between two positions of
B0
v
the particle during its course of motion. (given = 2 metre) (neglect any
B0
IN
other force including gravity throughout the motion)

D
IA
N
SC
7. 8
H
O
O
L
O
F
PH
4mv
AB = = 8 metre
qB0
Y
SI
CS
8. Half portion of a spherical capacitor is filled with a dielectric of dielectric
constant k = 2 and conductivity ‘ ’. The charge given to spherical capacitor
is Q0. Due to the conductivity of dielectric charge leaks the time constant for
n
the discharge circuit is 0
. Find the value of ‘n’.
IN
D
IA
N
SC
8. 3
H
2 ab 0 ( k + 1)
C=
O
(b − a )
O
R=
1 (b − a )
L
ab
2 ab 0 ( k + 1) ( b − a )
O
RC =
(b − a ) 2 ab
F
PH
Y
SI
CS
9. A very long straight conductor has a circular cross-section of radius R and
carries a current density J. Inside the conductor there is a cylindrical hole of
radius 𝑎 whose axis is parallel to the axis of the conductor and a distance b
from it. Let the z-axis be the axis of the conductor. And let the axis of the
hole be at 𝑥 = 𝑏. Find the x-component of magnetic field on the y-axis at
1 𝑎2
𝑦 = 2𝑅. If your answer is 𝐵𝑥 = 𝜇0 𝐽𝑅 ( − ) fill value of |𝐴| + |𝐵|.
𝐴 𝐵𝑅 2 +𝑏2
IN
D
IA
N
SC
H
9. key : 8
i
O
B1 due to total wire at y = 2 R is = 0

i
2 ( 2R )
O
L
O
F
PH
i
B1 due to total wire at y = 2 R is 0
i
2 ( 2R )
Y
(J R2 ) JR ˆ
SI
iˆ =
0
= 0
i
2 ( 2R ) 4
CS
`
Horizontal component of magnetic field due to smaller wire B2 x
− ,i J a2 2R
= .cos 0iˆ `= − 0
. iˆ
2 ( 4R 2 + b2 ) 2 ( 4R + b
2 2
) 4R + b
2 2
Ja 2 R ˆ
= 0
i
( 4R 2 + b2 )
IN
D
10. Two identical rods (each of mass m) are welded on semicircular massless
IA
ring of radius R. The composite system was placed on rough horizontal

surface as shown in figure. The system is released from the position ring
N
rolls on surface without slipping. When line joining AB becomes horizontal

SC
xg
angular velocity of rod AC is , then x is
2R
H
O
O
L
O
F
PH
Y
R 1 3g
10. key : 3 2mg = Ic 2
=
SI
2 2 2R
CS
Paragraph for Question Nos. 11 to 12: [SCQ ] [+3,-1]
Consider a conducting, uniform, thin hemispherical shell of radius ‘R’,
which is connected with two wires along its diameter, carrying current ‘I’ as
shown. Neglect field of connecting wires.
IN
D
IA
N
SC
H
11. What is magnetic field due to hemi-sphere at it’s center?

O
O
𝜇0 𝐼 𝜇 𝐼 𝐼
A) B) 2𝜋𝑅
0
C) √2𝜇 0
D) Zero
L
2𝑅 4𝑅
12. If uniform magnetic field B, is applied in direction perpendicular to base of

O
F
hemisphere ,what will be torque on it about the centre of the base?

PH
𝐼𝑅 2 𝐵 𝜋𝐼𝑅 2 𝐵
A) 𝐼𝑅2 𝐵 B) 𝜋
C) 2
D) Zero
Y
SI
CS
Key : 11 B 12 D
i
11. Magnetic field due to a half ring at it’s center 0
. Break hemisphere into
4R
many half rings connected at junction with external wires. Current in each
I
half ring i = d
i
So Bnet = 0
sin
4R
IN
D
IA
N
=
I
SC
= 0
d sin
=0
4 R
I
H
B= 0
2 R
O
12. Force passes through centre.

O
L
O
F
PH
Y
SI
CS
Paragraph for Question Nos. 13 & 14 : [MCQ +4 , -1 ]
A large parallel plate capacitor with uniform surface charge on the upper
plate & – on the lower is moving with a constant speed V as shown in
figure.
V
+ V
IN
–
D
13. Magnetic field between the plates is –

IA
A) Parallel to the plates and perpendicular to velocity

N
B)Parallel to velocity and perpendicular to plates

SC
𝜇0 𝜎𝑉
C)
2
H
D) 𝜇0 𝜎𝑉
O
O
14. Magnetic force per unit area on the upper plate, including its direction –
L
𝜇0 𝜎 2 𝑣 2
A) 𝜇0 𝜎 2 𝑣 2 B)
O
2
F
C) Upwards D) Downward
PH
Y
SI
CS
13 AD 14 BC
CS
SI
Y
PH
F
O
L
O
O
H
SC
N
IA
19: AD 20 : BC
D
IN
Single choice correct [ + 3 , -1 ]
15. A small electric dipole P is placed on the X – axis at the point (1, 0). The
dipole vector forms an angle of 30 with the X – axis. Consider a non –
uniform electric field to have been applied in the region given by the vector
𝐸⃗ = 𝑥 2 𝑖̂ + 𝑦 2 𝑗̂. What is the force acting on the dipole?
IN
D
IA
N
A) 2|𝑃⃗| 𝑐𝑜𝑠 3 0°(𝑖̂ + 2𝑗̂) B) 2|𝑃⃗| 𝑐𝑜𝑠 3 0°(𝑖̂)

SC
C) 2|𝑃⃗| 𝑐𝑜𝑠 3 0°(2𝑗̂) D) Data insufficient

H
O
O
1. B
L
E
Fx = P .
O
x
F
PH
Y
SI
CS
16. A neutral particle at rest in a uniform magnetic field decays into two charged
particles of different masses at point P, as shown in the figure. The energy
released goes to their kinetic energy and particles move in the plane of the
paper. Magnetic field is into the plane of paper. Select the diagram which
describes path followed by the particles most approximately.
IN
A) B) C) D)
D
IA
N
SC
2. B
Conceptual
H
O
O
L
O
F
PH
Y
SI
CS
Multichoice multi correct [ + 5, -2 ]
17. A metal sphere of radius a is surrounded by a concentric metal sphere of

inner radius of b, where b > a. The space between the spheres is filled with a
material whose electrical conductivity varies with the electric field
strength E as 𝜎 = 𝑘𝐸 where k is a constant.
A potential difference V is maintained between spheres.

IN
A) Current is 4𝜋𝑟 2 𝑘𝐸 2 , where (𝑎 < 𝑟 < 𝑏)

D
IA
B) Current is 2𝜋𝑟 2 𝑘𝐸 2 , 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒(𝑎 < 𝑟 < 𝑏)

N
𝐼 𝑏
C) Potential difference between spheres is 𝑉 = √ ℓ𝑛 ( ) where I is total
4𝜋𝑘 𝑎
SC
current
H
𝐼 𝑏
D) Potential difference between spheres is 𝑉 = √ ℓ𝑘 ( ) where I is total
2𝜋𝑘 𝑎
O
current
O
L
O
F
PH
12. AC
𝑑𝑉 𝐸𝑑𝑟
𝐼= = = 𝑘𝐸 2 4𝜋𝑟 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (𝑖)
𝑑𝑅 𝑑𝑟
Y
𝜎4𝜋𝑟 2
SI
𝑑𝑉 = 𝐸. 𝑑𝑟
1
From (1)𝐸 2 = 4𝜋𝑘𝑟 2
CS
𝑏 𝐼 1
⇒ 𝑑𝑉 = ∫𝑎 √4𝜋𝑘 𝑟 𝑑𝑟
18. A conducting medium is shaped in a form of a quarter of an annulus of radii
‘b’ and 𝑎(𝑏 > 𝑎) and thickness ‘t’. Specific resistance of the medium is ‘ ’.
The CORRECT option(s) is/are
IN
D
IA
N
SC
2𝜌 𝑏
H
A) Resistance between faces LMNO and PQRS is 𝜋𝑡 𝑙𝑛 𝑎

O
𝜋𝜌
B) Resistance between faces LMRS and ONQP is
O
𝑏
2𝑡 𝑙𝑛( )
𝑎
L
4𝑡𝜌
C) Resistance between faces MRQN and LSPO is 𝑏2−𝑎2
O
F
D) Between faces LMNO & PQRS and LMRS & ONQP, resistance is same.
PH
Key : AB
Y
Between faces LMNO and PQRS

𝜌𝑑𝑟
SI
𝑑𝑅 = 𝜋
𝑡 𝑟
2
CS
2𝜌 𝑏
𝑅 = 𝑙𝑛
𝑡𝜋 𝑎
Between faces LMRS and ONQP for an element at distance r from O.
𝜋
𝜌 𝑟
2
𝑑𝑅 =
𝑡𝑑𝑟
1 1 𝑏 𝑡𝑑𝑟 2𝑡 𝑏
So, =∫ = ∫𝑎 𝜋 = 𝑙𝑛 ( )
𝑅 𝑑𝑅 𝜌 𝑟 𝜌𝜋 𝑎
2
R=
b
2t ln
a
19. A small disc of mass ‘m’ is released on a parabolic curve in a vertical plane
such that gravity acts along negative y-axis. The equation of parabolic curve
2𝑎
is 𝑥 2 = √3 𝑦, where ‘a’ is a positive constant. Frictional force between disc
and curve are sufficient for pure rolling. When disc is reached at 𝑥 = 𝑎 then
choose the CORRECT option(s).
IN
D
IA
N
SC
A) Acceleration of disc along the trajectory is √3𝑔

H
𝑔
B) Acceleration of disc along the trajectory is √3
O
O
𝑚𝑔
C) Frictional force between disc and curve is 2√3
L
𝑚𝑔
D) Frictional force between disc and curve is
O
√3
F
PH
Key : BC
Y
2𝑎
𝑥2 = 𝑦
SI
√3
2 𝑑𝑦
=> 2𝑥 = 𝑎 𝑑𝑥
√3
CS
𝑥
𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃 = √3 = 600
𝑎
𝑔 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝑔
𝑎= =
𝐼
1 + 𝑐𝑚2 √3
𝑚𝑅
𝑚𝑔 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃 𝑚𝑔
𝑓= =
𝑚𝑅 2 2√3
1+ 𝐼
𝑐𝑚
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy
(SRI SARVANI EDUCATIONAL SOCIETY)
COMMON CENTRAL OFFICE-MADHAPUR-HYDERABAD
Sec: Sr. COIPL Date: 27-01-19
Time: 09:00 AM to 12:00 NOON Max. Marks: 210
Name of the Student: ___________________ H.T. NO:
2012_PAPER-I
27-01-19_Sr.COIPL_Jee-Adv_GTA-01_SYLLABUS
MATHS : Total Syllabus
PHYSICS : Total Syllabus
CHEMISTRY : Total Syllabus
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 27-01-19_Sr.COIPL_Ph-III_JEE-Adv_2012-P1_GTA-1_Q'P
IIT-JEE-2012-P1-Model
Time: 3:00 hour’s IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 210
PHYSICS:
+Ve - Ve No.of Total
Section Question Type
Marks Marks Qs marks
Sec – I(Q.N : 1 – 10) Questions with Single Correct Choice 3 -1 10 30
Questions with Multiple Correct
Sec – II(Q.N : 11 – 15) 4 0 5 20
Choice
Sec – III(Q.N : 16 – 20) Questions with Integer Answer Type 4 0 5 20
Total 20 70
CHEMISTRY:
Sec – II( Q.N : 31 – 35) Questions with Multiple Correct Choice 4 0 5 20
Total 20 70
MATHEMATICS:
Sec – II(Q.N : 51 – 55) Questions with Multiple Correct Choice 4 0 5 20
Total 20 70
Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 2

PHYSICS Max.Marks:70
SECTION I
SINGLE CORRECT ANSWER TYPE
This section contains 10 multiple choice questions. Each question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of
which ONLY ONE is correct.
Marking scheme +3 for correct answer , 0 if not attempted and -1 in all other cases.
1. A hollow smooth tube of mass 2m is lying at rest on a smooth horizontal surface
between two smooth parallel vertical walls as shown in the figure. A small smooth ball
of mass m moving with velocity u enters into the tube. [All observations are to be
made w.r.t ground] Maximum KE of the tube is
mu 2 mu 2 mu 2 2
A) B) C) D) mu 2
36 18 9 9

2. One of the surfaces of a biconvex lens of focal length +10 cm is silvered as shown in
the figure . The radius of curvature of silvered surface is 10 cm. It is found that the
speed of the image as seen from the ground frame at the instant shown in figure is
43 +
m/s . What should be the value of ?
49
A) 20 B) 8 C) 16 D) 4
3. A spherical ball of density and radius 0.003 m is dropped into a big
tube containing a viscous fluid. Viscosity of the fluid = 1.260 N.m 2 .s and its density
L = / 2 = 1260 kg.m-3 . Find its terminal speed in cm/s. (g= acceleration due to
gravity = 10 ms 2 ).
A) 4 B) 6 C) 2 D) 8

4. A massless cylindrical container of base area 100 cm 2 contains a solid of volume
V = 500 cm 3 of specific gravity 2. The container is floating in another cylindrical
2
container of base area 1000 cm . If the solid is shifted from container 1 to 2, the
height through which the liquid level decreases by
A) 0.5 cm B) 1cm C) 2cm D) 0.25 cm

5. The peripheral velocity of a point on the equator of a planet is v0 due to rotation of the
planet about its own axis. The effect of rotation of the planet makes the weight of a
body at the equator to half of the weight at the poles .What is the escape velocity of
polar particle in terms of v0?
A) v0 B) 2v0 C) 3v0 D) 4v0
6. Pressure variation due a sonic wave propagating along positive x –direction is given
by the equation P ( x ) = P0 sin 2 ( vt x ) . One end of an open organ pipe is closed by
a cap and held at rest with its axis parallel to x –axis and the open end at the origin.

What should be the maximum value of frictional force required between the cap and
the pipe so that pipe will remain closed. Given P0 = 2 × 103 N / m 2 and cross sectional
area of the tube is equal to 5 ×10 4 m2 . (Assume formation of standing waves ).
A) 1N B) 2N C) 4N D) 4 ×103 N
7. Two ideal solenoids of same dimensions one is air cored with 600 turns while other is
Aluminium cored with 200 turns(relative permeability of Aluminium is 3) are
connected in a circuit as shown in the figure. The switch S is closed at t = 0. Find the
ratio of potential difference across air-cored solenoid to that of Aluminium cored
solenoid at any time t.
1
A) 3 B) 1 C) D) 9
9
R
8. Two short cylinders of radius r = each are connected to the bases of a solid cylinder
3
of radius R and length L. The mass of the solid cylinder is M and the moment of
MR 2
inertia of the short cylinders in negligible (The total moment of inertia is )
2
The body is placed in such a way that it leans on the two short cylinders, upon two
inclined planes with an inclination angle . A string is wrapped around the cylinder of
radius R, and a force F is exerted on the string parallel to the incline. The acceleration
‘a’ with which the cylinder rolls up the incline is,
(Assume that the cylinder does not slip)
2 4 F Mg sin 4 F Mg sin
A) B)
11 M M
2 F Mg sin 2 F g sin
C) D)
11 M 11 M
9. A particle is projected from the top of an inclined plane at an angle to the

horizontal, as shown in the figure. The particle strikes at a point on the incline 25 m
below the horizontal. The horizontal displacement is 75m. If the particle, after
projection, rises to a maximum height of 20m above the point of projection, then is
(g =10m / s2)

4 3
A) tan 1
B) tan 1
C) tan 1
( 3) D) tan 1
( 4)
3 4
10. The decay chain that leads from 92U238 to 82Pb206 consists of alpha and beta decays.
+
How many particles are emitted if there is only one decay
A) 6 B) 8 C) 9 D) 7
SECTION II
MULTIPLE CORRECT ANSWER(S) TYPE
which ONE or MORE are correct.
Marking scheme +4 for correct answer , 0 if not attempted and 0 in all other cases.
11. Two adiabatic processes involving an ideal gas are plotted on a P-V diagram .A and B
are two points on these curves as shown in the diagram. Which of the following
statements are wrong?

A) Heat is given to system in the process AB

B) Heat is rejected by system in the process AB
C) Whether heat is rejected or absorbed by the system during the process AB depends
on the magnitude of the slope of line AB
D) Whether heat is rejected or absorbed by the system during the process AB depends
on the position of the points A and B on the P-V diagram
12. E1 is energy of K photon of aluminium, E2 is energy of K photon of aluminium
and E3 is energy of K photon from sodium, then the wrong order of energies is given
as
A) E1 > E2 > E3 B) E3 > E2 > E1 C) E3 > E1 > E2 D) E2 > E1 > E3
13. The figure shows current varying with time. The magnitude of constant direct current
for a particular time which would produce same heat in an identical resistance as
produced by given time varying current in three seconds is

i(amp)
t(sec)
1 2 3
–1
1
A) 1 A when passed for 15 seconds B) A when passed for 15 seconds
3
5 5
C) A when passed for 3 seconds D) A when passed for 3 seconds
3 9
14. The figure shows a circular loop made of a wire. The resistivity of the material varies
as a function of such that = 0 sin 2 . The positions of the jockey such that the
magnetic field at the centre (O) due to the current in the loop is zero, will be
A
D O B
E
C
3
A) = B) = C) = D) =
2 2 4
15. A block of mass ‘m’ is resting on a smooth horizontal floor of a truck attached to its
front by a spring of force constant K. At time t = 0, the truck begins to move with
constant acceleration of ‘a’. As a consequence, the block starts to make SHM on the
floor of truck.
A) The amplitude of oscillations is ma/K
B) The amplitude of oscillation is 2ma/K
m
C) The time period of oscillation is 2
K
m
D) The time period of oscillation is
K
SECTION- III
INTEGER ANSWER TYPE
This section contains 5 questions. The answer to each question is single digit integer, ranging from 0 to 9
(both inclusive).
16. A liquid flows at the rate of 1/4200 kg/s through a tube and is heated by a heater
dissipating 25 W. The inflow and outflow liquid temperatures are 25ºC and 30ºC
respectively. When the rate of flow is increased to 1/2100 kg/s and the rate of heating
to 30 W, the inflow and outflow temperatures are unaltered. If the rate of loss of heat
from the tube is 5z watt, then find z.

17. Consider a plane inclined at an angle 45° with the horizontal has two narrow slits ( S1
and S2 ) separated by a distance d = 2 mm. The screen is placed at a distance of

D = 10 m . A parallel monochromatic light beam of wavelength 5000 Å is incident on
the slits as shown. If the fringe width of interference pattern on the screen in the region
close to the opposite point to the midpoint between the slits is k × 10 3 meter, then find
the value of k.
S2
10 meter
S1
45°
screen
18. In the circuit shown, the potential difference between points A and B is 50n V. Then n
is
10µF
A 10
10
5 µF
10
10
B
100V
10
19. Two conducting square plates with length l are arranged parallel to each other at a
distance d (<< l). The space between the plates is filled with a dielectric of relative
permittivity r = 4 up to a length x = l / 3. The upper plate is given a charge Q and
the lower plate is given a charge – Q as shown in the figure. If Q = 6 µC then find
how much charge (in µC ) is present on the portion of upper plate which is in contact
with the dielectric?
20. On a rough table, three blocks (including the first block) are placed as shown in the
figure. Mass of each block is m and coefficient of friction for each block is µ . A force
F is applied on the first block so as to move the system. If the minimum value of F
required is nµ mg , find n.
T2 T3
F m m m
µ µ µ

CHEMISTRY Max.Marks:70
SECTION I
21. To determine the molar mass of a solid monoprotic acid, a student titrated a weighed
sample of the acid with standardized aqueous NaOH. Which of the following could
explain why the student obtained a molar mass that was too large?
A) Failure to rinse all the acid from the weighing paper into the titration vessel.
B) Addition of more water than was needed to dissolve the acid.
C) Addition of some base beyond the equivalence point.
D) Weighing more acid than used in calculation.
22. If most probable speed is represented by ‘mps’ and fraction of molecules possessing
this speed by ‘f ’, then with increase in temperature.
A) Both ‘mps’ and f will increase
B) ‘mps’ will increase but ‘f ’ will decrease
C) Both will decrease
D) ‘mps’ will decrease but ‘f ’ will increase

23. Which of the following statements concerning a radial wave function ( ) of a H-like
species is incorrect?
A) It has properties of standing wave.
B) It changes sign when plotted against distance from nucleus.
C) It is maximum at r = 0 (at nucleus)
D) It can have more than one maxima / minima when plotted against distance from
nucleus.
24. In the nuclear decay X Y + Z , the reaction can occur if.
A) mass X > (mass Y + mass Z) B) mass X < (mass Y + mass Z)
C) mass X > (mass Y mass Z) D) 2 x mass X > (mass Y + mass Z)
25. Which of the following statements is incorrect?
A) Combination of tin stone and wolframite is non-magnetic.
B) No external reducing agent is required for the extraction of Hg from H2O.
C) For extraction of copper in Bessemer converter, the process like slag formation,
oxidation, and reduction take place.
D) Poling method is mainly used when impure metal has its oxide as impurity.

26. Which of the following conditions is not suitable for the brown ring test of NO2 ?
A) FeSO4 added must be freshly prepared
B) H2SO 4 added should be concentrated
C) Acetic acid may be used as an alternative acid
D) Shaking or warming is not allowed
27. The water repelling characteristic of silicones is due to
A) The presence of alkyl group pointed towards surface.
B) Strong Si–O–Si – bonds.
C) Low surface area.
D) High van der wall’s forces.
28. Which of the following statement is wrong regarding copper sulphate?
A) It reacts with KI to give I2.
B) It reacts with KCl to give Cl2.
C) It tartarate complex reacts with NaOH and glucose followed by heating to give
Cu2O.
D) It gives CuO on strong heating in air.

29. A solution of aniline in aq. HCl was first mixed with aceticanhydride. Upon adding an
aqueous solution of sodium acetate a white precipitate formed. This product is likely
to be
A) Acetanilide B) Benzamide
C) Phenylisocyanide D) Phenyldiazoniumchloride
30. The reaction of 1,3-dimethylbenzene with POCl3 in DMG yields.
A) 4-chloro-1,3-dimethylbenzene B) 3-methylbenzylchloride
C) 3,5-dimethylbenzaldehyde D) 2,4-dimethylbenzaldehyde
SECTION II
31. The correct statement(s) regarding semiconductor is/are
A) Intrinsic semiconductors have very low electrical conductivity for any practical
purpose.
B) Doping of Si by tellurium gives n-type semiconductor.
C) Doping of Si by Be given p-type semiconductor.
D) Increasing temperature increases electrical conductivity.
32. Consider sublimation of camphor at 25oC and 1.0 atm. Which of the following is (are)
true for sublimation process?
A) H > 0 B) E > 0 C) q > 0 D) E < 0
33. Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
A) The peroxide ion has a bond order of 1 while the oxygen molecule has a bond order
of 2.
B) The peroxide ion has a weaker bond than the dioxygen molecule has.
C) The peroxide ion as well as the dioxygen molecule are paramagnetic.
D) The bond length of the peroxide ion is greater than that of the dioxygen molecule.
34. Which of the following compounds cannot obtained in enantiomeric pure form?
CH3
CH3
A) CH3 B) CH3
CH3
H3 C CH3
C) H3C D)
35. On reaction with NaNO2 and HCl, which of the following amino alcohol(s) will yield
compound P?
CHO
P
A) B)
C) D)
SECTION III
INTEGER ANSWER TYPE
(both inclusive).
36. How many of the following are in the correct order with respect to the given property?
(i) H 2 > He : Boiling point order
(ii) He > Ne > Ar > Kr > Xe : Boiling point order
(iii) S > O > Se > Te : electron affinity
(iv) Diamond > graphite : Thermal conductivity order
(v) HF > HI > HBr > HCl : Boiling point order

37. How many of the following shows Jahn Teller distortion?
i) d4 – high spin ii) d7 – low spin iii) d9
iv) d3 v) d4 – low spin vi) d7 – high spin
38. ( )
The solubility product constant K sp of M ( OH ) 2 is 5 × 10 19
at 25o C . pH of a
saturated aqueous solution of M ( OH )2 at 25o C , would be
39. % of the atom economy of Diels-Alder reaction is ‘Y’. Then the first digit of ‘Y’ is
40. The number of reducing sugars among the following is
CH2OH
HOHO O OH
OH O
OMe HOHO O
HO H OH
O OMe
HO HO OH HO OH H OH
HO OMe OH
OH HO H OH
OH OH OH CH2OH

MATHEMATICS Max.Marks:70
SECTION I
41. Minimum length of projection of the line segment joining (1, 1, 1) and (2, 3, 4) on a
plane (p) perpendicular to x + y + z = 0 is . Then which of the following is true ?
6
A) = and is true for infinite planes(p)
3
3
B) =2 and is true for exactly one plane(p)
14
C) = 6 and is true for more than one plane(p)
D) = 0 and is true for more than one plane(p)

1
42. Given a function g, continuous everywhere such that g (1) = 5 and g ( t ) dt = 2 . If
0
x
1 2
f (x) = t g ( x t ) dt, then what is the value of f ''' (1) + f '' (1) ?
20
A) 3 B) 19 C) 7 D) 49
z2 z + 1
43. Number of complex numbers satisfying = z is
z2 + z + 1
A) 4 B) 2 C) 0 D) Infinity
min{f ( t ) :0 t x, x [0, ] then which of the following is true
44. f ( x ) = cos x and g ( x ) =
sin x 1 ; x>
?
A) g ( x ) is discontinuous of x =
B) g ( x ) is continuous for x [ 0, )
C) g ( x ) is differentiable at x =
D) g ( x ) is differentiable for x [ 0, )
45. 2 Boys & 2 girls write letters to each another. The letters are arranged in the grid given
below one in each box, the grid has 8 red boxes and 4 blue boxes. Then the no. of
ways in which letters written to a particular boy goes to blue boxes only is
B B
R RR R
R R R R
B B
A) 4 ( 9!) B) 4 ( 3!) C) 4 (8!) D) 8P4

46. If a,b,c,d are selected from the set { 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}, what is the probability that
e ax 1 bx 2c 2 x 2
Lt = 36 if it's given that the limit is non-zero finite ?
( d tan 1 x )
3
x 0
1 1 1 1
A) B) C) D)
18 64 63 24

47. If , [0, 2 ] , then number of ordered pairs ( , ) satisfying
sin 3 + 27 cos3 36sin cos + 64 = 0 is/are
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4
48. A cubic expression y = P ( x ) has extrema at x = 0 and x = 3 whose leading coefficient
10
is 2 and P (1) = 6 . Then P ( r )( 1)
r 10
Cr =
r =1
A) 7 B) 0 C) -1 D) 4
r r +1 r +2
10
C1 C1 C1
r +1 r+2
r
C2 C2 C2 =
49. r =1 r r +1 r+2
___ if ( n
C r = 0 if n < r )
C3 C3 C3
A) 2865 B) 715 C) 2860 D) 720
50. Three numbers 1 , 2 , 3 are in G.P. such that 1 , 2 , 3 1 are in A.P. If 1 is such that
x y + z = 2,, 2x + 2y + 1 z = 7, 3x + 1 y + 4y + z = 12 has infinite solutions, then which of
the following is/are true ?
A) 1 + 2, 2 + 1, 3 form an A.P.
B) 1 + 2, 2 + 1, 3 form a G.P.
C) Maximum and minimum values of the function y = 1 sin x + 2 cos x are 3 and 3
respectively
7
D) Range of the function y = 1 tan 1 x + 3 cot 1 x is ,
2 2

SECTION - II
dy
51. If y = y1 (x) & y 2 (x) are two solutions to the differential equation + P ( x ) y = Q ( x ) then
dx
which of the following is true ?
A) y = 3y1 2y 2 is also a solution to the differential equation
B) y = 3y1 + 2y 2 is also a solution to the differential equation
1 x3
C) If P ( x ) = & Q ( x ) = x, then general solution is xy = +C
x 3
1 y3
D) If P ( x ) = & Q ( x ) = x, the general solution is xy = + C
x 3
52. A room has 4 doors ( D1 , D 2 , D3 , D 4 ) A person entering through a door can't leave by
.
the same door and is equally likely to leave from the rest. A person P enters the room
and leaves. Then which of the following is/are false ?
1
A) Probability for P to leave from even numbered door is
2
7
B) Probability for P to leave from even numbered door is
12
C) If the person left from door 2, the probability that he has entered from door 1 is
1
4
D) If the person left from door 2, the probability that he has entered from door 1 is
1
2

53. f : [ a, b ] [5, 6] be defined as y = f ( x ) = 2x 3 9x 2 + 12x + 1
Then which of the following is true?

1
A) Minimum value of a for y = f ( x ) to be a one-one function is
2
B) Maximum value of a for y = f ( x ) to be a one-one function is 2
C) Minimum value of b for y = f ( x ) to be an onto function is 1.

5
D) Maximum value of b for y = f ( x ) to be an onto function is
2
54. e x ( sin x ) dx = A1 , then which of the following is/are true ?

0
A) A1 2 e B) A1
( e)
2
e
C) A1 4 + e D) A1 e
4 4 4
55. Locus of centre of the circles with radius 1 which is tangent to the tangent of x 2 y 2 = 1
at eccentric angle = is 2x 2 + y2 + 1xy + 2 x + 3 y + 4 = 0 then which of the following

4
is/are true ?
A) 1 = 2 2 B) 2 = 2 2 C) 2 =0 D) 3 =0
SECTION III
INTEGER ANSWER TYPE
(both inclusive).
56. Radius of the circle which touches the tangents drawn from ( -2, 0) to the parabola
, then 2 ( + 1) = ______
2
y 2 = 4x & the parabola y 2 = 4x is
57. A triangle ABC has position vectors of it's vertices as
( ) ( ) ( )
A j + 2k , B 3i + 4 j + 7k , C 4i + 2 j + k . A point P inside the triangle ABC ( lying in the
plane of the triangle) is such that area of triangle PAB = 2 (Area of triangle PBC ) = 4
(Area of triangle PAC ) then position vectors of P is 1 i+ 2 j+ 3 k then

+ + =
1 2 3
____
( . denotes G.I.F )
58. The function y = f ( x ) is represented parametrically x = ( t ) = t5 5t 3 20t + 7 &
y= ( t ) = 4t 3 3t 2 18t + 3 ( 2 < t < 2 ) , then if local maximum and local minimum
values of the function are 1 & 2 then 1 + 2 = ? ([.] denotes G.I.F)

( )
2
59. Number of integral values of "x " for which log{x} [ x ] 3log{x} [ x ] + 2 0 is 1 &
( )
2
number of real values of "x " for which log[x ] {x} 3log[x ] {x} + 2 = 0 is 2 then
1 + 2 = ................ ( [.] denotes G.I.F and {.} denotes fractional part )
b c
60. If vectors a, b & c are such that a = = = 1, then the maximum value of
2 3
2 2 2
a b +b c +c a is 1 , then number of positive integral divisors for 1 is 2 and
2 1
the number of positive integral even divisor for 1 + 2 is 3 , then = ( [.]
2 + 3
denotes G.I.F )..............

Sec: Sr. COIPL GTA-1 Date: 27-01-19
Time: 09:00 AM to 12:00 NOON 2012_P1 Max.Marks:210
KEY SHEET
PHYSICS
1 C 2 B 3 C 4 A 5 B
6 B 7 A 8 A 9 A 10 D
11 BC D 12 A BC 13 BC 14 AB C 15 AC
16 4 17 5 18 1 19 4 20 7
CHEMISTRY
21 A 22 B 23 C 24 A 25 A
26 B 27 A 28 B 29 A 30 D
31 AB C D 32 ABC 33 AB D 34 BC D 35 BC
36 3 37 3 38 8 39 1 40 3
MATHS
41 A 42 C 43 B 44 B 45 A
46 A 47 A 48 C 49 B 50 D
51 AC 52 BCD 53 ACD 54 AC D 55 AB
56 6 57 6 58 3 59 0 60 7
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 27-01-19_Sr.COIPL_JEE-ADV_2012-P1_GTA-1_Key & Sol’s
SOLUTIONS
PHYSICS
1. Horizontal momentum of system is conserved parallel to the walls. KE of tube is
maximum when the ball and tube get common velocity.
u
mu = ( 3m) Vc Vc =
3
1 mu 2
KEmax of the tube = ( 2m) Vc =
2
2 9
2. Let f S is the focal length of equivalent mirror.
1 2 1 2 1 1
= = = f S = 2.5cm
fS fL f M 10 5 2.5
2
f
VI VM =
f u
(V0 VM )
2
2.5
VI 1 = ( 1 1)
2.5 + 20
2
1 2 51 43 + 8
VI = 1 + 2 = =1+ = m/s
7 49 49 49
3. vt =
2
r2 ( 2
g
=
2
9 )
× 9 × 10 6 [1260] × 10
= 2 × 10 2 m / s
9 1.26
4. Let vi is initial immersed volume of small container. 500 ( 2) g = vi (1) g vi = 1000 cm3 .
This is initial volume of liquid displaced. Final volume of liquid displaced will be
V = 500 cm3 only.
vi V 100 500 1
Decrease in liquid level h = = = cm
A 1000 2
2
mv mg gR
5. mg 0
= v0 = but ve = 2 gR
R 2 2
ve 2 gR
= ve = 2v0
v0 gR
2
6. f max = 2 ( p0 ) A = 4 × 103 × 5 × 10 4 = 2 N
µN 2 A
7. L= L µN 2
dI
V =L V L V µN 2
dt
2
Vair µ 600
= 0 =3
VAl µ 0 µ r 200
Sec: Sr. COIPL Page 2

8.
F a
R
r
mg sin
F f Mg sin = Ma ………(1)
About center,
MR 2
FR + fr = ……….(2)
2
Constraint equation is a = r ……(3)
R
On solving (1), (2) and (3) and substituting r = ,
3
2
We get a =
11M
[ 4F Mg sin ]
u 2 sin 2
9. Maximum height H = = 20
2g
u sin = 20 (1)
Vertically , the particle has a displacement of 25m downwards.
If t is the total time taken, then
1 2
25 = ( u sin )t gt 5t 2 20t 25 = 0
2
Or t 2 4t 5 = 0
Or t = 5S , rejecting the negative root
In t = 5S , horizontal displacement = 75 m. Therefore, ( u cos ) × 5 = 75
(u cos ) = 15 ( 2)
Eq (1) and (2) yield
20 4 4
tan = = = tan 1
15 3 3
10. If x,y and 2 are the no.of +
+ partides euitted then
, and
238-4x = 206 ------- (1)
92 – 2x+y-z = 82 ------(2)
Y – z = 6 hence if z = 1 then y = 7
11. Assume a clockwise cyclic process by considering one adiabatic process and one
isochoric process drawn from upper to lower curve, along with AB. Q net must be +ve
and Q isochoric is –Ve. Hence QAB will be +ve always.
12 Z Al > Z Na Energy of K for Al > energy of K for Na
Also energy of K fore some metal > energy of K
13. Heat = i2 Rdt

1 2 3
1 R 5R
= (t) 2 Rdt + 12 Rdt + (3 t) 2 Rdt = R+R + =
0 1 2 3 3 3
5R 5 5
I2 R × 3 = , I2 = , I1 = A
3 9 3
5R 1
I 2 R × 15 = , I2 = A
3 3
14. Consider two sectors one of and other of (2 )
B at O will be zero if I1 = I2 (2 )
E E
I1 = , I2 =
R1 R2
2
So =
R1 R2
I1
I2
(2 – )
sin 2
R1 = 0
Rd similarly we can get R2
A
3
On solving we get = , ,
2 2
15. Conceptual
16. If P be the rate of loss of heat from the tube, C be the specific heat of liquid
P + mC ( 30 25) = 25
P + m ' C ( 30 25) = 30
On solving P = 20 W
17.
p
N S1
y
d
2
M
d
2
4
D O
4
S2
After S1, S2, the path difference at ‘p’ is

d
x1 = S 2 M = ( d ) cos
4
= [ cos + sin ]
2
If ' ' is very small, cos 1,sin

d
x1 = [1 + ] ………..(1)
2
Before S1, S2, the path difference is
d
x2 = d sin = ………(2)
4 2
d
At P, the net path difference is x = x1 x2 =
2
d y
=
2 D
d y
Change in path difference x =
2 D
If x = then y =
2 D 2 × 5 × 10 7 × 10
= = = 5 × 10 3 m
d 2 × 10 3
18. Current through AC is

100
I= = 5A
20
VAC = 5 × 10 = 50 V.
n = 1.
10µF 10µF
A 10 C 10
10 A C
10 shorted
5 µF
10 5 µF
10 I
10
B
100V B
100V
10
shorted
19.
E1 E2
1 2
x
E1 = E 2 , since the potential difference between the plates is same.
1
= 2
1 =4 2
e 0 0
Also 4 2 x+ 2 ( x) = Q

Q 4
2 = 2 1 = 2
+3 x +3 x
4Q 2Q
1 = = 2
2
+3 ×
3
2
Required change Q1 = 1 x= 1
3
2Q
Q1 = = 4µC
3
20. T3 = µ mg
T2 = µmg + 2T3 = 3µmg
F = µ mg + 2T2 = 7 µ mg
CHEMISTRY
21. If all acid from weighing paper is not transferred into titration vessel, the determined
mole will be less than the expected. Hence, molar mass calculated from this mole
m
value will be much higher; M = .
n
2RT
22. mps = Increasing temperature will increases mps but distribution will be
M
broaden.
23. At r = 0, is minimum.
24. Fission reaction must be exothermic, i.e., there must be mass loss.
25. Combination of tin stone and wolframite is magnetic.
26. Concentrated H2SO4 cannot be used in this test instead of dil. H2SO4 because it
produces intense brown fumes with NO2 and under these conditions no ring can be
observed.
27. The presence of alkyl group pointed towards surface.
28. It cannot give Cl2.
29. Conceptual.
30. Conceptual.
31. Intrinsic semiconductors are the pure substance. In absence of doping, electrical
conductivity is so small that it has no practical use. Tellurium is from G-16, gives n-
type while Be is from G-2, gives p-type semiconductors.
Also in case of semiconductors, increasing temperature increase kinetic energy of
electrons more than band gap, hence electrical conductivity is increased.
32. Sublimation is an endothermic process.
H , E and q are all positive.
33.
H O O HO = O
BO = 1 BO = 2
O22 is diamagnetic * 2 p 4 while O2 is paramagnetic.

34. Conceptual.
35. Conceptual.
36. (i) H 2 > He : Boiling point order
(iv) Diamond > graphite : Thermal conductivity order
(v) HF > HI > HBr > HCl : Boiling point order
37. Jahn Teller theorem.
38. K sp = 4S 3 = 5 × 10 19
7 6
S = 5 × 10 and OH = 25 = 10
pOH = 6 and pH = 8 .
39. Conceptual.
40. Conceptual.
MATHS
41. shifting (1, 1, 1) to ( 0, 0, 0) ( 2, 3, 4) goes to ( 1, 2, 3)
6
min = dist . from (1, 2, 3) to x + y + z = 0 which is and this result is true for all
3
parallel planes
x
42. 2f ( x ) = (x 2
2xt + t 2 ) g ( t ) dt
0
x
2f ' ( x ) = x 2g ( x ) + g ( t ) dt.2x
0
x
2 x g(x) +
2
tg ( t ) dt + x 2g ( x )
0
x
f '' ( x ) = 2g ( x ) + g ( t ) dt xg ( x )
0
x
f '' ( x ) = g ( t ) dt
0
f ''' ( x ) = g ( x )
z2 z + 1
43. =z
z2 + z + 1
z2 + 1 z + 1
= z 1
2 z2 z 1
1
z+ must be purely real
z
e i
In rei + =0
r

sin
r sin =0 = 0 as r 1
r
x2 x +1
= x for x > 0 1 solution
x2 + x +1
for x < 0 no solution
cos x ; 0 x
44. g (x) =
sin x 1; x >
45. 4 × 3 = 12 letters
( 3 letters to say boy 1 must go to 3 of the 4 boxes and the rest has no restriction )
a3
46. a =b ; a = 2C; must be non-zero finite for sample space whereas a = b; a = 2C,
6 d3
a3
= 36 for limit to be 36
6 d3
1 1
= [ a must be an even no. & d can be any no. for denominator ]
3× 6 8
( sin ) + ( 3cos ) + 43 = 3 ( sin )( 3cos )( 4 ) .
3 3
47.
sin = 3cos = 4 ( not possible)
3
or sin = 3cos + 4 = 0 sin = 1cos ,
2
48. P '(x) = ( x )( x 3)
x 2 3x 2
P (x) = (x) +C
3 2
= 6, C = 1
P ( x ) = 2x 3 9x 2 + 1
10
P (r ) ( 1)
r 10
Cr = 0
r =0
10
P ( r )( 1) Cr + P ( 0 ) = 0
r 10
r=0
10
P ( r )( 1)
r 10
Cr = 1
r =0
1 2 3
49. At r = 1 value = 0 1 3 = 1
0 0 1
2 3 4
and at r = 2 = = 1 3 6 = 4
0 1 4
r r +1 r+2
C1 C1 C1
from r = 3 r
C2 r +1
C2 r +2
C2
r r +1 r +2
C3 C3 C3
= ( r )( r + 1)( r + 2 )

r r +1 r+2
10
C1 C1 C1 10
r
C2 r +1
C2 r +2
C2 = v ( r + 1) V ( r )
r =3 r r +1 r +2 r =3
C3 C3 C3
(10 ×11×12 × 13) ( 2x3 × 4 × 5)
1+ 4 + where
24
( r 1)( r )( r + 1)( r + 2 )
V (r) =
24
1 1 1
50. 2 2 1 =0 1 = 1 or - 6 ( No solution)
3 ( 1 + 4) 1
1 = 1, 2 = 2, 3 =4
d ( y1 y 2 )
51. + P ( x )( y1 y 2 ) = 0
dx
y = y1 + C ( y1 y 2 ) is also a solution
dy y x3
& + =x d ( dx ) = x 2dx xy = +C
dx x 3
1 1
D1 4 3 1
52. P = =
D2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
+ +
4 3 4 3 4 3
53. Draw Graph
6
5
1/2
1 2 5/2
5
Option B is wrong as it need not be an onto function ( a can be close to to 0)
2
54. f ( x ) = e x sin x
f ' ( x ) & f '' ( x ) > 0 x 0,

2
Area A1 is lesser than half of the area formed by coordinate axes, x = & y=f
2 2
55. ( 2x y 3 1 ) ( 2x y 1 + 3 = 0 )
2x 2 + y2 2 2xy 2 2x + 2y 2 = 0
1
× 2× 2× 2
56. r= = 2 = 3 1
S 2+ 6
( r + 1)
2
=3

57.
a
1 3
P
2
b c P: 1 c + 2a + 3 b
1+ 2 + 3
dy dx
58. = 12t 2 6t 18 & = 5 ( t 2 4 ) ( t + 1) 0
dt dt
d2 y 3
t ( 2, 2 ) 2
= 24t 6 '' 1 < 0 & '' >0
dt 2
3
minimum value = -17.25 at t =
2
maximum value = 14 at t = - 1
59. 1 log{x} [ x ] 2 but log{x} [ x ] is 0 similarly log[x ] {x} 1, 2 1 , 2 =0
2 2 2
60. a b +b c +c a
(
= 2 (1 + 4 + 9 ) 2 a.b + b.c + c. a )
3 (1 + 4 + 9 ) from a + b + c = 0
42
42 = 2 × 3 × 7 2 =8
& 44 = 4 ×11 = 2 ( 2 ×11) 3 =4
84
=7
12

Time: 02:00 PM to 05:00 PM Max. Marks:186
2016_PAPER-II
16-12-18_Sr.COIPL_Jee-Adv_GTA-05_WEEKEND SYLLABUS
MATHS: TOTAL SYLLABUS
PHYSICS: TOTAL SYLLABUS
CHEMISTRY: TOTAL SYLLABUS
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 16-12-18_Sr. COIPL_JEE-ADV_2016-P2_GTA-05_Q.P
JEE-ADVANCE-2016-P2-Model
Time: 3:00 hour’s IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 186
PHYSICS:
Questions with Multiple Correct Choice
Sec – II( Q.N : 7 – 14) 4 -2 8 32
(Partial Marking +1)
Questions with Comprehension Type
Sec – III(Q.N : 15 – 18) 3 0 4 12
(2 Comprehensions – 2 + 2 = 4 Q)
Total 18 62
CHEMISTRY:
Sec – II(Q.N : 25 – 32) 4 -2 8 32
Sec – III( Q.N : 33 – 36) 3 0 4 12
Total 18 62
MATHEMATICS:
Sec – II(Q.N : 43 – 50) 4 -2 8 32
Sec – III(Q.N : 51 – 54) 3 0 4 12
Total 18 62
Sec: Sr. COIPL Space for rough work Page 2
PHYSICS Max Marks: 62
SECTION – I
(SINGLE CORRECT ANSWER TYPE)
This section contains 6 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 options (A), (B), (C) and (D) for its
answer, out of which O NLY ONE option can be correct.
Marking scheme: +3 for correct answer, 0 if not attempted and –1 in all other cases.
1. A rope of mass m is hung from a ceiling. The centre point is pulled down with a vertical
force F. In equilibrium the tangent to the rope at its ends makes an angle with
horizontal ceiling The two tangents at the lower point make an angle of with each
other. Then is
mg mg
A) = 2 tan 1
(1 ) cot B) = cot 1
(1 + ) tan
F F
mg F
C) = 2 tan 1
(1 + ) cot D) = 2 tan 1
(1 + ) tan
F mg

R
2. A uniform rope of length has been placed on fixed cylinder of radius R as shown in
2
the fig. One end of the rope is at the top of the cylinder. The coefficient of friction
between the rope and the cylinder is just enough to prevent the rope from sliding. Mass
of the rope is M. Then maximum tension in the rope is
2 1 2 +1 2 2 1 2 1
A) Mg B) 2 Mg C) Mg D) 2 Mg
3. A mass m moving with speed u in x direction collides elastically with a stationary mass
2m. After the collision, it was found that both masses have equal x components of
velocity. What angle does the velocity of mass 2m make with the x axis?
A) 450 B) tan 1 ( 2 ) C) 300 D) tan 1 (1 / 2)

4. A disc is free to rotate about an axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to its
plane. The moment of inertia of the disc about its rotation axis is I. A light ribbon is
tightly wrapped over it in multiple layers. The end of the ribbon is pulled out at a
constant speed of u . Let the radius of the ribboned disc be R at any time and thickness
of the ribbon be d ( << R ) . Find the force (F) required to pull the ribbon as a function of
radius R.
Idu 2 Idu 2 Iu 2 Idu 2

A) B) C) D)
2 R2 2 R4 2 R3 R4
5. Due to rotation of the earth the direction of vertical at a place is not along the radius of
the earth and actually makes a small angle with the true vertical (i.e with radius). At
what latitude ( ) is this angle maximum? ( 2
R << g )
A) 45° B) 0° C) 22.5° D) 67.5°

6. A cylindrical container having radius r has perforated wall. There are large number of
uniformly spread small holes on the vertical wall occupying a fraction = 0.02 of the
entire area of the wall. To maintain the water level at height H in the container, water is
being fed to it at a constant rate Q ( m3 / s ) . Then Q is
4 2r 2 g H 3/ 2 2 r 2 g H 3/2
A) r 2 2 gH B) r 2 g H 3/2 C) D)
3 3 3 3
SECTION – II
(MULTIPLE CORRECT ANSWER TYPE)
This section contains 8 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 options (A), (B), (C) and (D) for its answer,
out of which O NE OR MORE than O NE option can be correct.
Marking scheme: +4 for correct answer, 0 if not attempted and -2 in all other cases
7. A car windshield wiper blade sweeps the wet windshield rotating at a constant angular
speed of . R is the radius of innermost arc swept by the blade. Length and width of the
blade are l and b respectively. Coefficient of viscosity of water is . Calculate the torque
delivered by the motor to rotate the blade assuming that there is a uniform layer of
thickness t on the glass surface.
3 2
b R3 l b R3 l
A) 1+ 1 B) 1+ 1
3t R 2t R
b R 2l bl R 2
C) D)
3t 2t
8. A wire having mass per unit length µ and length L is fixed between two fixed vertical
walls at a separation L. Due to its own weight the wire sags. The sag in the middle is
d ( << L ) . Assume that tension is practically constant along the wire, owing its small
mass. Calculate the speed of the transverse wave on the wire.
g g g g
A) L B) L C) L D) L
4d 8d 2d 16d

9. A stick of length L is dropped from a high tower. An ant sitting at the lower end of the
stick begins to crawl up at the instant the stick is released. Velocity of the ant relative to
the stick remains constant and is equal to u. Assume that the stick remains vertical
during its fall, and length of the stick is sufficiently long.
u2
A) Maximum height attained by the ant measured from its initial position is
2g
u2
B) Maximum height attained by the ant is greater than
2g
u
C) After time the ant is at the same height from where it has started
g
2u
D) After time the ant is at the same height from where it has started
g

10. A small object is sliding on a smooth horizontal floor along a vertical wall (figure shows
the view from the top). The wall makes a smooth turn by an angle 0 (less than 90° ).
Coefficient of friction between the wall and the block is µ . Speed of the object before
the turn is u and the final Velocity is V. [The turn is smooth without having any sharp
corners.]
µ
A) Speed (V) of object after completing the turn is ue 0
B) Speed (V) of the object after completing the turn cannot be determined
C) Speed (V) does depend on the shape of the curve
D) Speed (V) does not depend on the shape of the curve

11. The figure shows part of a large network in which potentials of some of the points are
shown. Each capacitor has a capacitor 5µ F . Which of the following statements is /are
true?
A) From the given information, potential of point O can be determined but that of B
cannot be determined.
B) From the given information, potential of both the points O and B cannot be
determined.
C) If charge on capacitor C2 were also specified, potential of point O can be determined
but that of B cannot be determined
D) If charge on capacitor C2 were also specified, potentials of both the points O and B
can be determined.

12. A positively charged particle P crosses a region of uniform electric field of intensity E.
Velocity u of particle at the entry on the left side of the region is perpendicular to the
electric field as shown in the first figure. Speed of the particle at exit on the right side
is u1 . Now the experiment is repeated with a uniform magnetic field of induction B
superimposed on the electric field as shown in the second figure, keeping entry velocity
of the particle unchanged. In this experiment, speed of the particle at exit on the right
side is u 2 .What can you conclude regarding the speeds u1 and u 2 ?
E E
A) If u < then u2 < u1 B) If u = then u2 < u1
B B
E E
C) If u = then u2 = u1 D) If u > then u2 < u1
B B

13. A box of mass 4 kg placed on a horizontal floor, is acted upon by a horizontal force F
that varies with time t as shown in the given graph. If coefficients of static and kinetic
frictions are 0.25 each. On which of the following conclusions can you arrive?
A) The box starts moving at the instant t = 2.0 s
B) The maximum velocity acquired by the box is 5.0 m / s
C) The box stops at the instant t = 9.0 s
D) Modulus of average power of the force F is more than that of the frictional force
14. Two fixed vertical cylinder vessels are connected at their bottoms by a thin tube. One
mole of gaseous nitrogen is confined in the vessels under pistons A and B that can slide
in the vessels without friction. Both the vessels have protrusions (stoppers) near their top
on their inner surface to stop further upward motion of the pistons allowing a maximum
height hmax = 1.0 m of columns of nitrogen gas in each of the vessels as shown in the
figure. Outside the vessels is air at atmospheric pressure Po = 105 pa . In an experimental
study pressure of the gas is measured over a wide range of temperature and a pressure
(p)- temperature (T)graph is prepared. A portion of the graph is shown in the adjacent
25
figure. Mark the CORRECT option(s) (Take R = J / mol / k )
3
A) Mass of piston A is 100 kg

B) Mass of piston B is 75 kg
C) Area of cross-section of piston A is 0.01m 2
D) Area of cross-section of piston B is 0.005m 2

SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
This section contains 2 groups of questions. Each group has 2 multiple choice questions based on a
para graph. Each question has 4 choices A), B), C) and D) for its answer, out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
Marking scheme: +3 for correct answer, 0 if not attempted and 0 in all other cases.
Paragraph for Questions 15 and 16
A thin hollow spherical shell of radius R is filled with water. The temperature of
atmosphere is TS which is below 0°C . Firstly all water comes down to 0°C and then
starts freezing form the outer surface towards the centre. Assuming that the thermal
conductivity of shell material is very high.(Neglect the change in density due to
freezing)
15. Find the time for the whole mass of the water to freeze. Thermal conductivity of ice is K
and latent heat of fusion is L. ( = density )
LR 2 2 LR 2 LR 2 LR 2
A) B) C) D) ln 2
6kTS kTS 3kTS kTS
16. If total mass of water is M then
A) Time taken for first 7M / 8 mass to freeze is more than time taken for last M/8 mass to
freeze
B) Time taken for first 7M / 8 mass to freeze is same as time taken for last M/8 mass to
freeze
C) Time taken for first 7M / 8 mass to freeze is less than time taken for last M/8 mass to
freeze
D) None of these
An amount of heat is slowly supplied to a bubble of radius r made of a soap solution of
surface tension . If atmospheric pressure p0 outside the bubble remains constant, molar
specific heat of the gas inside the bubble at constant pressure is CP and universal gas
constant is R, then
17. Find an expression for the molar specific heat of the heating process
3 3
A) C P + R B) C P + R
4p 0 r + 8 4p 0r
4 3
C) C P + R D) C P + R
3p 0 r + 8 p0 r + 5
18. Find an expression for the molar specific heat of the heating process if surrounding is
vacuum
R 3R 3R
A) C P + B) C P + R C) C P + D) C P +
2 8 5

CHEMISTRY Max Marks: 62
SECTION – I
19. Which of the following is correctly arranged in increasing order of hydration energy?
A) ClO4 ClO3 ClO ClO2 B) ClO4 ClO3 ClO2 ClO
C) ClO4 ClO ClO2 ClO3 D) ClO ClO2 ClO3 ClO4
20.
O
CH3 (i) excess EtMgBr (i) Na
(ii) H2O H
Cl
(ii)D OTs
CH3
Final organic product is
Et Et
CH3 H CH3 H
O D O D
CH3 CH3
A) Et B) Et
Et Et
CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3
O H O H
D D
C) Et D) Et
21.
O
NK
Br2 O (i) NaOEt

CH 2(COOEt) 2 'A' 'B' 'C'
CH3COOH (ii) ClCH2CH2SCH3
(i) NaOH,H2O
(ii) H3O+ ,Δ
'D'
Which of the following option is incorrect regarding Organic product ‘D’ is
A) Essential amino acid. B) Neutral amino acid.
C) Chiral compound D) Insoluble in water.
22. The triple point of ammonia is 195.40 K at 0.006 bar,while its melting point is
195.42K at 1 bar pressure. Which statement about ammonia is correct?
A) Solid ammonia is denser than liquid ammonia at195.4 K.
B) Ammonia vapor cannot coexist with liquid ammonia at equilibrium at 195.5 K.
C) Ammonia vapor cannot coexist with solid ammonia at equilibrium at 195.3 K.
D) Solid ammonia and liquid ammonia cannot coexist at equilibrium at 195.5 K.

23. The galvanic cell below has equal volumes in the two half-cells. As it is discharged at
25 º C , the cell potential gradually decreases to zero, whereupon the discharge stops.
What is the concentration of Cu 2+ ( aq ) when the discharge stops?
Cu ( s ) Cu 2+ ( aq ) ,1.00 M Fe ( CN )6 ( aq ) , 0.200 M Fe ( CN ) 6 ( aq ) , 0.200 M | Pt

3– 4
Half - Reaction E 0 ,V
Cu 2 aq 2e Cu s 0.337
3 4
Fe CN 6 aq e Fe CN 6 aq +0.360
A) 0.80M B) 0.96M C) 1.04M D) 1.20 M

24. A spontaneous endothermic chemical reaction takes place at constant pressure and
volume in a well-insulated container. As the reaction proceeds, what happens to the
temperature of the system and to the internal energy of the reactants as they are
transformed into products?
A) Both the temperature and the reactant’s internal energy increase.
B) The temperature increases while the reactant’s internal energy decreases.
C) The temperature decreases while the reactant’s internal energy increases.
D) Both the temperature and the reactant’s internal energy decrease.
SECTION – II
25. Which of the following statements is/are correct.
A) Inter molecular dehydration is a synthesis reaction in which larger molecules are
formed
B) Hydrolysis reaction is a decomposition reaction forming different products from the
reactant taken.
C) Hydration is a simple dipole-dipole attraction between solvent and solute molecules
D) Most of the hydrolysis reactions takes place due to polarisation of water molecules
26. Which of the following statements is/are correct for the complex having crystal field
splitting energy of a complex is 2.7 × 10 19 J (plancks constant h = 6.62 × 10 34 J .s and
velocity of light C = 3 × 108 m / s )
A) The wavelength of light (in nm) would be absorbed for the d – d trasition is about
660 nm
B) The colour of the radiation absorbed by the complex corresponds to red
C) The solution of complex compound appear in green colour
D) The ligand can be considered as weak ligand
27.
CH3
N
* *
H5C2OOC COOC2H5
HCl
A+ B+C
* * H2O,Δ
H5C2OOC COOC2H5
N
H3C
A,B and C are organic compounds.

Iodoform test Carbyl amine test
Organic compound ‘A’ Negative Negative
Organic compound ‘B’ Negative Positive
Organic compound ‘C’ Positive Negative
Based on the given information, which of the following option is incorrect?
A) ‘B’ has labeled carbon.
B) ‘A’ do not show Tautomerism.
C) No of sp3 atoms : A > B > C
D) ‘C’ does not show conformational isomerism.

28.
ICl
C21H15IO (A) + C21H15IO (B)
(i) Mg (ii) H3O+ (i) Mg (ii) H3O+
OMe 'C' 'D'
Zn,Δ
H2-Pd
E Δ C20H34 (F)
Which of the following option is correct regarding ‘F’?
A) No of stereogenic centres in ‘F’ is 5.
B) No of meso forms for ‘F’ is 0(zero).
C) No of tertiary carbons in ‘F’ is 6.
D) No of primary hydrogens in ‘F’ is 0(zero).

Me Me
Me
conc.
OH 'A'
H2SO4
29.
No of allylic hydrogens in ‘A’ is 10 and no of vinyllic hydrogens in ‘A’ is 1.
Which of the following option is correct regarding ‘A’ is.

A) No of geometrical isomers possible for ‘A’ is 2
B) No of stereo isomers possible for ‘A’ is 4
C) No of methyl groups in ‘A’ is 3
D) On reductive ozonolysis, ‘A’ gives two organic products.

30. A gas described by vander Waal’s equation:
A) Behave similar to an ideal gas in the limit of large molar volumes.
B) Behaves similar to an ideal gas is in limit of large pressures.
C) Is characterized by van de Waal’s coefficients that are dependent on the identity of
the gas but are independent of the temperature.
D) Has the pressure that is lower than the pressure exerted by the same gas behaving
ideally

31. Choose the correct statements:
A) Vacancy defects lower the density of the substance
B) Interstitial defects increase the density of the substance
C) Schottsky defects preserve the electrical neutrality of the crystal
D) Frenkel defects do not affect the density of the crystal.
32. The gaseous substance X was placed in a vacuumized vessel at 250 C and heated to
5000 C . Over the course of the reaction, proceeding at a constant temperature, monitored
by measuring the total pressure, when the degree of dissociation reached 51.7% , the gas
in the vessel became equal in density with air ( d air = 29 g / cc at the same conditions). The
dependence of the reaction rate, as reaction being elementary, on time is given as
1
= 0.40(1.25t + 3.3)3 where r is expressed in bar / hours and t is the time
r
When adding iodine vapor the reaction rate is increased 10,000 times, and the activation
energy decreases by 55 kJ / mol . Select the correct statement
A) Molecular mass of X is greater than 29 g / mol
B) Order of the reaction is 1.5
C) Pre-exponential factor in Arrhenius equation for catalytic reaction is more than non-
catalytic reaction
D) Rate constant in the absence of the catalyst is 2.5 bar 1

SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
Much of the world supply of platinum group metals is derived from the residues
recovered from the electrolytic refining of copper and nickel. The residues when heated
with aqua regia, the gold platinum and palladium go into solution. This is filtered off
and to the filtrate on adding ferrous sulphate solution gold is precipitated. The platinum
and palladium remain in solution.
33. The role of ferrous sulphate in the precipitation of gold is
A) Oxidant B) Reductant
C) Complexing agent D) Substituent
34. The structure of the compounds of platinum and palladium remained in the solution are
A) Square planar and square planar
B) square planar and tetrahedral
C) Tetrahedral and square planar
D) Octahedral and square planar

In halogenations, electron-withdrawing groups greatly deactivate adjacent positions.
Compounds of the type Z CH 2 CH 3 are attacked predominantly or exclusively at the
-position when Z is COOH , COCl , COOR , or CX 3 . Such compounds as acetic acid and
acetyl chloride are not attacked at all. This is in sharp contrast to electrophilic
halogenations, where only the -position is substituted. Halogen atoms are electrophilic
radicals and look for positions of high electron density. Hydrogens on carbon atoms next
to electron-withdrawing groups have low electron densities (because of the field effect
of Z) and are therefore shunned. Radicals that are not electrophilic do not display this
behavior. For example, the methyl radical is essentially nonpolar and does not avoid
positions next to electron-withdrawing groups.
O
Br2
H3C OH hν A+B
‘A’ and ‘B’ are positional isomers.Based on the radical stability ‘A’ is major product
and chiral.

35. ' A' NaOH
CaO ,
' X ' Which of the following option is correct?
A) ‘X’ cannot decolourise bromine water.

B) ‘X’ cannot show structural isomerism.
C) ‘X’ is soluble in aq NaHCO3 .
D) ‘X’ does not show diastereomerism.
36. 'B' NaOH
CaO ,
'M ' H2
Pt
' N ' Which of the following option is incorrect?
A) ‘M’ can decolourise bromine water.
B) ‘N’ cannot decolourise Baeyer’s reagent.
C) ‘M’ is more acidic than ‘N’.
D) ‘M’ is more stable than ‘N’

MATHEMATICS Max Marks: 62
SECTION – I
a b
37. Let A = , a + d = 1, ad bc = 1 and I is the unit matrix then A3 =
c d
A) I B) I C) 2I D) 2I
1
38. If 2a + 2b + 3c = and a, b, c > 0 , then maximum value of term independent of x in the
5
expansion of ( abx1/2 + cx )
1/3 25
is
35 35
1 1
C15 ( 35 )
25 25 25 25 25
A) C10 B) C) C15 D) C10
35 25
39. Let < an > be an arithmetic progression with common difference d ( d 0 ) and < bn > be a
geometric progression with common ratio q, where q is a rational number and 0 < q < 1 .
a12 + a22 + a32
If a1 = d , b1 = d 2 and is a positive integer then 6q is
b1 + b2 + b3
A) 1 B) 1/2 C) 2 D) 3
( cos x )
2019
2018
+1
40. dx
( 2017 20182019 )
x
2018 +1
A) 0 B) 2018 C) 1009 D) 4036
x 1 y 2 z 3 x 2 y 3 z 4
41. If lines = = and = = lies in the same plane, then sum of the
2 x1 x2 3 4 5
roots of x1t 2 + ( x2 + 2 ) t + a = 0 is
A) -1 B) -2 C) 1 D) 2
42. Area of the region bounded by x = 0 , x = 2 , y 2 = 4 x and y = x 1+ x 2+ x
when = 0 and = 1 is A1 and A2 respectively. Then A1 A2

A) 1 B) 2 C) 4 D) 9
SECTION – II
43. The range of the angle which a focal chord of a parabola y 2 = 4ax subtends at the vertex
is
4 4
A) , tan
1
B) tan 1
,
2 3 3 2
4
C) , tan
1
D) ,
2 3 2
44. Let a and b are two vectors a = 2, b = 3 and a .b = 0 . If c is a vector such that c × a = b .
The minimum value of 2 c a is ‘L’ let , , be non zero, non coplanar vectors.
Such that . = 0 and +( × )= × . If angle between & lies in , .

6 4
2 2
Maximum of = M . Minimum of = N . Then
A) L = M B) L = M 2
M +N
C) L = D) L = 3N
2
45. The differential equation { xy 3 (1 + cos x ) y} dx + xdy = 0 represents the curve
x 2 x3
2
= + x 2 sin x + cx cos x d sin x + k then
ay b
A) a = 3 B) b = 3
C) a + b + c + d = 5 D) c = 2

n
k
46. If L = lim n sin
where ak = a1.a2 .... then which of the following is/are correct
n 2n
k =1 k =1
A) The number of all real valued continuously differentiable functions f on the real line
(( f ( t )) + ( f ( t )) )dt + 2018 is 4L.

x
such that for all x, ( f ( x ) ) =

2 2 1 2
B) The number of all real valued continuously differentiable functions f on the real line
(( f ( t )) + ( f ( t )) )dt + 2018 is 2L.

x
such that for all x, ( f ( x ) ) =

2 2 1 2
C) Number of elements in the range of

1
g ( x ) = sin 1 x + cos 1 x + tan 1 + cos ec 1x + sec 1x + sec 1 x + tan 1 x is 4L
x
D) Number of elements in the range of
1
g ( x ) = sin 1 x + cos 1 x + tan 1 + cos ec 1x + sec 1x + tan 1 x is 2L
x
3
47. If cot ( 3 7 ) tan ( 5 ) = 1, ( 0, ) , 0, and L = 2 2 sin , then
3 3
which is/are correct
A) Number of integral values of L is 2.
B) Number of integral values of L is 3
C) Number of irrational values of L is 4
D) Number of irrational values of L is 3
48. Which of the following is/are true
A) If z is a complex number and satisfying z 2 i = z sin arg ( z ) then locus of

4
‘z’ is a parabola.
B) If z is a complex number and satisfying
z cos 1
( cos12 ) z sin 1
( sin12 ) = 8 ( 3) then locus of ‘z’ is a hyperbola.
C) If z is a complex number and satisfying z 2 + az + a 2 = 0 then | arg ( z ) |= 2 / 3( a > 0 )
D) If z is a complex number and satisfying z 2 + az + a 2 = 0 then arg ( z ) = (a R)

3
49. Consider a system of linear equations ai x + bi y + ci z = di (where ai , bi , ci 0 and i = 1,2,3 ) and
( , , ) is its unique solutions and a1 = a2 = a3 = k , d1 = d 2 = d3 = k 2 ( k 0 ) and
+ + = 2 then
A) lim
1 (
ln 1 + x
2
) =
k
2 2 2
x 0 sin x x sin x 4
B) k = 1
C) k = 2
D) Point ( , , ) lie on z-axis.
50. Which of the following is/are true
sin x sin + cos . if x 0

A) f ( x ) = x x , then f is not differentiable at x = 4 / 23 .
0 if x = 0
x2 + 4 x 3 x 0
B) g ( x ) = sin x 0< x , then x = is the point of global maxima

2
cos x 1 <x
2
1 9
C) Sum of all the solutions of the equation sin log 3 = 0 in ( 0,2 ) is .
x 2
x
D) x. cos dx = cos x + c (where C s integral constant) &
k =1 2k
( where ak = a1.a2 .........)

k =1

SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
Football teams T1 and T2 have to play two games against each other. It is assumed that
the outcomes of the two games are independent. The probabilities of T1 winning,
1 1 1
drawing and losing a game against T2 are , and respectively. Each team gets
2 6 3
3 points for a win, 1 point for a draw and 0 point for a loss in a game. Let X and Y
denote the total points scored by teams T1 and T2 respectively after two games.
51. P ( X > Y ) is
1 5 1 7
A) B) C) D)
4 12 2 12
52. P ( X = Y ) is
11 1 13 1
A) B) C) D)
36 3 36 2

If AB and CD are two perpendicular focal chords other than latus rectum of an ellipse
x2 y 2 1
+ = 1 with foci S and S . AB and CD both are passing through focus S.
4 3
1 1
53. If AB = l1 and CD = l2 then 12 + =
l1 l2
A) 4 B) 25 C) 7 D) 16
54. Value of semi perimeter of triangle S 1 AB is
A) 4 B) 8 C) 7 D) 16

Time: 02:00 PM to 05:00 PM 2016_P2 Max. Marks:186
KEY SHEET
PHYSICS
1 C 2 D 3 A 4 B 5 A
6 B 7 A 8 B 9 AD 10 AD
11 BD 12 ABD 13 AB C D 14 AB C D 15 A
16 B 17 C 18 A
CHEMISTRY
19 B 20 C 21 D 22 A 23 C
24 C 25 AB C D 26 AB C D 27 AB D 28 AB C D
29 AB C 30 AC 31 AB C D 32 AB C 33 B
34 D 35 D 36 D
MATHS
37 A 38 C 39 D 40 B 41 B
42 A 43 C 44 AD 45 BD 46 AC
47 BC 48 AC 49 AC 50 AB C 51 B
52 C 53 C 54 B
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 16-12-18_Sr.COIPL_JEE-Adv_2016-P2_GTA-05_Key&Sol’s
SOLUTIONS
PHYSICS
1. For equilibrium of rope
2T1 sin = F + mg (1)
Consider the equilibrium of half the rope
T1 cos = T 2 sin 2 ........... 2
and also, 2T 2 cos F ........... 3

2
1 T1 cos
(2) (3) Tan
2 2 F
F mg cos
Using (1) Tan
2 sin .F
1 F mg
2 tan cot
F
2. From last question
H R
µ= = = 1.0
X R
(a)At some lower point in the rope. If we take a small segment, the tangential
component of weight is higher than friction on the segment. As we move up, friction
increases and tangential component of the weight decreases. Tension will be in creasing
as we go up from bottom till the point where tangential component of weight on an
element equal the friction force on it. After this point the friction on the segment gets
larger than tangential component of the weight. Tension starts decreasing.
Tension is maximum where

μλdl g cosθ = λdl g sinθ 1
tan 1
0
45
(b) For segment AB of the rope (refer to last question)

R
wt gH gR sin 45 0 g
2
1
and f gX 1 gR 1 cos 45 0 gR 1
2
Tension as A is
TA W1 f gR 2 1
M
gR 2 1
R
2
2 1
2 Mg
3. Conceptual
4. r = u = a = constant
1d 1 dR
n nR nu 0
dt R dt
d dR
dt R dt
dR
Angular acceleration ................ 1
R dt
If we consider an interval ‘dt’ in which radius decreases by dR; then
2 RdR udt d
dR u.d
dt 2 R
ud u2 d
Put in (1) .
R 2 R 2 R3
Torque on disc I
u2 d Iu 2d
F .R I. F
2 R3 2 R4
5. The figure shows the true weight (mg) of a body, centrifugal force ( FC ) acting on it and
the resultant of these two forces ( mg eff ) .

Fc m 2r m 2
R cos
Since Fc is very small will be maximum when component of Fc perpendicular to mg
is largest ,
i.e.., when m 2 R cos sin is maximum. This will happen when 45 0
6. Speed of efflux at a depth y below the water surface is v = 2gy
Consider a strip of height dy as shown.
Cumulative area of holes in this strip is A A 2 rdy

Rate(volume per unit time) at which the liquid flows out through the strip is
A 2 r 2 g ydy
Total rate of outflow
H 2 13 H
2 r 2g y dy 2 r 2g y
O
3 O
4 1
r 2gH 2
3
For level to remain static
4 3
Q r 2g H 2
3
7.
Consider an element of length dx on the blade. Speed of this element is x

Viscous force on this element is
dF A velocity gradient
t t
x b
bdx .dx
t t

b 2
Torque due to this force d xdF x dx
t
Net viscous torque on the blade is
b RL 2 b 1 3 RL
x dx x
t R
t 3 R
b 3 b R3 L
R L R3 1 1
3t 3t R
The same torque must be applied by the motor to keep the blade moving.
8. Let tension at mid point to be T. consider rotational equilibrium of half of the wire
about its fixed end.
Torque due to tension =torque due to its weight
L L
T .d g.
2 4
L
Since line of action of weight is nearly at a distance from the fixed end.
4
L2
T g
8d
T g
wave speed L
8d
9. In reference frame of the ground
initial velocity of the ant u ( )
acceleration of the ant = g ( )
u2 2u
(a) H max = (b) t =
2g g
10. Consider the object at point P on the curve. let its velocity at this point be V marking an
angle with the original direction. Let the centre of curvature of the path at this point
be O and the radius of curvature be R.
mV 2
The normal force is N
R
mv 2
Kinetic friction force on the object is f N
R
Work done by the friction in small angular displacement d of the block is
dW f f Rd mV 2 d
From the work energy theorem, work done by the friction is equal to change in KE of
the object
1
k mV 2
2
dK mVdV
mVdV mV 2 d
dV v DV
d d
0
V u
V 0
V
InV IN u 0 In 0
u
V
e 0
u
V e 0
Answer does not depend on the shape of the object

11. Conceptual
12. Conceptual
13. Conceptual
14. m1g = p0A1
pV = nRT
( 2P0 )(1) A1 = (1)( R )( 240 )
2 m1g = R ( 240 )
m1 = 100 kg
m 2 g = 1.5 P0 A 2
PV = nRT
P0 ( 2.5)( A1 + A2 )(1) = (1)( R )( 450 )
( A1 + A 2 ) = 1.5 ×10 2 m2
A 2 = 0.5 ×10 2 m 2
15&16.
Let radius of inner water sphere at time t be r
( TS 0 ) k4 rR 4 r 2 dr
=L
R r dt
17&18.
PV = nRT
4 4 3
P0 + r = nRT
r 3
4 16
P0
3
( 3r 2 dr ) +
3
( 2rdr ) = nRdT
(But 4 r 2 dr = dV )
16 dV nRdT
P0 dV + = nRdT dV =
3 2r 8
P0 +
3r
4 R
P dV P nR
C Pr ocess = C V + = CV + = CP + 3 r
n dT n 8 8
P0 + P0 +
3r 3r

CHEMISTRY
19. with increase in size of the ion hydration energy decreases.
20.
Et Et
O CH3 CH3 CH3
CH3 (i) excess EtMgBr OH (i) Na O H
(ii) H2O H D
Cl Et Et
(ii)D OTs
CH3
21.
O
COOEt
'A' BrCH(COOEt) 2 'B' N
COOEt
O O O
COOEt
S
'C' N 'D' H3C OH
COOEt S NH2
O CH3
22. Freezing point of ammonia increases with increase in pressure and does not exhibit
anamolous behaviour like water.
23. It is the equilibrium condition where there exist dynamic equilibrium between reactants
and products and possible option 1.04M.
24. Internal energy of reactants decreases at the cost of formation of products.
25. A) When water molecules are eliminated by dehydration from different molecules they
condense to form larger molecules as in silicones etc.
B) Hydrolysis reaction takes places due to the polarization of water molecules by the
positive charge on cation like Al 3+ , Fe3+ etc or positive charge developed on central atom
in covalent compounds as in SiCl4 etc. Due to these reactions different products are
formed. Parent reactant cannot be obtained by evaporation of the solution
C) Hydration is a process of attraction of water moles by the positive or negative
charges present on ions. Or covalent molecules. Evaporation of such solutions give
back again parent reactant.
26. CFSE =
hc
2.7 × 10 19
=
(6.62 × 10 34
)(
J .s 3 × 108 m / s )

= 7.35 × 10 m or 735 nm
7
B
V G
R Y
O
Since the visible light range 360nm to 760 nm and 735 nm belongs red colour
(VIBGYOR). The complex appear green in colour which is complimentary to red.
Since the complex is absorbing lesser energy radiation the ligand should be weak.
27.
CH3
N O
* *
H5C 2OOC COOC 2H5
HCl
+ H3C NH2 + H3C CH2 OH
* * H O,Δ
H5C 2OOC COOC 2H5 2
N O
H3C 'a' 'b' 'c'
28.
I I
ICl
OMe MeO OMe

C21 H15 IO C 21 H15 IO
(i) Mg (ii) H3O+ (i) Mg (ii) H3O+
H2-Pd Zn,Δ
Δ
HO OH
C 20 H34 (F)
29.
Me Me H3C CH3
Me
conc.
OH 'A' CH3
H2SO4
30. vander Waal’s equation is

2
na
P V nb nRT [For n moles of a gas]
V2
a, b are van der Waal’s constants. The ideal gas equation is PV = nRT [For n moles of a
gas] where P is pressure exerted by ideal gas and V is volume occupied by ideal gas.
n2 a
In van der Waal’s equation the term P represents the pressure exerted by the
V2
gas and (V – nb ) the volume occupied by the gas. At low pressure, when the gas
occupies large volume the intermolecular distance between gaseous molecules is quite
large and in such case there is no significant role played by intermolecular forces and
thus the gas behaves like an ideal gas thus (a) is correct.
31. A) Vacancy defects lower the density of the substance
B) Interstitial defects increase the density of the substance
C) Schottsky defects preserve the electrical neutrality of the crystal
D) Frenkel defects do not affect the density of the crystal.
Hence all statements are correct.
n
1 1 n 1
32. ( n 1) kt + = 0.40(1.25t + 3.3) 3
k P0 n 1
On comparing n = 1.5
Enoncat Ecat
K cat A
10 4 = = cat e RT = 1.9
K noncat Anoncat
33. Fe 2+ reduces the Au 3+ to Au
34. H 2 PtCl6 is octahedral and H 2 PdCl4 square planar
35 & 36
O Br O O
Br2
H3C OH hν H3C OH OH
Br O 'A' 'B'
Br
NaOH
H3C OH CaO,Δ H3C CH
'X'
CH2
'A'
O
NaOH H2
OH H3C CH3
CaO,Δ Pt
Br 'B' 'M' 'N'
MATHS
37. A 2
A= I
A 3
A2 = A
A3 = A 2 A= I

h x r
Tr +1 = 25 Cr ( ab )
h r
38. .x 2
.e r .x 3
h = 25 r = 15 =25 C15 a10 .b10 .c15

10a + 10b + 15c = 1
( a + a + ... + a ) + ( b + b + ... + b )( c + c + ... + c ) 1
35
( a10b10c15 ) 35
35
1
a10b10c15
35
a12 + a22 + a32 14
39. = is positive integer say m
b1 + b2 + b3 1 + q + q 2
14
1 + 1 + q2 =
m
1 14 3
q= +
2 m 4
0 < q <1
1 14 3 3 14 3
< < and is perfect square
2 m 4 2 m 4
14 3
=1 m = 8
m 4
1
q=
2
( cos x )
b
+1
(( cos x ) + 1) dx
a a
b
40. I= .dx 2I =
a
c +1
x
a
a
( cos x )
b
= 2a + .dx = 2a
a
1 1 1
41. 2 x1 x2 = 0 2 x1 x2 = 2
3 4 5
42. If =1 y= x 1+ x 2 +x
3 x if x 1
x + 1 if 1 x 2
(( 3 ) ( ( x + 1) )
1 2
A2 = x) 4 x dx + 4 x dx
0 0
43. Angle of vertex is obtuse angle.

3
44. c ×a = b c =
2 sin
2 9
c a = 4 + cos ec 2 6cot
4

2
9 3
+ cot 2
4 2
3
Min of c a =
2
1 dy 1
. .x = (1 + cos x )
45. y 3 dx y2
1
Let =u
y2
dy 1
+ 2. .u = 2 (1 + cos x )
dx x
u.x 2 = 2 x 2 (1 + cos x ) dx
x3
= + x 2 sin x + 2 x cos x 2sin x + k
3
1 n r 1 x
46. ln l = . l n.sin = l n sin = l n2
n r =1 2n 0 2
47. cot ( 3 ) tan ( 5
7 ) =1
cos ( 3 7 ) sin ( 5 )
= sin ( 3 7 ) cos ( 5 )
= sin ( 5 ) (3 7 ) =0
sin ( 4 12 ) = 0
4( 3 )=n
3 n
=
3 12
3 ( , )
4<n<4
n = 3, 2, 1,0,1, 2,3
n
Now 2 2 sin is integer for n = 0,3, 3
12
n
2 2 sin is irrational for n = 2, 1,1,2
12
48. i) if z = x + iy
1
(x 2 ) + ( y 1) =
2 2
x y
2
ii) AB=K
iii) z = a , a 2
k 2 b1 c1
k 2 b2 c2
k 2 b3 c3
49. = =k
k b1 c1
k b2 c2
k b3 c3
= 0, =0
50. sin + cos = 0 , sin + =0
x x x 4
1 1 4n 1
=n , x=
x 4 4
4n 1
f is not diff. at x =
, n z
4
1 1 1 1 1 1 5
51. p(x > y) = × + × + × =
2 2 2 6 6 2 12
1 1 1 1 13
52. p( x = y) = × ×2 + × =
2 3 6 6 36
53. Equation of AB is
x 1 y 0
= =r
cos sin
x = 1 + r cos , y = r sin
(1 + r cos ) + ( r sin )
2 2
=1
4 3
6 cos 9
r1 r2 = , r1r2 =
3 + sin 2 3 + sin 2
12
(r )
2
l1 = r1 + r2 = 1 r2 + 4r1r2 =
3 + sin 2
12
l2 =
3 + coas 2
1 1 7
+ =
l1 l2 12
54. S ' A + AB + S ' B = S ' A + SA + SB + S ' B = 2 a + 1a = 4a

Time: 02:00 PM to 05:00 PM Max. Marks: 240
Name of the Student: ___________________ I.D. NO:
2015_PAPER-II
31-03-19_Sr.COIPL_GTA-6_Syllabus
MATHS:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
PHYSICS:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
CHEMISTRY:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 31-03-19_Sr.COIPL_Ph-III_JEE-ADV_2015-P2_GTA-6_Q’P
Time: 3:00 Hours IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 240
PHYSICS:
Sec – I(Q.N : 1 – 8) Questions with Integer Answer Type 4 0 8 32
Sec – II(Q.N : 9 – 16) Questions with Multiple Correct Choice 4 -2 8 32
Sec – III(Q.N : 17 – 20) 4 -2 4 16
(2 Comprehensions – 2 + 2 = 4Q)
Total 20 80
CHEMISTRY:
Sec – III(Q.N : 37 – 40) 4 -2 4 16
Total 20 80
MATHEMATICS:
Sec – III(Q.N : 57 – 60) 4 -2 4 16
Total 20 80
PHYSICS Max Marks: 80
SECTION – I
(INTEGER ANSWER TYPE)
This section contains 8 questions. The answer is a single digit integer ranging from 0 to 9 (both inclusive).
Marking scheme +4 for correct answer, 0 if not attempted and 0 in all other cases.
1. A solid sphere of density '  ' , specific heat capacity ‘C’ and radius ‘R’ is at an initial
temperature 200 K. On allowing it to cool under the process of radiation then the time
7RC
taken for it to cool to 100 K is found to be , micro second. If '  ' is Stefan’s
8K
constant, then find the value of ‘K’. Assume the surrounding temperature to be
extremely small and emissivity of the outer surface of the sphere to be unity
2. Imagine an atoms made up of a proton and a hypothetical particle of double the mass
of the electron but having the same charge as the electron. Apply the Bohr atom model
and consider all possible transitions to the first excited level. The longest wavelength
2x
photon that will be emitted has wavelength  given by ¸where ‘R’ is the Rydberg’s
5R
constant. Find the value of ‘x’.

3. A magnetic field, confined in a cylindrical region of radius R, is changing at the rate
3
of 4 T/s. A conducting rod PQ of length R is placed in the region as shown. The
2
R2
induced emf across the rod will be    2x  V . Find the value of x
6
4. A screen is at a distance D = 80 cm from a diaphragm having two narrow slits S1 and

S2 which are d = 2 mm apart. Slit S1 is covered by a transparent sheet of thickness
t1  2.5  m and S2 by another sheet of thickness t2  1.25  m as shown in figure. Both
sheets are made of same material having refractive index   1.40 . Water is filled in
space between diaphragm and screen. A monochromatic light beam of wavelength
  5000 Å is incident normally on the diaphragm. Assuming intensity of beam to be
uniform and slits of equal width, calculate ratio of intensity at C to maximum intensity

of interference pattern obtained on the screen, where C is foot of perpendicular
bisector of S1 S2 . (Refractive index of water, w  4 / 3 ). If the ratio is 3/k, find ‘k’.
5. In the shown figure mA, mB and mC are the masses of the three blocks, the incline is
frictionless mA = 5 kg, mB = 10 kg, mC = 2kg. coefficient of friction between A and B
is 0.5 and between B and C is 0.1. The frictional force on block A is 6K Newton. Find
the value of K. (Take g = 10 m/s2)
C
B
A
Massless rigid
rod
37

6. A source of sonic oscillations with frequency f0  1640Hz and a receiver are located at
the same point. At the moment t  0 the source starts receding from the reciver with
constant acceleration a  10.0m / s 2 . Assuming the velocity of sound to be equal to
v  350m / s . The oscillation frequency registered by the stationary receiver at t  7.7 s
after the start of motion is 40n Hz less than the natural frequency of the source. find n.
7. Two conducting square plates with length l are arranged parallel to each other at a
distance d (<< l). The space between the plates is filled with a dielectric of relative
permittivity  r  4 up to a length x = l / 3. The upper plate is given a charge Q and
the lower plate is given a charge – Q as shown in the figure. If Q  6 C then find how
much bound charge (in C ) is present on the lower surface of dielectric?

8. A container filled with air under pressure P0 contains a soap bubble of radius R. The
air pressure has been reduced to half isothermally and the new radius of the bubble
5R
becomes . If the surface tension of the soap water solution is S, P0 is found to be
4
16nS
SI unit. Find n.
R
SECTION – II
answer, out of which ONE OR MORE than ONE option can be correct.
Marking scheme: +4 for correct answer, 0 if not attempted and -2 in all other cases.
9. An open bottle lies on a precise weighing scale. A fly then enters the bottle and flutters
around in futile attempt to escape. Another fly, instead of using its wings to fly, uses a
small helium filled balloon fitted to it by a microartist, in order to remain airborne.
Choose the correct option(s) from the following statements:
A) reading will more in first case when it flutters
B) reading will more in second case when it is using balloon
C) reading in second cases is higher than reading before the fly entered the bottle.
D) reading will be same in both cases and equal to reading before any fly entered the
bottle

10. In case of superposition of waves (at x = 0)
y1  2 sin(1026πt)
y 2  2 sin(1014πt):
A) the frequency of resulting wave is 510 Hz

B) the amplitude of resulting wave varies at frequency 3 Hz
C) the frequency of beats is 6Hz
D) the amplitude of resulting wave varies at frequency 6 Hz
11. A dipole of dipole moment p is placed at a distance 2R from the centre of a neutral
conducting sphere of radius R. The direction of dipole is towards the centre of the
sphere. A tangent is drawn from the dipole to the sphere which meets the sphere at
point A.
A) The potential at point A is p 160 R 2
B) The potential at point A is 3 p 24 0 R 2
C) The potential at point A due to induced charges is  3  2 3  p 48 0 R 2
D) The potential at point A due to dipole is 3 p 24  0 R 2

12. The figure shows a potentiometer arrangement. D is the driving cell and C is the cell
whose emf is to be determined. AB is the potentiometer wire and G is galvanometer. J
is sliding contact which can touch any point on AB. Which of the following are
essential conditions for obtaining balance?
A) The emf of D must be greater than the emf of C

B) Either the positive terminals of both D and C or the negative terminals of both D
and C must be joined to A
C) the positive terminals of D and C must be joined
D) The resistance of G must be less than resistance of AB
13. Avantika fought her kidnappers with all her might, but to no avail. In her tussle, two
flowers (at two different instants) from her bracelet fell in to the river as the boat fled
with a constant velocity towards an unknown destination. Probably, Admiral Kattappa
was too late, or was he? All he could see in the river were two flowers that once
decorated the delicate wrist. The co-ordinates of the flowers were (3m, 3m) and (7m,
6m). Given the river flows from right to left at 3m/s and the speed of the boat with
respect to water was 5m/s, in which possible direction(s) w.r.t a fixed xy-axis shown
in figure did the kidnappers flee? (Neglect dimensions of the boat)
y
3 m/s
A) iˆ  3 ˆj B) 3iˆ  ˆj C) 7 iˆ  3 ˆj D) iˆ  3 ˆj
14. The diameter of a cylinder is measured using a vernier calipers with no zero error.
While measuring diameter of a cylinder, it is found that the zero of vernier scale lies
between 5.10 cm and 5.15 cm of the main scale. Vernier scale has 50 divisions whose
total length is equivalent to 2.45 cm. The closest division of the vernier scale that
almost coincides with a main scale division is 24th VSD but this 24th VSD actually
falls slightly to the right of the main scale division. The diameter of cylinder may be
(each MSD = 0.05cm)
A) 51.238 mm B) 51.236 mm C) 51.242 mm D) 51.246 mm

15. A source ‘S’ emitting sound of frequency f moves uniformly along a straight line with
a velocity u as shown. The velocity of sound in the medium is v   u  . Two detectors
D1 and D2 are placed on the line perpendicular to line of motion of S. Point P
represents the point of closest approach of S to the detectors. The frequency detected
 f D  by D1 and D2 versus time t graph is shown on the same graph paper.
fD
S P Graph-2
u
Graph-1
f0
D1
Graph-1
Graph-2
D2 t
t0
Choose the incorrect option(s)

A) Graph-1 belongs to detector D1
B) t  t0 is the instant when source S is at P
C) The value of f0 is f
 v2 
D) The value of f 0 is  2 2  f
v u 
16. Photoelectric effect supports quantum nature of light because
A) There is a minimum frequency below which no photoelectrons are emitted
B) The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons depends only on the frequency of
light and not on its intensity
C) Even when the metal surface is faintly illuminated the photoelectrons leave the
surface immediately
D) Electric charge of the photoelectrons is quantized
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
paragraph. Each question has 4 choices A), B), C) and D) for its answer, out of which ONE OR MORE is/are
correct.Marking scheme: +4 for correct answer, 0 if not attempted and -2 in all other cases.
Paragraph for Question Nos. 17 & 18
There is a point source of sound placed at (0, h) as shown in figure. The detectors D1
and D 2 are placed at positions (D, d/2) and (D, – d/2) respectively. Take h <<<D. The
source emitted a sound pulse at a certain time. Assuming velocity of sound in the
surrounding medium as V . (Assume that the waves reaching the detectors D1 , D2 are
plane progressive waves)

y axis
 0,h
D1
D0
 0,0 x
D2
17. The time gap between the recordings made by the detectors will approximately be
hd 2hd hd 4hd
A) B) C) D)
2 DV DV DV DV
18. If the source emits continuous waves, and the pressure recorded by the two detectors
are superposed at every instant in detector D0 (which is equidistant from D1 & D2) the
resultant pressure amplitude will be maximum if the minimum frequency of the source
is
VD 2VD 3VD VD
A) B) C) D)
2dh dh 2dh dh

Paragraph for Question Nos. 19 & 20
The capacitor of capacitance C can be charged (with the help of a resistance R) by a
voltage source V.
V
R S1
C
S2
L
19. Initially, the capacitor was uncharged. Now, switch S1 is closed and S 2 is kept open. If
time constant of this circuit is  , then:
A) after time interval  , charge on the capacitor is CV/2
B) after time interval 2 , the charge on the capacitor is CV 1  e 2 
C) the work done by the voltage source will be half of the heat dissipated when the
capacitor is fully charged
D) after time interval 2 , charge on the capacitor is CV 1  e1 

20. After the capacitor gets fully charged, S1 is opened and S2 is closed at time t=0, so that
the inductor is connected in series with the capacitor. The,
A) at t  0 , energy stored in the circuit is purely in the form of magnetic energy
B) at any time t  0 , current in the circuit is in the same direction
C) at t  0 , there is no exchange of energy between the inductor and capacitor
C
D) at any time t  0 , maximum instantaneous current in the circuit may V
L

CHEMISTRY Max Marks: 80
SECTION – I
M
21. 50 ml of water sample, containing temporary hardness only, required 0.1 ml of HCl
50
for complete neutralisation. Calculate the temporary hardness of water in ppm.
22. Aliphatic amines on diazotisation gives alcohol via carbocation intermediate
NaNO 2  HCl
R - NH 2   R - OH  N 2 
3
NH2
NaNO2 +HCl
2 1  
4
(Carbons are labelled with numbers)
In the above reaction, how many of the following products are possible-

3 1 1 2
OH OH OH OH
1 2
2 2 3 1
4 3
4 4 4
3
OH OH OH
3 4 2 2
2 2 3 3
OH
1 1 4
1 3 1 4
4
3
3 2 1
2
OH
1 4 OH
4
23. The number of species among the following which have contribution of only axial
d-orbital(s) of central atom in hybridisation is:
[Ni(CN) 4 ]2  , [PtCl4 ]2 , [Co(NH 3 ) 6 ]Cl3 , PCl6 , XeF6 , XeO 3 F2 , SiF4

o
24. H  cyclohexane   300 u
f
H of  cyclohexene   100 u
H of  benzene   200 u
Where u is an arbitrary unit of enthalpy

X
If X (in u) is the magnitude of resonance energy of benzene, then find
100
25. In the following monobromination reaction, the number of possible achiral products is
Br2

hν
Monobromo product(s)
26. How many of the following liberate dihydrogen gas when reacted with
B2 H6 ?
i) CH 3OH ii)HCl iii) aq KOH iv) CO v) P(CH 3 )3

vi)excess NH 3 / 
27. Equal mass of A & B are present in liquid solution then total pressure exerted by
vapour is X torr, Give X/6. [A = 80 gm/mol, B = 120 g,/mol]

28. Among the following complexes, the number of complexes that show cis -trans
isomerism is: [Co(en) 2 Cl 2 ] , [CrCl2 (ox) 2 ]3 , [Fe(ox) 3 ]3 , [Co(gly)3 ] , [NiCl2 Br2 ]2  ,
[Fe(NH 3 ) 2 (CN) 4 ] , [Co(NH 3 ) 4 (H 2 O)Cl]2  ,  Pt  NH 3  2 Cl2 
SECTION – II
29. Which of the following is/are correct:
A) Enthalpy (numerical value) of physisorption is greater than that of chemisorption
B) Physisorption is not very specific but chemisorption is highly specific
C) Chemisorption takes place at relatively high temperatures
D) In physisorption generally multi-molecular layers are formed on the adsorbent
30. Find the products of given reaction-
CH3
H Br CN
H3C H

 S N 2 
CH2CH3
CH3
NC H CH3
H3C H
H3C H
H CN
A) CH2CH3 B) CH2CH3
CH3
CH3CH2 CH3
H 3C H CH 2CH 3
H CN
CH 3
CN
C) H D) H
31. The pair(s) of ions where both the ions are precipitated upon passing H 2S gas in
presence of NH 4Cl and NH 4OH is (are):
A) Fe3 and Co 2 B) Ca 2 and Ni2
C) Co 2 and Ni2 D) Cu 2 and Mn 2

32. For thermal decomposition of NH 4 NO3 (s) :
The correct information(s) is/are-
r H
NH 4 NO 3 (s)   N 2 O(g)  2H 2 O(g) (at TK & P atm)
A) Heat of reaction is positive

r H
B) Entropy change of the reaction must be
T
C) Heat of reaction at constant volume is equal to   r H  3RT 
D)  r G of this reaction may be negative at high temperature

33. Optically pure S(+)-2-bromo octane with specific rotation 36 reacts with aq. NaOH in
acetone to give pure R(-)-2-Octanol with specific rotation 10.3 .
Partially racemised 2-Bromo octane with specific rotation 30 on reaction with
aq NaOH produces 2-Octanol with specific rotation 6 .
Find the correct statement(s) is/are

A) Optical purity of 2- Bromo octane taken is nearly 83.3%
B) Optical purity of 2-Octanol formed is nearly 58.25%
C) Percentage of racemisation is nearly 30%
D) Percentage of back side attack is nearly 85%
34. Choose the correct statement(s) for extraction of tin:
A) SnO 2 is reduced with carbon at high temperature
B) During reduction high pressure of O 2 is used to prevent excessive reduction of
FeO
C) Iron is removed by blowing air through molten mixture to oxidise Fe to FeO ,
which floats on surface
D) Electrolytic refining of Sn is done using SnSO 4 as electrolyte
35. Which dicarboxylic acid on decarboxylation give only one organic product on gentle
heating?
H3C COOH
H3C CH3
HOOC COOH H3C COOH
A) B)
CH3 CH3
H3C CH3
C) HOOC COOH D) HOOC COOH

36. Which of the following product(s) is/are produced when XeF6 is reacted with excess
NaOH ?
A) Na 4 XeO 6 B) O 2 C) Xe D) F2
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
paragraph. Each question has 4 choices A), B), C) and D) for its answer, out of which ONE OR MORE is/are
correct.Marking scheme: +4 for correct answer, 0 if not attempted and -2 in all other cases.
Paragraph for Question Nos. 37 to 38
The process of using an electric current to bring about chemical change is called
electrolysis. Electrolysis is a process of oxidation and reduction at the respective
electrodes due to external current passed in the electrolyte
The product obtained during electrolysis depends on following factors
* The nature of the electrolyte
* The concentration of electrolyte
* The nature of electrodes
Consider the electrolysis of following cell containing aqueous solution of CuSO 4 , ZnCl2
and MBr2 by using pure silver rod as a cathode and Pt electrode as anode. Assume that
M 2 does not further oxidise and cannot form complex with NH3 . Assume no
hydrolysis of any ion.

Cathode    Anode   
Ag rod Pt coated electrode

1 M Cu 2  aq  , 1M SO24  aq 
1 M Zn 2  aq  , 2M Cl1  aq 
2L solution 1 M M2  aq  , 2M Br 1  aq 
E oCu 2 |Cu  0.34V , E oM 2 |M  0.10V , E oZn 2 |Zn  0.76V , E oH2O|H2  0.828V , E oAg  |Ag  0.8V ,
RT
2.303  0.06 volt , 1F  96500C
F
37. After passing 20 amp current for 28950 second the remaining concentration of ions in
solution given would be (assume current efficiency to be 100%)
A) Cu 2   0.5 M,  M 2    0.5M,  Zn 2    0.1M
B) Cu 2   0 M,  M 2   0.5M,  Zn 2   0.5M
C) Cu 2   0.5 M,  M 2    0.5M,  Zn 2    0.5M
D) Cu 2   0 M,  M 2   0.5M,  Zn 2   1M

38. If 36 mol of NH 3 (g) is passed in original electrolytic solution (assuming no change in
volume, then what would be decreasing order of reduction potential of
2
 2
 
following: K F Cu  NH3 4   11012 and K F  Zn  NH3 4    1109
A) M 2  Cu 2  Zn 2 B) Cu 2  M 2  Zn 2
C) M 2  Zn 2  Cu 2 D) Cu 2  M 2  Zn 2
In ozonolysis of ortho xylene three products P, Q and R is obtained in the ratio 3 : 2 :1
respectively
39. Product (T) in following reaction sequence is-
conc.OH  H 
P   S 
 T
O O O O
O O O O
O O O O
A) O B) O C) O D) O
40. The compound(s) which on reaction with HIO 4 gives 2 moles of same compound
is/are-
A) P B) Q C) R D) S
MATHS Max Marks: 80
SECTION – I
41. If f  x  is a polynomial function such that f  x  f '  x  f ''  x  f '''  x  x3 and
f  x
g x  dx & g 1  1 , then  g  e  is (where [.] denotes greatest integer function
x3
and e is Napier’s constant)
42 Let  an  is an infinite geometric sequence with first term 2cotx and common ratio
sin 2 x and  bn  is an infinite geometric sequence with first term sin 2x and
 
 
common ratio sin x . If x   0,  , then the minimum value of
2
 4
 ai   b j is
i 1 j 1
n
43 Let x and y be positive real numbers and  an angle such that   for any integer n.
2
sin  cos  cos 4  sin 4  97 sin 2 x y

suppose  and 4  4  3 3
, then the value of  is
x y x y x y  xy y x

44 Four horses compete in a race. Let N be the total number of different orders in which
the horses can cross the finish line. Assume that all four horses finish the race and two
N
or more horses can cross the finishing line together. The value of   is (where .
10 
denotes greatest integer function)
2   3   6   9   18   27 
45 If S  cos   cos ec    cos   cos ec    cos   cos ec  , then the value of
 28   28   28   28   28   28 
 
log 2  1  S  S 2  S 3 is
 3
46
 /3 
 sin 5 x  ln  1  x   
e x  e x  dx is
  
1 x 

2 
 /3  
47 The curve y  e 2 x  18 x 15 crosses the y-axis at P and has point of minima at Q. If the
area bounded by the curve and chord PQ is a ln 3  b; a, b N , then the value of a + b is
48 A polynomial equation x 4  px 2  qx  r  0; p, q, r  R  0 has 3 repeated real roots.

If (p, r) lies on conic, then its length of semi latusrectum is

SECTION – II
49. Let A and B two square matrix of order 3, then which of the following statement(s)
is/are correct?
A) ABAT is a symmetric matrix
B) AB-BA is a skew symmetric matrix
C) If B  A A1 , A  0, then adj  AT   B is a skew symmetric matrix (where A is
determinant of matrix A)
D) If B  AT  O and A is a skew symmetric matrix and O be the null matrix, then B15 is
also skew symmetric matrix
x3
50 Let f  x  and l denotes the number of integers in the domain of f  x  where
9  x2
f  x  is increasing, m denotes the number of solutions of f  x   sin x and n denotes
the least positive integral value of k for which f  x   k posses exactly 3 different
solutions then which of the following is/are correct?
A) m 2  l B) 5m  n 2  l 2 C) n  l  m  20 D) nl  m  75
51 Let L is a line and A is foot of perpendicular from O (origin) on L. P and Q are two
   
other points on line L. position vectors of A, P, Q are a, x, y respectively. If a  1 ,
    
centroid of OPQ is c and b  a   x  y  , then which of the following is/are correct?
 
 b  3c
A) x 
2
 
 3c  b
B) y 
2

C) b is parallel to line L
     
D) a  2b, a  3b, a  5b are position vectors of collinear points.
2014
2014
52 Let S  
k 0
C k .k and E denotes the quotient when S is divided by 19, then which
of the following is/are correct?

A) Highest exponent of 2 in E is 2014
B) Number of divisors of E is 4030
C) (E+1) is an even number
2016
D) Sum of coefficients in the expansion of  a  2b  3c  is equal to E

53 Consider the parabola y 2  4 x . From a point A (-1, 0) tangents AB and AC are drawn.
Normals at B and C intersect at D.A point is randomly chosen inside the quadrilateral
ABCD. Let P denotes the probability when the point lies inside the parabola as well as
inside quadrilateral. Then P is greater than
A) 0.2 B) 0.4 C) 0.7 D) 0.9
54 A variable point P  4cos t ,4sin t ,4sin t  moves in space, now which of the following
holds good?
x2 y 2
A) Point P moves on  1 & z  0
16 32
B) Point ‘P’ traces a circle
C) Area enclosed by P is 16 2
D) Point P cannot lie on a fixed plane
55 If f : R  R be a continuous function satisfying the equation 2 xf  x  1  x 2 f 1  x  1
 
and f  0   0 , then which of the following is/are correct?
A) f  x  is an odd function
B) Number of integers in the range of f  x  is 1
1
C) Number of solutions of f(x) = are 2
4
1
D) Number of solutions of f  f  x   are 2
2
56 Which of the following is/are true?
A) The number of common roots of equation z144  1& z 24  1 is 24
B) The number of common roots of z 360  1& z 315  1 is 45
C) The number of roots common to z 24  1& z 20  1, z 56  1 is 4
D) The number of roots common to z 27  1& z125  1, z 49  1 is 1
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
Paragraph. Each question has 4 choices A), B), C) and D) for its answer, out of which ONE OR MORE is/are
Correct. Marking scheme: +4 for correct answer, 0 if not attempted and -2 in all other cases.
Let S1 is a hyperbola and S 2 be an ellipse whose centres are at origin. The transverse
axis of S1 and major axis of S 2 lie along the x-axis and y-axis respectively. Let H be
the hyperbola x 2  y 2  7 . The straight line 4x – 3y = 7 touches the curves H, S1 and
5
S 2 at P, Q and R respectively. Suppose PQ   QR
2
57 If e1 and e2 are eccentricities of S1 and S 2 respectively. Then which of the following
is/are true?
23 1
A) e1  B) e2  C) 15e12  4e22  24 D) e1 is an irrational number
15 2
58 Identify the incorrect statement(s) about S1 and S 2 :
A) S1 , S 2 intersect at 4 distinct points B) No common point in S1 and S 2
C) 4 common tangents in S1 and S 2 D) 2 common tangents of S1 and S 2

There are n urns each containing 2n balls such that the ith urn contains i white and 2n-i
black balls. Let Ei be the event of selecting ith urn, i=1,2,…..n and w denotes the event
of getting a white ball. P(E) denotes probability of occurrence of event E.
59. If P  Ei   i 2 , where i=1, 2,…….n, then which of the following is/are true?
3  2n  1 3  n  1
A) P  w  B) P  w 
16  n  1 4  2n  1
3 3
C) lim P  w  D) lim nP  En  
n 8 n  2
60 If P  Ei   i , where i= 1,2,…….n, then which of the following is/are true?
6
A) P  E1 / w 
n  n  1 2n  1
B) P  Ei / w increases as i increase from 1 to n
C) P  Ei / w decreases as i increases from 1 to n
D) lim nP  En / w  3
n 

Time: 02:00 PM to 05:00 PM 2011-P2 Max.Marks:240
KEY SHEET
CHEMISTRY
1 A 2 D 3 A 4 B 5 C
6 A 7 C 8 A 9 AB C D 10 AC D
11 AB 12 AB 13 4 14 5 15 1
16 8 17 5 18 6 1 9 A-PST 2 0 A-S
B-S B-PR T
C-Q S C-PQ
D-R D-PR T
PHYSICS
21 D 22 A 23 D 24 A 25 B
26 C 27 D 28 A 29 CD 30 A
31 AD 32 AC 33 6 34 2 35 5
A–P A–Q
36 3 37 4 38 8 3 9 B–P 4 0 B–S
C–R C–R
D–S D–R
MATHS
41 B 42 B 43 B 44 D 45 C
46 A 47 A 48 A 49 BCD 50 AB C D
51 AB C 52 ABD 53 6 54 7 55 3
A–Q A–R
B–Q R B–Q
56 5 57 2 58 6 59 60
C–Q S C–P
D–P D–P
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 26-11-18_Sr. COIPL_JEE-Adv_2011-P2_CTA-07_Key & Sol’s
SOLUTIONS
CHEMISTRY
1. Ion radii Zn 2+ =88, Ca 2+ = 100 and Ba 2+ = 135 smaller the cation more the
attraction towards water.
2. Conceptual
3. BOH + HCl BCl + H 2O
0.5
Initials moles of BOH = = moles of salt formed at eq.point
M .W
At half neutralization, POH = pK b = 5
At equivalence point cationic hydrolysis)
5 log C
5.15 = 7
2 2
C= concentration of salt = 5×10-2 M
nsalt 0.5
5 × 10 2 = =
volume 50
M .W +V
1000
V volume (L) of HCl consumed at eq. point
0.5 × 1000 50
M1V1 = M 2V2 × = 0.1 × V
M .W × 50 1000
5
V=
M .W
0.5
5 × 10 2 =
50 5
M .W +
1000 M .W
M.W of BOH = 100
0.5 × 1000
Initial concentration BOH = = 0.1M
100 × 50
=0.1N
kb 10 5
= = = 10 2 =
C 0.1 0
= 10 2 × 400 = 4S cm 2eq 1
1000 × k
4=
0.1
Specific conductance K = 4 × 10 4 S cm 1

4.
H 3C
HN = C ( NH 2 ) 2 > C = NH > ( H 3C CH 2 ) NH > H 3C CH 2 NH 2
H2N base strength decreases
H 3C
H 2 N = C ( NH 2 ) 2 > C = NH 2 > ( H 3C CH 2 ) 2 NH 2 > H 3C CH 2 NH 3
I H2N II IV III
acidic strength decreases
13.6 × Z 2
5. En = eV
n2
13.6 × 4
E1 = eV = 54.4 eV
12
Energy of electron in excited state = -54.4 + 51
13.6 × 4
= 3.4eV =
n2
n=4
excited state 4
+
4 2 transition in He is equivalent to 2 1 transition in hydrogen atom
wavelength of photon is in U.V region
6. 2 H 2O + Cu 2 S 2Cu 2+ + SO2 + 4 H + + 8e
M .W
E.W of Cu2 S =
8
7. Cyclic forms of D-glucose are in equilibrium with open chain form
-D-glucose open-chain form -D-glucose
when open – chain form starts reacting cyclic & forms converts into open-chain
form due to shift in equilibrium. So all the sugar reduces and nothing left unreacted.
8. Carbylamine test is given by both aromatic and aliphatic primary amines
NH2
NH2
CH3
benzylamin O-toluidine

9. Conceptual
10.
11. Since I is strong nucleophile than OH
RCl first convert into RI
RCl + I RI + Cl
Since I is good leaving group than Cl
RI easily convert into ROH
RI + OH ROH + I
I (small amount) catalysis SN2 reaction
12. For the attractive interaction i.e *
, the molecule must be in staggered
conformation. This interaction is not possible in eclipsed conformation
13. NaCl, CaCl2,CuSO4 and AgCl4 can be recovered by evaporation from their aqueous
solution. The other compounds hydrolyses in water and convert into other products.
14. For reaction (i), (ii), (iii), (vi) & (viii) reagents are wrongly chosen
The correct reagents are
HBr in presence of ROOR (for i), Hg ( OAC ) 2 + H 2O / NaBH 4
Or H 2O / H 2 SO4 (for ii), Hg ( OAc) 2 + H 2O, NaBH 4 (for iii), O3 + H 2O in presence

Zn / DMS / Ph3 P for (vi) & H 2 / Pd BaSO4 or H 2 / Ni B for (viii)
t1 Ea 1 1
15. log =
t2 2.303R T1 T2
10 23.03 1 1
log =
t2 2.303 × 0.002 300 320
10 100
log = = 1.04 1
t2 96
10
= 10 t2 = 1 min
t2
16.
alc . KOH
+ + m=3
CCl4 Br2 ( excess )
H Br H Br Br H
+ + + Br
H Br Br H H Br
Br
d &l
n = 5, m+ n =8
17. 0.88 = 0.34 Ebuffer
0.88 = 0.34 ( 0.059 × pH )
0.54 = 0.06 × pH
pH = 9
0.1
5 = pKb + log pK b = 5.3
0.2
2
Concentration of salt at equivalence point = = 0.05
40
1
pH = 7
2
[ pKb + log c ]
1
=7 5.3 + log 5 × 10 2
2
1
=7
2
[5.3 + 0.7 2]
=5
T1
18. Crms = 1.58 × × 10 4 cm / s = 7.9 × 10 4
M
T1
= = 25
M
T1 = 25 × 16 = 400 K
3RT1 2 RT2
=
M M
3 3
3T1 = 2T2 T2 = × T1 = × 400 = 600 K
2 2
T2 = 6 × 10 2 K
X =6
19.
H 3C H 3C H
Na
A) H 3C C C CH3 liq . NH3 C=C C2 H5OH
C=C
CH 3 CH 3
radical anion free radical
Na
H 3C H H 3C H
C =C EtoH
C =C
H CH 3 CH 3
Carbanion

Cl Cl Cl
OH
B)
OH Cl
NO2 NO2 NO2

Carbanion
CHCl3 + OH : C Cl3 + H 2O
C)
carbanion
: C Cl3 : CCl2 + Cl
dichlorocarbene
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
Br Br
D)
Br
H
H
Carbocation
20. Conceptual
PHYSICS
k 2V k 1V
21. E1 = ; E2 =
k 1d 2 + k 2 d 1 k 1d 2 + k 2 d1
'A k1 k 2
(E2 E1 ) A = '= 0 V
0 k 1d 2 + k 2 d 1
q2 dE e2 d r
22. E= =
8 0 r dt 8 0r2 dt
2
dr 8 0r2 1 e2 e2
= 2
× ×
dt e 6 0 c3 4 0mr2
e4
= 2 2 2 2 3
12 0r m c
7
23. R {cos 37° + cos }= R
5
3
cos = = 53°
5
Deviation = 53° + 37° = r a d

2
mV
Distance travelled = R =
2 2q B
24. E 1 = E 0 î E 0 kˆ
E 2 = E 0 î E 0 ˆj
E 3 = E 0 ˆj + E 0 kˆ
E n et = 0
25. When the block moves under the action of both spring, mean position will shift
k (6 x ) = 2k x x = 2cm
Maximum compression in right spring

1
( ) 1 1
2
( 2 k ) x 20 + k ( 6 + x 0 )
2
k 6 2 =
2 2 2
x0 = 2 cm
26. m a = mg kx
gx kx
a=
l m
gx k
a= + x
l m
1
T=2
g k
+
l m
27. Conceptual
Rl
28. X= X = 30
100 l
X R l l
= + +
X R l 100 l
1 1 1
= + + %
2 6 4
X 11
= %
X 12
X = 0.27
29.

Vx
ax qE
a=
m
a
2 m
t T= t
O qB
T T 3 T 2T T T 3T 2T
2 2 2 2
Displacement along x-axis during nth revolution

1 T aT
= × × × ( 4 n 1)
2 2 2
2
4n 1 m E0
=
2 q B 02
2
mE
Total dist = ( 4 n 1)
2q B 2
2
m E0
= × n ( 2 n + 1)
2 q B 02
30. Conceptual
dV 1
31. T = T0 e V
= V
dT T0 e
RT dV RT0 e V R
C = CV + C = CV + V
= CV +
V dT V T0 e V
P0 dV R
P = P0 e V
T= Ve V
=
R d T P0 (1 + V ) e V
RT dV R
C = CV + = C V + P0 e V
×
V dT P0 (1 + V ) e V
R
C = CV +
1+ V
32. Let the length of the pendulum be l. Along the arc AP the vertical acceleration of the
bob is less than or equal to g (with equality only at the initial point). Correspondingly,
the time required to cover this arc is clearly greater than it would be if the bob were to
fall freely between the height levels of A and P:
2l sin 30° l
t AP > = .
g g
Next, let us divide the arc PB into two equal sections, PQ and QB.

At points P and Q the speeds of the bob can be found using the law of conservation of
energy:
p = 2 gl sin 30 0 = gl . While Q = 2 gl sin 60 0 = 3 gl
The bob clearly covers the l / 6 long arcs PQ and QB more rapidly than if it had
moved along the first section with a constant speed P and along the later one with
speed Q . As a formula:
l l l
tPB < + 0.92 (2)
6 P 6 Q g
Comparing the inequalities (1) and (2), it can be seen that t AP > t and so we conclude PB
that PB is the are that is traversed in a shorter time.

33. Force on charged sheet due to point charge
= E d A cos = E d A cos
q Qq
= × =
6 0 6 0d2
1
34. Magnetic flux leaving the 1st solenoid, and penetrating into 2nd = µ 0 n I1 A
2
The axial component of magnetic field due to solenoid 1 exerts no not force on the
near circular wire turns of solenoid 2.
Magnitude of force exerted by solenoid 1 on solenoid 2
F= 2 RI2 B i ( B i is radial component of magnetic field)
2 R
Also, = BiAi = Bi
n
1
2 RBi = µ 0 n 2 I1 A
2
1
F= µ0 n 2 I1I 2 A
2
35. R1 = v g

R2 = v ( t )g
R1
Relative density ' ' =
R1 R2
d dR1 d ( R1 R2 )
=
R1 ( R1 R2 )
dR1 dR1 dR2
= = ±
R1 ( R1 R2 ) ( R1 R2 )
dR1 ( R2 ) dR2
= +
R1 ( R1 R2 ) ( R1 R2 )
0.02 R2
= +1
3 R1
0.02 1
= + 1 100
3 4
0.02 5
= × ×100
3 4
10 5
= =
12 6
G M m1 G m m1 GM
36. = m1 ( R r)
(R r)
2 2
r R3
(M-earth, m-moon, m’-object)

2
GMm ' r Gmm ' GMm ' GMm ' r
2
1 =
R R r2 R2 R3
GMm ' 2r Gmm ' GMm ' GMm ' r
2
1+ =
R R r2 R2 R3
x=3
37. V1 + V2 = 2.4 V1 + 0.3 V2
V2
0.7 V2 = 1.4 V1 =2
V1
m 1 2.4 × V1
= =4
m 2 0.3 × V2
38. H gA = F
AV2 = F '
( )
2
F' AV2 A 2g H
= = =2
F H gA H gA

MATHS
41. B
Let vertices A1 , A2 ,.... A7 are 7th roots of unity. Let A1 (1) , A2 ( ) , A3 ( 2
), A ( )
4
3
A5 = ( 4
)= 3
, A6 = ( 5
)= 2
, A7 = ( 6
)=
(1 ) (1 2
)(1 3
)(1 4
)(1 5
)(1 6
)=7
(1 )
2
1 2
1 3
=7
p1 = ( A1 A2 )( A1 A3 )( A1 A4 )( A1 A5 )( A1 A6 )( A1 A7 )
( ) = ( 7)
2 2
= 1 1 2
1 3
Similarly
p2 = 1 1 2
1 3
1 2
7 1 ( 3
1 a2 )
p3 = 7 1 ( 2
)
p4 = 7, p5 = 1 1 2
and p6 = 1
( 7)
7
p1. p2 . p3 . p4 . p5 . p6 =
42. B
y ' ( x ) .g ( x ) y ( x ) .g ' ( x ) + y 2 ( x ) = 0
g ( x)
d +1= 0
y ( x)
g ( x)
= x+c
y ( x)
y ( 1) = 1 and g ( 1) = 0
c =1
g (x)
2
(1 + x ) dx
= 1+ x
y( x)
x 2 + (1 + x )
2
1 x2
=
2
(1 + x ) dx
2 1
1
x2 2 + +
x x2
2 1
= 2+ + =t
x x2

13
2
tdt
=
5
t
2 2
dx = 2tdt ,
x2 x3
13 2 5 13 7
=+ 5 = =
2 2 2 2 5 + 13 ( )
7
=
(
2 2 5 + 13 )
43. B
Given an+1 = an 4n + 3
k 1 k 1
Now ak a1 = ( an+1 an ) = ( 4n + 3 )
n=1 n=1
ak = 2k 2 + k 3
So,
2k 2 + k 3 + 2 ( 4k ) + ( 4k ) 3 + ..... + 2 ( 410 k ) + ( 410 k ) 3

2 2
lim
2k 2 + k 3 + 2 ( 2k ) + ( 2k ) 3 + ..... + 2 ( 210 k ) + ( 210 k ) 3
k 2 2
1 3 4 3 410 3
+ 2 (4) + + ..... + 2 ( 410 ) +
2
2+ +
k k2 k k 2
k k2
lim
k
1 3 2 3 210 3
+ ..... + 2 ( 210 ) +
2
+ 2 (2) +
2
2+
k k2 k k 2
k k2
2 + 2 ( 4 ) + ........ + 2 ( 410 )
2 2
=
2 + 2 ( 2 ) + ........ + 2 ( 210 )
2 2
2 (1 + 4 + 4 2 + ...... + 410 )
=
2 (1 + 2 + 2 2 + ...... + 210 )
1 11
( 4 1)
= 3 11 = 683
2 1
44. D
x4 + 3 x2
x3
I.F= = e ( x +1)
2
= ex
2
+1
x3
ye x 2 +1
= ( 4 x + 3) dx
x3
f ( x ) = y = ( 2 x + 3x + 1)
2 +1
2 ex
f (1) = 6 e & f ( 1) = 0
f ( 1) = 0
45. C
r = xa + yb + z a × b ( )
Dot product with a,b, a × b we get
4x + y = 2
x+ y =8
3z = 4 3
4
x = 2, y = 10, z =
3
46. A
f ( x) must be continuous and differentiable. g ( x ) = ( f ( x ) f ' ( x ) ) '. f ( x ) has: at least 5 distinct
zeroes in [0.9,5.9] (one at x = 0.9, and 4 more due to sign change). So f '( x ) has at least 4
distinct zeroes, by corollary to Rolle’s Theorem, these zeroes also being distinct from
zeroes of f ( x ) . so f ( x ) . f ' ( x ) has at least 9 distinct zeroes, and hence its derivative g ( x )
has at least 8 distinct zeroes.
47. 3
x2 y 2 3 3
Solve y2 = 2x and + =1 we get P= , 3 ,Q = , 3 tangent at P&Q to ellipse is
9 4 2 2
x y
+
6 4
( 3 ) = 1 which intersect at R ( 6,0 ) tangent at P&Q to parabola y2 = 2x will be
(
y ±2 3 = x + ) 3
2
which intersect at 3
2
,0 = S
1 3 15 3
A= 6+ ×2 3 =
2 2 2
(x 3
+ 3x ) x3 x2 + 2 x 2 x2 + x + 2
=1
48.
x2 + x + 2 x2 + x + 2
49. B,C,D
Let z1 = e i and z 2 = 2e i
Where 0 , <2
z1 z2 = 1
( cos ) ( )
2 2
2 cos + p sin 2 sin =1

1
cos ( )=
2
z2
Also, = 2ei ( )
= 2 cos ( ) + i sin ( )
z1
z2
Im >0
z1
sin ( )>0 =±
4
z12017 + z 22017 = ( cos n + 2n /2 cos n ) + i ( sin n + 2n /2 sin n )

n +1
= 1 + 2n + 2 n/ 2+1.cos ( n ( )) 1 + 2n + 2 2
n 1
But cos =
4 2
z12007 + z22017 = 1 + 2 2017 + 21009
2
1 = 21009 ( 21008 + 1)
x
sin 2 x 1 1
50. A) Let I= dx = sin 2 x + dx
( x + 5) + x + 25
2
0 ( x + 5) + x + 25
2
(5 x ) + x 2 + 25
(using king property)

10 + 2 x 2 + 25
= sin 2 x dx
0 50 + 10 x 2 + 25
2
= . =
5 4 10
/2
cos x
B) I= dx..... (1)
( )
2
0 1 + sin 2 x
Replace x by x
2
/2
sin x
I= dx.....( 2 )
( )
2
0 1 + sin 2 x
/2
sin x + cos x
(1) + ( 2 ) 2I =
(1 + )
2
0 sin 2 x
Put sin x cos x = t ( sin x + cos x ) dx = dt

1 1
dt dt
2I = =2
(1 + ) (1+ )
2 2
1 1 t2 0 1 t2
Put t = sin ; dt = cos d

/2 /2
cos 1 1
I= d sec4 d =
(1 + cos )
2
0 4 0 2 3
/4 /4
1 + sin x dx sec x tan x + sec 2 x
C) I = . = dx
0 cos 2 x 1 + sec x + tan x 0 1 + sec x + tan x
(Put 1 + sec x + tan x = t 2 )
2 ( 2+ 2 2 )
1 1/ 2 1
1 1
D) I =2 tan 1
x2 +
2
dx + cot 1
x2
2
dx =2 ( tan ( 0 ) + cot ( 1) )dx + ( tan (1) + cot ( 0 ) )dx
1 1 1 1
0 0 1/ 2
{ even funciton}
3 1 1 1 3
=2 + 1 + 1 I=
4 2 4 2 2 2 2
51. A,B,C
(
adj adj ( adj ( adjA) ) = A = 48.516 ) 16
A = 10
x + y + z = 10
So p = 36
b b
As we know that f ( x ) dx + f 1
( x ) dx = bd ac,
a e
Where f ( x ) is increasing and invertible function.

Also f ( b ) = d , f ( a ) = c.
Now,
g ( x ) = 2 + 2sin x , then g 1
( x ) = sin 1 ( log 2 ( x 2))
/2
5
( 2 + 2 ) dx + ( log ( x 2 ) ) dx = 2 x +
4
Hence, sin x
sin 1
2
/2
5/2 4
Hence q =5
Now,
2
The maximum value of abc is possible only when c is parallel to a×b
=0 or
(a × b )× c
2 2
Hence, 2
= c a × b sin 2 = 0
52. A,B,D
A) n1 × n2 =< 2,3, 1 >

Point common to P1 and P2 is (1, 2,0 )
distance between skew lines is
(a c ) .( p × q )
=
1
p×q 5 3
B) BA = iˆ + 2 ˆj + kˆ
Angle between line and plane

4
= sin 1
=
3 6
6
Projection is BA cos =
3
26
D) r=
3
26
area = r =
3
53. 6
3
m1m2 =
tan 80 tan 200 tan 400
0
3
= = 1.
tan 600
The curve is a rectangular hyperbola.

So, E = 2, L = log 8 2 = 6
54. f is odd function

So; f ( 7 ) = 7, f ( 5 ) = 5, f ( 2 ) = 3
x , f ( x)
x , f ( x)
55. 3
Since, g:R {4}
g (x) is constant function equal to 4.

g ( x) = 4
x3 ( f ' ( t ) 2 ) + x 2 f "( t ) + 4 x ( f ( 0) + 6) + 4 = 4,
x R
f ' ( t ) 2 = 0, f " ( t ) = 0, f ( 0 ) + 6 = 0
f ( t ) = 2t 6

x + 8x
2
;0 x<4
h( x) = x 2
8 x + 31 ;4 x 6
(x 6 ) + 20
2
;6 x 12
Range of h ( x ) is [0,56]
i.e.. N = 57
56. 5
( x + y + 1)( x + y 2015 ) = 0
x + y = 2015
n = 2014
x1 = y1 =
( 2014 )( 2015 )
2
57. 2
Apply AM GM
(sin x ) ( cos x )
2y 2y
y2
= 2 ( sin x cos x )
y
y 2 + y 2
4
( cos x ) 2 ( sin x ) 2
y2
It follows that sin 2 x 2 ( sin x.cos x )
y
4
y y
sin x cos x < 1 1 y or 1 0
4 2
y=2 and sin x = cos x
So there is a unique solution x ,y=2

4
58. 6
23
=1
22
1
N=
k =1 1+ 8k
+ 16 k
22
= 1+ k
+ 2k
+ .... + 7k
k =1
= 22 7 = 15
59. A (Q ) , B ( Q, R ) , C ( Q, S ) , D (P)
(b c)
2
a2 a2 bc
(c a)
2
=b 2
b 2
ca ; C2 C2 C1
(a b)
2 2 2
c c ab
0 (b c )( b + a ) c ( b a )
= ( a 2
+ b 2
+ c 2
)0 (c a )( c + b ) a ( c b )
1 a 2 + b2 ab
R1 R1 R2 , R2 R2 R3
= ( a b )( b c )( c a )( a + b + c ) ( a 2 + b 2 + c 2 )
A) If a=b=c=0 =0

Given system is homogeneous system, therefore infinite number of solutions will
exist.
B) a = b = c = 0, then all three equations will be ( 0.x ) + ( 0. y ) + ( 0.z ) = 0 there fore any ( x, y, z )
will satisfy the given set of equations where x, y, z R.
C) a = b = c, a + b + c 0 then al three equations will come in form x+ y+z=0 solution of

equation are ( 1 , 2 , 1 2 )
D) 0 only ( 0, 0,0 ) is the solution uniquesolution

60. A R, B Q , C P , D P
A) 2 x ydx 2 y
2 4
dx + 2 x 3 dy + 3 xy 3 dy = 0
Dividing by x3 y
y3
2 In x + 2 In y + =C
x2
Where x = 1, y = 1 C =1
a = 2, b = 2, c = 1
So, a+b+c = 5
dy 1 x2 + 2 x 2
B) + y=
dx 1 + x x +1
y ( x ) = ( x 2 2 x ) , so y ( 3) = 3
C) f ( xy ) = exy x y{e f ( x)+e f ( y )},

y x
x, y R +
Put, x = 1, y = 1; f (1) = 0
h
f x 1+ f ( x)
f ( x + h) f ( x) x
Now, f ' ( x ) = lim = lim
h 0 h h 0 h
e f '( x ) e f ( x ) 1
x x
d f ( x) 1
= =
e2 x x dx e x
x
Integrating both sides ; and using f (1) = 0

f ( x ) = e x in x
D) 2 xydy x 3 dy = 3 x 2 ydx y 2 dx
2 xy dy + y 2 dx = 3 x 2 y dx + x 3 dy
d ( xy 2 ) = d ( x3 y )
xy 2 = x 3 y + c
1 1
Put x= ,y= c=0
2 4
So equation of curve is xy = x y 2 3
i.e. y = x 2
So, length of latus rectum is 1.

Sec: Sr. COIPL Date16-05-19
Time: 02:00 PM to 05:00 PM Max.Marks:183
PAPER-II
MATHS:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
PHYSICS:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
CHEMISTRY:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 16-05-19_Sr.COIPL_JEE-Adv_P2_GTA-14_Q'P
JEE-ADVANCE-P2-Model
Time: 3:00 Hour’s IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 183
PHYSICS:
+Ve - Ve
Section Question Type No.of Qs Total marks
Marks Marks
Questions with Numerical Value Type
Sec – I(Q.N : 1 – 6) +3 0 7 21
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
One of More Correct Options Type
Sec – II(Q.N : 7 – 14)
(partial marking scheme) (+1,0)
+4 -2 7 28
Sec – III(Q.N : 15-18)
+3 0 4 12
Total 18 61
CHEMISTRY:
+Ve - Ve
Marks Marks
Sec – I(Q.N : 19 – 24) +3 0 7 21
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
Sec – II(Q.N : 25 –32)
+4 -2 7 28
Sec – III(Q.N : 33-36)
+3 0 4 12
Total 18 61
MATHEMATICS:
+Ve - Ve
Marks Marks
Sec – I(Q.N:37 – 42) +3 0 7 21
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
Sec – II(Q.N :43–50)
+4 -2 7 28
Sec –III(Q.N : 51-54) +3 0 4 12
Total 18 61
Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page 2
PHYSICS Max. Marks: 61
SECTION-I
(NUMERICAL VALUE TYPE)
This section contains 7 questions. Each question is numerical value. For each question, enter the correct
numerical value (in decimal notation, truncated/rounded-off to second decimal place.
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27,‐127.30).
1. A cube made of homogeneous material is kept on a horizontal surface. What is the
ratio of strain energy stored in lower one third to the upper one third of the cube ?
2. Two parallel boundaries separate three media as shown in figure. Planar wave of
intensity I from continuous incoherent source is incident normally on 1st boundary.
v v
Wave travels with speed v, and respectively in the media. Consider reflection
2 4
and transmission of waves at each interface. Average energy density in steady state in
J A V  Vi
medium 2 (middle one) is x  107 3
. Value of x is (consider r  t , where
m Ai Vt  Vi
A r and A i are amplitudes of incident and reflected waves Vt and Vi are wave speed
in media where transmitted and incident waves are present respectively)

W
(Take, I  105 ; V  300 m /s )
m2

medium 1 medium 2 medium 3
v1  v v v
v2  v3 
2 4
I
3. Three identical cubes of side 25 cm, having mass 1 kg each are placed on a horizontal
plane as shown. A velocity V0  6 m /s is given to cubes A and B. Then A undergoes
a head-on inelastic collision with the cube C and then they stick and move together.
Consider that friction exists only between B and C. Finally there is no relative motion
between the cubes and the cube B lies completely over cube C. The coefficient of
friction between them is  g  10 m /s 2 
B V0
V0
A C

4. In the figure shown, the solid cone of mass m and radius R is free to rotate about axis
OO' . Its curved surface carries a uniform surface charge density  as shown. The
 
material of the cone is non-conducting. If a time varying magnetic field, B  k t is

switched on at t = 0 in the region, where the vector k is along OO' , the angular
Nkt
velocity  acquired by the cone due to the electromagnetic forces . Where N is
6m
__________
+ +
+ ++
+ R  3m
+++
++
O ++ O'
+ ++
++
++
+
h  4m
5. Three concentric thin spherical shells are shown in figure. Outer most sphere can't
radiate in outer space. The inner most and the outer most shells are maintained at

T1K & T2K respectively. Assume that the three shells behave as black body. The steady
1/4
 T4 T4 
state temperature of the middle shell is  1  2  . Value of x  y is
 x y 
6. Three monochromatic sources having wavelengths 12.42 nm, 6.21 nm and 24.84 nm
are placed close to each other in front of a converging lens such that equal powers
from the three sources equal to 1mW each fall on a converging lens and then totally on
a small spherical conductor of radius r = 1 mm and work function 62.1 eV. Initially at
t = 0 sphere is uncharged. (Assume 50% efficiency of emission and no change in
effective value of work function due to photoelectric emission and potential rise) (Use
hc = 1242 eV-nm) (All electrons emitted by the sphere are immediately removed by
some non-electrical mechanism). At t = 6 sec switch S is closed so that the sphere gets

connected to the earth via a resistor of value 5.40 M . Find the current flowing just
after the switch is closed.
7. Two plane mirrors M1 and M2 are inclined to each other at an angle  . When a ray of
light incident on M2 , parallel to M1 (as shown) undergoes a total of eight reflections, it
emerges parallel to M2 . Find the value of  and report it upto two digits after decimal
(in radians)
M2
incident ray

M1
SECTION-II
(ONE OR MORE OPTIONS CORRECT TYPE)
This section contains 7 multiple choice equations. Each question has four choices (A) (B),(C) and (D) out of which ONE or MORE
THAN ONE are correct.
Marking scheme: +4 for all correct options & +1 partial marks, 0 if not attempted and -2 in all wrong cases
8. Two identical objects A and B are at temperatures TA and TB respectively. Both
objects are placed in a room with perfectly absorbing walls maintained at a
temperature T  TA  T  TB  . The objects A and B attain the temperature T eventually.
Select the correct statement(s) from the following:-
A) A only emits radiation, while B only absorbs it until both attain the temperature T
B) A loses more heat by radiation than it absorbs, while B absorbs more radiation than
it emits, unit they attain the temperature T
C) Both A and B only absorb radiation, but do not emit it, until they attain the
temperature T
D) Each object continue to emit and absorb radiation even after attaining the
temperature t
9. A block of mass m is projected with velocity v as shown. The ground is smooth but
there is friction between A and B. If collision is elastic then choose the correct
statement(s) (Assume that A does not fall off B) :-

2v
A) The final common velocity of A & B is
9
4v
B) The final common velocity of A & B is
9
2mv2
C) Total energy dissipated in friction is
9
4mv 2
D) Total energy dissipated in friction is
27
10. Two very long straight, parallel wires carry steady currents I1 & I2 respectively. The
distance between the wires is d. At a certain instant of time, a point charge q is at a
point equidistant from both wires on the perpedicular line joining the two wires. The

instantaneous velocity v is perpendicular to the plane of wires. the magnitude of force
due to the magnetic fields of the two wires is (F) then the correct option(s) :-

2 I Vq
A) I  I, I2  I in same direction, F  0 2
d
2 I Vq
B) I1  I, I2  2I in opposite direction, F  0 2
d
C) I1  I, I2  2I in same direction, F = 0
D) I1  2I, I2  I in opposite direction, F = 0
11. The figure depicts a cyclic process into the volume-temperature (V - T) curve for an
ideal monatomic gas. Identify the correct graphs for the same process.

12. If a negatively charged particle is released with charge q at a point P centered
midway between the centers of a fixed insulating spherical shell having uniformly
distributed negative charge Q and a fixed positive point charge Q as shown. Then
after releasing, the charged particle q
A) will accelerate to the right

B) will accelerate to the left
C) Interaction potential energy of q charge particle will increase
D) Interaction potential energy of q charge particle will decrease
13. Two hollow long and thin coaxial conducting cylinders have radii a and b for inner
and outer conductors respectively as shown in figure. The electric field between the
two conductors has a maximum value Emax . Breakdown occurs when the electric field
reaches the value Emax .

b
A) The breakdown voltage in terms of maximum electric field Emax is Emax a ln
a
b
B) The breakdown voltage in terms of maximum electric field Emax is Emax b ln
a
b
C) The maximum value of breakdown voltage occurs (keeping b fixed) when e
a
b
D) The maximum value of breakdown voltage occurs (keeping b fixed) when    e2
a  
14. Two coaxial thin pipes of radius R and 2R are have a common horizontal axis. A thin
uniform hollow spherical ball of diameter R is fitted inside them as shown. The inner
surfaces are sufficiently rough so that there is no slipping anywhere. The outer pipe is
held fixed but inner pipe is free to rotate about its axis. On slight displacement, the
ball starts moving along the gap shown in the downward direction. All the 3 bodies
(both pipes & ball) have same mass of 1 kg. When ball reaches the bottom of the pipe.

2
Take g  10 m /s
A) Angular velocity of inner pipe and ball about their respective axes is same
B) Ratio of angular speed of the inner cylinder and sphere about their respective axes
is 4 :3
C) Ratio of KE of inner cylinder to ball is 12:5
D) Net force on the ball at bottom most position is approximately 7.06 N
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
paragraph. Each question has 4 choices A), B), C) and D) for its answer, out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
Paragraph For Questions 15 and 16

An electron has intrinsic angular momentum L called spin, and a permanent magnetic
 ge 
dipole moment M   L associated with the spin, where e is the positive electron
2m
charge, m is the electron mass, and g is a number called g-factor. An electron with its
spin aligned along its initial velocity in the x-direction enters a region of uniform
 
magnetic field in the z-direction. Due to magnetic force the torque on the spin is M  B
  
and perpendicular to M (also perpendicular to L ). Since torque is perpendicular to L
therefore it ensures that the spin turns with angular velocity P which is given by the
following equation:
  
  P  L
Due to charge on the e, magnetic force also acts on the electron.
15. What is the value of P ?
geB 2geB geB 4geB
A) B) C) D)
m m 2m m

16. What should be the value of g, if during the motion, spin  L  is always in the same

direction as the velocity of electron  v 
A) 1 B) 2 C) 2 2 D) 2 3
Negative resistance instability: In 2006, it was discovered that the resistance of a
semiconductor device containing two dimensional electron gas becomes negative
when it is in a constant magnetic field and under strong microwave radiation. Because
a system including this device and other circuit elements such as normal resistors,
capacitors, inductors and voltage source will be unstable (Violating the second law of
thermodynamics) if the total resistance of the system Rsys is negative, the system
reorganizes itself into a new state with zero total resistance. The resistance R NR of the
device can be expressed as a current & charge dependent resistance
 i 2  q 2 
R NR  R i, q   R 0       1 ... (1)
 i0   q 0  
Where R 0  0 so that the resistance is negative when the current passing through the
system i or charge stored in the system q is small and becomes positive when there is
large enough current or charge building up in the system. Hence R 0 , i0 , q 0 are
constants and they depend only on the internal structure of the device, the strength and
frequency of microwave radiation and strength of magnetic field. When R NR is
connected to other normal circuit elements like capacitor, normal resistor, inductor and
voltage source, the usual Kirchhoff's circuit law still apply. Consider the situation
when R NR in series only with a normal resistor with resistance R. As shown in the
figure

(In this case q will be zero in equation (1) as there is no capacitor).

17. What will be the value of current i when R  R 0 .
R R0  R
A) Zero B) i0 C) i0 D) i0
R0  R R0
18. What will be the value of potential difference across resistor R if R  R 0 .
R R0  R
A) Zero B) i 0R C) i0R D) i0R
R  R0 R0

Time: 09:00 AM to 12:00 NOON P1 Max.Marks:183
KEY SHEET
PHYSICS
1 ABC 2 AB 3 AC 4 BD 5 BD
6 CD 7 AB 8 B 9 C 10 A
11 D 12 A 13 D 14 1.33 15 - 2.50
16 12.00 17 15.50 18 2.50
CHEMISTRY
19 AC 20 BC 21 ABC 22 ABCD 23 AD
24 CD 25 ABCD 26 B 27 D 28 D
29 C 30 B 31 A 32 75 33 2.50
34 1535 35 6 36 13
MATHS
37 BC 38 ABD 39 ABC 40 AC 41 BD
42 BCD 43 BD 44 C 45 B 46 D
47 B 48 D 49 A 50 1.50 51 2.25
2.57 0.31
52 or 53 3.50 54 or
2.56 0.32
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 16-05-19_Sr.COIPL_JEE-ADV_P1_GTA-14_Key &Sol’s
SOULTIONS
MATHS
37. Image of "B" with respect to AD is "C"
 C   3,  3,  3
D   0, 0,  6 
9
38. xy
2
9

2  9
  
2 2 4
= 2.25
 2
40. 8  a b c   800
 2           2    
   
 a b c   10 & b. a  5 b  b  c  b      b a 5b  b  
c  b.c b

2    
 b  b a c   b  3.5
2 7
 
5  10 
41.
5 7 3
 
2 10 5
7

25  7
7 15 22

25 25
Sec:Sr. COIPL Page 2

Time: 09:00 AM to 12:00 NOON Max.Marks:183
PAPER -I
MATHS:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
PHYSICS:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
CHEMISTRY:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 16-05-19_Sr. COIPL_Jee-Adv_P1_GTA-14_Q’P
JEE-ADVANCE-P1-Model
Time: 03:00 Hr’s IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 183
PHYSICS:
Questions With Multiple Correct Choice
Sec – I (Q.N : 1 – 7) +4 -2 7 28
Sec – II (Q.N : 8 – 12) Questions With Single Answer Type +3 -1 6 18
Sec – III (Q.N : 13 – 18) +3 0 5 15
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
Total 18 61
CHEMISTRY:
Sec – I (Q.N : 19 – 25) +4 -2 7 28
Sec – III (Q.N : 31 – 36) +3 0 5 15
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
Total 18 61
MATHEMATICS:
Sec – I (Q.N : 37 – 43) +4 -2 7 28
Sec – III (Q.N : 49 – 54) +3 0 5 15
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
Total 18 61
SECTION – I
This section contains 7 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 options (A), (B), (C) and (D) for its answer, out of which ONE
OR MORE THAN ONE option can be correct.
1. A  BC
A radioactive nucleus A at rest disintegrates into two nuclei B and C. Mass of B is
h2
12m and that of C is 4m. The Q-value of the reaction is, Q  . The energy
24m 2
liberated in reaction is completely imparted to the products (B and C) as kinetic
energy.
A) The de Broglie wavelength of B is 2
B) The de Broglie wavelength of C is 2
h2
C) The mass of the nucleus A is 16m 
24mc2  2
2
D) The de Broglie wavelength of C is
3
  
2. H , He , O , all starting from rest are accelerated through equal electric potential and
passed through a region in which there is a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to
their velocities. The masses of H  , He and O  are 1 amu, 4 amu and 16 amu
respectively. Then :-

A) H will have least radius
B) O  will have largest radius
C) He and O  will have same radius
D) All will have same radius
3. Which of the following statement(s) is/are CORRECT ?
A) If the energy of bombarding electron in the Coolidge tube is increased then the
cutoff wavelength decreases while the characteristic wavelength remains unaltered
B) If the energy of bombarding electron in the Coolidge tube is increased then the
cutoff wavelength increases while the characteristic wavelength remains unaltered
C) The characteristic wavelength is characteristic of the target metal while the cutoff
wavelength is a function of the energy of bombarding electrons
D) The characteristic wavelength is function of the energy of the bombarding
electrons while the cutoff wavelength depends on the characteristic of target metal
4. Water of density  in a clean square aquarium forms a meniscus on vertical wall as
shown in figure (front view). Contact angle between water & solid (wall) is 0 and
surface tension of the water is S. Then select the CORRECT statement(s) :-

A) Pressure at point B, just below the point of contact A is equal to P0

S
B) Radius of curvature of meniscus at point of contact is
gh
C) Net force applied by portion AC of the wall on the water is towards the wall
D) Radius of curvature of meniscus is minimum at point of contact
5. A dumbbell consists of two equal particles of mass m (connected with massless rod)
separated by a distance 2a. It is initially attached along a radial line to a disk that is
rotating at  rad/s about a vertical axis (see figure). The center of the dumbbell is at a
distance R from the center of the disk. Choose the CORRECT statement(s) about the
motion of dumbbell after it is suddenly free. Assume all the motion occurs on a
horizontal frictionless plane.
A) Motion of the dumbbell will be pure translational

B) Angular velocity of dumbbell remain same i.e. 
C) Kinetic energy of dumbbell will be given by mR 22
D) Kinetic energy of dumbbell will be given by m  R 2  a 2  2
6. A space capsule is in a circular orbit of radius rC about the earth. A short burst from a
rocket in the backward direction increases the kinetic energy by 20% and causes the
capsule to enter an elliptical orbit with the point of firing as the perigee ; i.e. rP  rC .
Then choose the CORRECT statement(s) for further motion of capsule :- (Assume
mass of capsule to remain nearly constant)
A) Total mechanicl energy of capsule decreases
B) Time period of capsule will decrease
C) Distance of apogee from centre of earth is rA  1.5 rC
D) If mechanical energy before the event (short burst) is E i & final mechanical energy
after the event is E f , then E f  0.8 Ei
7. The pitch of a screw gauge is 0.5 mm and there are 50 divisions on circular scale.
When there is nothing between the two studs of screw gauge, 46th division of circular
scale is coinciding with reference line and zero of main scale is not visible. When a
wire is placed between the studs, the linear scale reads 2 divisions and 20th division of
circular scale coincides with the reference line. The CORRECT statement(s) is/are :
A) Least count is 0.01 mm B) Zero correction is 0.04 mm
C) Radius is 0.65 mm D) All of the above
SECTION – II
This section contains 6 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 options (A), (B), (C) and (D) for its answer, out of which ONLY
ONE option can be correct.
Answer the Q.No:8, 9 and 10 by appropriately matching the information given in
the following table.
In a general YDSE setup, a light of wavelength 600 nm is used. 'd' represents the
distance between two slits, 'D' represents the distance between screen and slits and 'y'
represents the distance of fringe from central maxima.

Column-I (d) Column-II (D) Column-III (y)

(I) 1 mm (i) 1m (P) 1 mm
(II) 1.5 mm (ii) 1.5 m (Q) 1.2 mm
(III) 2 mm (iii) 2 m (R) 1.5 mm
(IV) 2.5 mm (iv) 2.5 m (S) 2 mm
8. which of the following corresponding to the maxima?
A) (III) (ii) (P) B) (III) (i) (Q) C) (IV) (iii) (P) D) (I) (ii) (S)
9. Which of the following corresponding to the minima?
A) (II) (i) (R) B) (I) (iii) (Q) C) (II) (iii) (S) D) (II) (ii) (S)
10. Which of the following corresponds to 5th maxima?
A) (III) (i) (R) B) (I) (iii) (R) C) (II) (i) (P) D) (II) (iii) (Q)
Answer the Q.No:11, 12 and 13 by appropriately matching the information given
in the following table.
Two capacitors C1 and C 2 are connected with battery and resistance as shown. C1 is
initially uncharged and charge on both plates of C2 is q1 . Switch S is closed at t = 0.
At time t charge on left plate of C 2 is Q and force between both plates of C 2 is F and
energy stored in capacitor C2 is U. (Given C1  C2  C ; seperation between plates of C2
is d)
Column-1U Column-2 Q Column-3|F|

2
CE
(I) (i) CE (P) 0
4
CE 2 3CE CE 2
(II) (ii) (Q)
32 2 8d
CE 2 CE 3CE 2
(III) (iii) (R)
16 4 8d
CE 2 CE CE 2
(IV) (iv) (S)
8 2 32d
11. If q1  0 then at time t  RCn2 :
A) (II) (iv) (P) B) (III) (iii) (P) C) (III) (iii) (S) D) (II) (iii) (S)
CE
12. If q1  then at time t  RCn2 :
4
A) (II) (iv) (P) B) (IV) (ii) (S) C) (II) (iv) (S) D) (IV) (ii) (P)
13. Capacitor C2 is completely filled with dielectric of dielectric constant 2, before switch
8RCn2
S is closed. Now q1  CE then at time t  .
3
A) (II) (iv) (R) B) (IV) (ii) (R) C) (II) (ii) (Q) D) (III) (ii) (R)
SECTION-III
This section contains 5 questions. Each question is numerical value. For each question, enter the correct
numerical value (in decimal notation, truncated/rounded-off to second decimal place.
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30).
Marking scheme: +3 for correct answer , 0 if not attempted and 0 in all other cases.
14. A vessel contains 4 kg water at 0C . Water equivalent of vessel at 0C is 2 kg and it
increases linearly with temperature such that it becomes 4 kg at 100C . The
temperature of the system is raised from 0C to 100C . If Q1 is the energy consumed
Q1
by water and Q 2 is the energy consumed by vessel then is
Q2
(Assume all relations in C )

15. In the circuit shown in the figure, S1 remains closed for a long time and S2 remains
di
open. Now S2 is closed and S1 is opened simultaneously. Find out the (in Amp/sec)
dt
just after that moment :
16. Figure shows cone of mass 400 gm, supported by a vertical jet of water from a garden
hose. The flow rate is 0.2 kg/sec. the water rises 32 m if unimpeded. Find the height of
the cone top surface (h in m) at which water strike. Assume the water emerges
horizontally from holes at the top of cone. Take g  10 m / s 2

17. Corridor figure shows an overhead view of a corridor with a plane mirror M mounted
at one end. A burglar B sneaks along the corridor directly toward the center of the
mirror. If d = 31 m, how far (in m) from the mirror will she be when the security guard
S can first see her in the mirror?
18. A cylindrical eraser of negligible mass is dragged across a paper at a constant velocity
to the right by its pencil. The coefficient of kinetic friction between eraser and paper is
0.6. The pencil pushes down with 5N. The height of the eraser is 2 cm and its circular
area is 4 cm 2 . Its top surface is displaced horizontally 0.6 mm relative to the bottom.
The shear modulus of the eraser material in multiples of 105 Pa is?

Sec: Sr. COIPL Date28-04-19
2017-PAPER-II
MATHS:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
PHYSICS:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
CHEMISTRY:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 28-04-18_Sr.COIPL_JEE-Adv_2017-P2_GTA-09_Q'P
Time: 3:00 Hour’s IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 183
CHEMISTRY
Sec – I (Q.N : 1 – 7) Questions with Single Correct Options +3 -1 7 21
Sec – II (Q.N : 8 – 14) +4 -2 7 28
Sec – III (Q.N : 15 – 18) +3 0 4 12
Total 18 61
PHYSICS
Sec – II (Q.N : 26 – 32) +4 -2 7 28
Sec – III (Q.N : 33 – 36) +3 0 4 12
Total 18 61
MATHEMATICS
Sec – II (Q.N : 44 – 50) +4 -2 7 28
Sec – III (Q.N : 51 – 54) +3 0 4 12
Total 18 61

SECTION – I
(SINGLE CORRECT CHOICE TYPE)
This section contains 7 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) for its answer, out of which ONLY
ONE is correct.
1. The viscosity of a fluid  can be determined by measuring the terminal velocity VT of
a sphere when it descends in the fluid. The fluid has a density f while the sphere has
a density  s and a diameter of d. The viscosity can then be calculated by the formula
5  s  f  2
 d
9VT
The values measured are

VT  1.60  0.04  ms1
s   2700  20  kg m 3
f   900  10  kg m3
d   20.0  0.4  mm
What is the approximate percentage uncertainty in the value of  ?

A) 6.2% B) 7.1% C) 8.2% D) 9.3%

2. Two thin identical current carrying rings having radius 'r' and current i in each are
separated by distance 'd' as shown in the diagram. If r <<d, then find the magnetic
force between the two rings.
6 0 i 2 2 r 4  0 i 2 2 r 4 30 i 2 2 r 4  0 i 2 2 r 4
A) B) C) D)
4 d 4 4 d 4 4 d 4 2 d 4
3. Superconductors have a property that magnetic flux linked with them will always
remain constant. Two identical superconducting rings each having self inductance "L"
carrying current 'I' in same direction are placed together as shown in the diagram. Find
work done against magnetic interaction in separating the rings to far away [infinite
distance]. (Assume that the mutual inductance of the two rings is M = L in the initial
position).
1 2
A) LI2 B) LI C) 2LI 2 D) LI2
2
4. Two point charges ‘Q’ and ‘2Q’ are placed at a distance ‘d’ on equatorial line of
dipole of dipole moment ‘p’ as shown in diagram. Find net force acting on the dipole
due to point charges. (where d >> size of dipole)
kpQ 3kpQ kpQ

A) 0 B) C) D) 5
d3 d3 d3
5. Figure shows a rigid thin frame, hinged at A and B with the help of two mass less and
charge less rods and given the shape of half ring of radius R. The assembly is now free
to rotate about vertical axis passing through AB in a horizontal uniform electric field
E. Linear charge density of frame is 1 and linear mass density is  2 . If assembly is
slightly disturbed from unstable equilibrium position, then find maximum angular
velocity of ring during ensuing motion.
161E  1E 1E 21E

A) B) C) D)
 2 R 16  2 R 2 2 R 2R
6. Figure shows a closed loop of wire that consists of a pair of equal semicircles of radius
R, lying in mutually perpendicular planes. The loop was formed by folding a flat
circular loop along a diameter until the two halves became perpendicular to each other.

A uniform magnetic field of magnitude B is directed perpendicular to the fold
diameter and makes equal angles (of 45°) with the planes of the semicircles, initially
(t = 0). The loop is rotated at a constant angular velocity  about the fold diameter.
This induces an emf, which causes a current to flow in the wire. The resistance per
unit length of the wire is  . The magnetic moment of the loop is
magnetic field
45º
45º
R
C
R
 BR 3   BR 3   BR 3   BR 3 

A)  sin t  B)  cos t  C)  cos t  D)  sin t 
 2 2   2   4   4 
7. A stick of uniform mass distribution has its bottom end attached to a wall by a pivot
and is held up by a massless string attached to its other end. Which of the following
scenarios has the smallest tension in the string? (Length of stick is same in all
scenarios).
A) B) C) D)
SECTION-II
8. There are two Vernier Calipers both of which have 1 cm divided into 10 equal
divisions on the main scale. The Vernier scale of one of the calipers has 25 equal
divisions coinciding with 27 divisions on the main scale; while the Vernier scale of the
other has 25 divisions coinciding with 23 divisions on the main scale. You have to
decide which pair of data correspond to which calipers by referring to the figures
below:

A) The smallest reading that can be taken on C1 is 0.004 cm.

B) The smallest reading that can be taken on C2 is 0.008 cm.
C) The reading indicated by C2 is 2.552 cm.
D) The reading indicated by C1 is 2.548 cm.
9. Three identical thin, fixed metal plates are arranged in the air at equal distances d from
each other. The area of each of the plates equals A. The plate 1 has charge + Q, while
plates 2 and 3 are not charged and are connected through a key K to an ideal inductor
of self inductance L. The distance between the plates is small compared with their
size. Select correct option(s)

A) Just before the switch K is closed, the charge on right surface of plate 2 is Q/2
B) Just before the switch K is closed, the charge on right surface of plate 3 is Q/2
Q d
C) After the switch K is closed, the maximum current in the circuit is
2 L0 A
d
D) After the switch K is closed, the maximum current in the circuit is Q
L 0 A

10. Two AC sources with emfs 1  10sin  t  V and  2  10sin  t   V are fed to an LR
 3
circuit. The resistance is R  10  and inductive reactance is X L  10 3

A) The equivalent emf of the AC source has a peak value of 10 3V

3
B) The peak value of current is A
2
 15 3
C) The voltage across the inductor at t  is V
3 2
 15
D) The voltage across the resistor at t  is V
3 2
11. An ideal gas can expand from state A to C (via state B) through two different process
P and Q. In process P, AB and BC are straight lines in P-V diagram. In process Q,
states A, B, C are on a circle in P-V diagram. Heat supplied and work done by gas in
processes P and Q are respectively Q P , QQ and WP , WQ

WQ WP
A) QQ  QP B) WQ  WP C)  D) Q Q  WQ  QP  WP
QQ QP
12. A solid non conducting sphere have two spherical cavities A and B of radius
'rA ' and 'rB ' respectively, as shown. Radius of sphere is ‘R’. Select the CORRECT
statement(s):-

A) Electric field in cavity A is uniform.
B) Electric field at the centre of cavity A depends on radius of cavity A.
C) Electric field at the centre of cavity A depends on radius of cavity B.
D) Electric field at the centre of cavity A will depend on distance between centres of
cavities A and B.
13. A circular conducting loop of radius r0 and having resistance per unit length  as
shown in the figure is placed in a magnetic field B which is constant in space and
time. The ends of the loop are crossed and pulled in opposite directions with a velocity
v such that the loop always remains circular and the radius of the loop goes on
decreasing, then
A) radius of the loop changes with r as r  r0  vt / 

B) magnitude of EMF induced in the loop as a function of time is e = 2Bv r0  vt / 
Bv
C) current induced in the loop is I =
2
Bv
D) current induced in the loop is I =


14. Current in R 3 in the shown circuit (capacitor is initially uncharged)
A) just after closing the switch is zero

B) long time after closing the switch is zero
E
C) just after closing the switch is
R3
E
D) long after closing the switch is
R3
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
Four batteries of emf E1  4V, E 2  8V, E3  12V and E 4  16V and four identical capacitors
each of 1F and four identical resistances are connected in circuit as in figure.
Batteries do not have any internal resistances.
15. At steady state, potential difference across C2 is:

A) 1V B) 5V C) 4V D) 6V
16. If points H and B are shorted, the new charge on C 2 at steady state will be:
A) Zero B) 5 C C) 4 C D) 1 C
A conducting (resistance less) slider PQ of mass m and length  is free to translate on
two vertical smooth rails in the presence of gravity. The slider is connected with a non
conducting spring of spring constant k in uniform magnetic field B into the plane. At
time t = 0, spring was in its natural length, capacitor was uncharged and the slider is
released from rest as shown in the figure, then answer the following questions.
17. Motion of rod will be:-

k
A) SHM with angular frequency
m
B) oscillatory but not SHM
k
C) SHM with angular frequency
m  B2  2 C
4mg
D) SHM with amplitude of oscillation of rod as
k
18. If suddenly spring is cut while rod is in motion, then:
A) the rod will still perform oscillatory motion
B) the rod will move downward and acquire terminal velocity
C) finally, the rod moves down with constant acceleration
D) charge on capacitor will increase with time
SECTION – I
ONE is correct.
19. From the relations between the variables for two gases, given in List - II and the
conclusion regarding the variables on the List I
List I List-II
(P) 1   2 (1) Equal P, T1  2T2 , 2  21
(Q) Z1 (1)  Z1 (2) (2) Equal T and P, M1  2M 2 , 1  2 2
(R) Z11 (1)  Z11 (2) (3) Equal T and P, M1  2M 2 , 2  21
(S) K.E1  K.E 2 (4) Equal T, P and V, M 1  M 2

Match List I with one or more options of List II. The correct option is
A) P  1 Q2 R3 S 4
B) P  1 Q3 R2 S 4
C) P  4 Q2 R 3 S 1
D) P  4 Q3 R2 S 1
20. In the following transformation
O
O Me OH
CO 2H
Reagent1
Reagent 2
OMe OMe
reagents 1 and 2 are:

A) H 2SO 4 ; alkaline KMnO 4 B) AlCl3 ; I 2 / NaOH, followed by H
C) H 3PO 4 ; CHCl3 / KOH D) KOH; CHCl3 / KOH
21. ICl3 is unstable and it dimerises to I2Cl6. The liquid has an appreciable electrical
conductivity while in gas phase it decomposes into ICl and Cl2. The reason for the
observed electrical conductivity is:
A) its ionisation to [ ICl2 ] and [ ICl4 ]
B) its ionisation to [ ICl2 ] and [ ICl4 ]
C) its ionisation to [ ICl3 ] and [ ICl3 ]
D) its ionisation to [ ICl ] and [ ICl5 ]

22. Light of frequency v is found to eject electrons of velocity  e from a clean potassium
surface in vacuum. Which of the following is true concerning this phenomenon?
A) This phenomenon is best explained theoretically by using the wave model of light.
B) Light of frequency 2v will eject electrons of velocity 2 e .
C) A more intense light source of frequency v will eject electrons with a velocity
greater than  e
1
D) The minimum energy required to remove an electron from the metal is hv  m 2e
2
23. Which of the following reaction, do not evolve nitrogen gas as one of the product:
phenylhydrazine(excess)
A) D  mannose  

(C  2epimer of D glu cos e)
1.NaN 2  aq , 
B) p  methyl benzoylchloride 
2. NaNO 2 /HCl,25 C

O
NH 2 - NH 2 , KOH
Cl Ethyleneglycol,Δ
C)
NaNO ,HCl
D) Thiourea 
0°C
2

H 
24. FeCr2O 4  Na 2CO 3  O 2    X   
  Y  
Fusion
H

H2 O
H2O 2 /ether
 Z
Which of the following statements is true for the chromium compounds  X ,  Y 

and  Z  ?
(I) In all three compounds, the chromium is in 6 oxidation state.
(II)  Z  is a deep blue coloured compound which decomposes rapidly in aqueous
solution into Cr 3+ and dioxygen
(III) Saturated solution of  Y  gives bright orange compound, chromic anhydride, with
cold, concentrated H2SO4 .
A) only I and II are correct B) only II and III are correct
C) only III and I are correct D) All I , II, III are correct
25. Consider the following process of decays:
234 230
92 U 90 Th  42 He ; T1/2  250000 yr.
230 226
90 Th 88 Ra  24 He ; T1/2  80000 yr.
226 222
88 Ra 86 Rn  24 He ; T1/ 2  1600 yr.
After above process has occurred for a long time, a state is reached where every two
thorium atoms formed from 234
92 U , one decomposes to form 226
88 Ra and for every two

226 230
88 Ra formed, one decomposes. Calculate the ratio of number of nuclei of 90 Th to
226
88 Ra at this state:
A) 50 B) 100 C) 200 D) 25
SECTION-II
26.
Both compartments in the above diagram are large and contain ideal gas. The initial
conditions are mentioned in the diagram. Select the correct statement(s) for the whole
system.
A) S  0 if TA  TB
B) S  0 if TA  TB
C) S  0 if TA  TB
D) U  0 no matter that what is the relationship between TA and TB

27. The stereoisomer obtained in the reaction of (s)-2-phenyl propanal with MeMgBr
followed by acid hydrolysis is/are
CH3 CH3 CH3 CH3
HO H HO H H OH H OH
H Ph Ph H H Ph Ph H
A) CH3 B) CH3 C) CH3 D) CH3
28. Excess of KI reacts with CuSO 4 solution and then Na2 S2 O3 solution is added to it. Which
of the following statements is/are correct for this entire process?
A) Evolved I2 is reduced B) CuI2 is formed
C) Na2S 2O3 is oxidised D) Cu2I2 is formed
29. Decomposition of A(g) follows order kinetics according to the reaction:
A(g)  2B(g)  C(g) If initial pressure of A(g) is 10 atm and total pressure after 70 sec is
20 atm, then : (ln2 = 0.7)

A) Rate constant of reaction is 0.01 sec1
B) Partial pressure of B at 70 sec is 10 atm
C) Partial pressure of C at 140 sec is 7.5 atm.
D) Initial rate of reaction is 0.1 atm/sec

30. Polymers formed by isoprene monomer on ozonolysis will give which of the
following compounds as one of the possible product....
HC CH2 CH2 C CH3 H3C C CH2 CH2 C CH3
A) O O B) O O
HC CH2 CH2 CH H3C C CH3
C) O O D) O
31. in the qualitative analysis of basic radicals, K 4 Fe  CN 6  is used for the detection of
A) Fe3+ B) Zn2+ C) Cu2+ D) Al3+
32. Which of the following is/are correct for metallic crystal?
A) Number of next nearest neighbour in FCC unit cell is 12.
B) Packing efficiency of BCC unit cell is 68%
C) Total number of TV and OV in one FCC unit cell is 8 and 4 respectively.
D) Volume of HCP unit cell is 24 2R 3 , where R is radius of atom
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
Consider the following reaction sequence starting from organic compound (A)

(i) Na dil.H 2SO 4 (i) dil.NaOH
(A) (B) (C) (D)
(ii) 4-chlorobutan-2-one HgSO 4 (ii) NaBH 4
(iii) Conc.H 2SO 4 / 
(i) NBS / h (1eq)
(i)Sia 2 BH / THF
(ii)H 2O 2 / OH 
(ii) alc.KOH
(iii) LiAlH 4
(F)  (E)
conc.H 2SO 4 / 
CH 2  as one of the product 

2
Now, answer the following questions:

33. Organic compound (A) in the above passage is:
CH CH
A) H3C B)
OH
C C H
C) D)
(i)Mg/Hg,benzene
34. Organic compound (C) 
(ii)HOH  Product(P)
(iii)conc.H2SO4 /Δ
Hence the product (P) is:

OH OH
CH3
HO
A) B) OH
C) O D) O

Weakest Lewis acid 'X’ out of Boron halides  BX3  when treated with metal hydride
(Y) forms mixture of compounds. One of the compounds in this mixture when heated
with ammonia forms another compound 'Z' which is aromatic in nature.
35. Reaction between 'X' and 'Y' produces mixture of compounds. Choose the correct
properties of these possible compounds
(I) one of the possible compounds is B2H6 which has maximum 6 atoms in one plane

(II) one of the possible compounds is LiF which has lowest water solubility among
fluorides of alkali metals
(III) one of the possible compounds is AlF3 which can be obtained by treating alumina
with fluoro silicic acid
A) I and II only B) II and III only
C) I and III only D) all I, II and III
36. How many of the following statements are true about compounds in the passage
I. When BeCl2 is treated with Y it forms BeH 2
II. All nitrogen and Boron atoms in molecule Z are in sp 2 hybridization
III. Compound X has less than expected ' B  X ' bond length
A) Only I and II B) Only II and III
C) Only II D) All I, II, and III

MATHS Max.Marks:61
SECTION – I
ONE is correct.
37. The number of solution in x of the equation
 3x  2
3 f  x   f '  x   2  cot 3x  cos ec 2 x  4  sin    if x   0,6  and
 2 2
f(x) satisfies the differential equation f ''  x   f  x   0 and

2 2
 f  x    f  x 
'
 1 , and f (0) = 1 is
A) 1 B) 3 C) 4 D) 0
38. In a matrix A44 , an ant starts moving from a11 in such a way that it can move from aij
to either a i 1 j or ai j 1 in one step. If it reaches a44 , the probability that it passes
through a23 is
18 1 9
A) B) C) D) None of these
35 4 20

39.  
Three circle C1 , C2 , C3 with radii r1 , r2 , r3 r1  r2  r3 respectively are given as r1  2
and r3  8 they are placed such that C2 lies to the right of C1 and touches it externally,
C3 lies to the right of C2 and touches it externally. There exist two straight lines each
of which is a direct common tangent simultaneously to all the three circles then r2 is
equal to
A) r2  4 B) r2  5 C) r2  10 D) r2  16
40. A plane passing through (1, 1, 1) and parallel to the lines L1 , L2 direction ratios
(1, 0, –1), (1, –1, 0). If V is the volume of tetrahedron formed by origin and the points
where the plane intersect the coordinate axes, then value of 2V is equal to
A) 8 B) 9 C) 10 D) 2
x2 y2
41. If a tangent of slope 4 of the ellipse 2  2  1 is normal to the circle
a b
x 2  y 2  4 x  1  0 then the maximum value of ab is
A) 4 B) 5 C) 6 D) 8
1
42. If vectors aˆ , bˆ, cˆ are unit vectors form RHS in space such that a .b  b .c  c.a 
2
then a  b . a  b  c
    is equal to
1 1 1 1
A) B)  C) D) 
2 2 2 2 2 2
43. Let A, B, C and D be four distinct point on a line in that order. The circle with
diameters AC is x 2  y 2  ax  c  0 and BD is x 2  y 2  by  0 intersect at X and Y,
the line XY meets BC at Z. let P be a point on XY other than Z, the line CP intersects
the circle with diameter AC at C and M, and line BP intersects the circle with diameter
BD at B and N and the equation of the line AM and DN are bx + cy + a=0 and
cx + ay + b =0 respectively, then which of the following is true? (Where  is the
complex cube root of unity)
A) a + b + c = 1 B) a  b 2  c  1
C) a  b 2  c  0 D) None of these
SECTION-II
3
44. Let f  x   2 x 3  3x 2  x  then which of the following is/are incorrect?
2
7/8
3
A)  f  f  x dx 
1/8 4
3/5
B) y   f  x   is not differentiable at exactly 1 point
C) y   f  x     , (   prime number, [.]GIF) is discontinuous at 3 points if
x  0,1
D) f  f  x    0 has minimum 6 real roots
45. Which of the following is/are incorrect?
 x x2 1
A) Let f : R  R , such that f  x   2 x  
1  
    x   sin x cos x
4 2

 4 x  x  1 8  
then (where [.] denotes the greatest integer function) f is one – one & onto:
x3  2x 2
B) Let f : R  R , such that f  x   then f is one – one & onto
sin x  2
2
x1
C) Let f : R  1,   such that f  x   2 then f (x) is one – one & into
D) Let f : R   0  R such that f  x   x ln x then f (x) is one – one & onto

46. For any two positive integers x and y
1 1 1 1
f  x, y      ..... , then which of the following
 x  1 !  x  2 !  x  3 !  x  y!
options is/are correct
1 1 1  1
A) f  x, y   
x  x !  x  y  ! y 

B) lim f  x, y    x!
1 2
C) f  x, x   D) f (2, 2) is equal to
 x  1 ! 3
y4
47. If largest and smallest value of are p and q respectively where (x, y) satisfy
x3
x 2  y 2  2 x  6 y  9  0 , then which of the following is/are true?
4 4 4
A) p  q  B) q = 1 C) p  D) pq 
3 3 3
48. Consider a function
2
2x 1 1  x 2x
f  x   sin 1
2
 cos 2
 tan 1 2
 a tan 1 x  a  R  , the value of a if
1 x 1 x 1 x
f (x) = 0 for all x:
A) 6 B) –6 C) 2 D) –2
 
m2 n p
49.  3 
m 1 n 1
m
n.3m  m.3n

q
(where p & q are coprime) then which of the following
is/are correct?
A) p + q = 41 B) p<q
C) p is perfect square D) q is perfect square

50. Let A (4, 3), B (–4, 3) and C (0, –5) be the vertices of triangle and P(5, 0) be a point.
Let L, M and N be the feet of the perpendiculars drawn from P onto the sides BC, CA
and AB respectively, then
A) Area of LMN is 5sq. units
B) the centroid of LMN does not exist
C) The orthocenter of LMN is the origin
D) L, M and N are collinear
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
Let  1 ,  2 ,....,  n be the roots of the equation
f  x   x n  p1 x n 1  .....  p n1 x  pn  0
f  x
n f  x
 x n1   i  p1 x n  2   i2   i p1  p2 x n 3  ...... then
   f ' x
x  i    i 1 x   i
df x
is an identify where f ' x   dx
5
51. If f  x   x 5  px 3  qx  t  0 ,  3
i
i 1
3
A)  p  3q B) 1 C) 0 D)  p 3  7q
52. If f  x   x 3  2 x 2  x  1 and  i (i = 1, 2, 3), are three roots of f (x) = 0 then  3

i
is equal to
A) 3 B) 4 C) 5 D) 6
A variable line L intersects the parabola y  x 2 at points P and Q whose x –
coordinates are  and  respectively with    , the area of the region enclosed by
4
the segment PQ and the parabola is always equal to . The variable segment PQ has
3
its middle point as M.
53. Which of the following is/are correct?
A)      can have more than one real values
B)      can be equal to 2
C)      can have exactly one real value
D)   2  
A) Equations of the pair of tangents, drawn to the curve, represented by locus of M
from origin are y = 2x and y = –2x
B) Area of pair of tangents to be curve, represented by locus of M from origin are
y = x and y = –x
C) Area of the region enclosed between the curve, represented by locus of M, and the
2
pair of tangents drawn to it from origin is sq. units
3
D) Area of the region enclosed between the curve, represented by locus of M, and the
1
pair of tangents drawn to it from origin is sq. units
3

Time: 09:00 AM to 12:00 NOON 2017-P1 Max.Marks:183
KEY SHEET
PHYSICS
1 BD 2 BD 3 ACD 4 ABD 5 ABC
6 BC 7 D 8 8 9 3 10 5
11 6 12 5 13 C 14 D 15 D
16 B 17 C 18 B
CHEMISTRY
19 ABCD 20 B 21 BCD 22 B 23 BD
24 BCD 25 AC 26 6 27 8 28 8
29 3 30 2 31 C 32 C 33 B
34 D 35 D 36 B
MATHS
37 ABCD 38 AC 39 AB 40 ABC 41 ACD
42 ABCD 43 BC 44 7 45 5 46 2
47 4 48 9 49 D 50 B 51 A
52 B 53 C 54 C
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 28-04-19_Sr.COIPL_JEE-ADV_2017-P1_GTA-09_Key &Sol’s
SOLUTIONS
PHYSICS
1.
21
Current in circuit i  
 r 
 Rr   21 
VAB     20
  R  r    r 
 
21R  20R  20r  R  20r
20
VAC    62   40 volt
31
VAD  62 volt
1
2. X L  L  40   1
40 
1
XC   2
C
R  1

XL
tan   1
R
  45
X C  2
X L  1, R  1 Z  2
 dy   dy 
3.      1
 dx equipotentialcurve  dx Electric field
kQ k  2Q  k  3Q  k  4Q 
4. VA    
R 2R 3R 4R
 VA  0  intially
When k1 is closed potential of ‘A’ becomes zero
 VA  0  finally
So it will not change
5.
v v
6. a a
4R 4
v v
b a
2R 2
v
c c0
3R
v
d d0
R

7. The force experienced by A is due to infinite number of incidence and reflection. The
situation is shown in the diagram.
I 0.5I 0.52 I 0.53 I
F  2 2  2  ...
c c c c
I 2I  1 1 1  I 2I  1/ 2  3I
    2  3  ....     
c c 2 2 2  c c 1  1/ 2  c
8. Let capacitor is charge in one go.
Heat dissipated in the process
1
E1  8C  8   32C2
2
Where  is emf of each battery and C is capacitance of capacitor
In stepwise charging
Wb   C       C  2   .....   C  8 
8  8  1
 C 2  C2  36 
2
E1
E 2  36C 2  32C2  4C2 8
E2
620
1240 dN eA
eAk  d 
400 eAk 2
620
9.  h   620 i e dI  
2 dt hc  hc 2c 400

1 1 6202  4002  k  
220 1020 0.031
  2.8A  3A
1240  2 1240  2 100
d2  4d 2
10. BP  AP    given  CP  AP     given 
2D 4 2D
2
Resultant amplitude at P is A ' , where A '2   A  A   A 2

11. The object and image positions relative to their closest lenses do not depend on the
separation between the two lenses. So the rays between the lenses are parallel. Object
is at the focus of the first lens and image at the appropriate focus of the second lens.
5C 5C 2
C
5C
12. C eq  6  6 
5C 11C 11
C
6 6
5C  55
Q  25C0
11
13, 14 & 15
AB is PV 1 = constant,
BC is P = constant
CD is not constant volume process but VD  VC
DA is P = constant.
16. Ceq  20 F
q  200 C
q1  120 C
q2  0
17. Ceq  21 C
q  210 C
q1  0
q 2  100 C
18. Ceq  21 C
q  210 C
q1  0
q 2  40 C

CHEMISTRY
19. ABCD
20. Stotal is positive for micelle formation due to increase in entropy of solvent.

r1 K  H 1 1 1 K a  106
21.   K
r2 K  H   1000 Ka p b  8
2
HA  H   A  x2
10 6  x 2  107 pH  3.5
0.1  x x x 0.1
for 0.1 M NaA

1 Ka
pH  7 
2
 
p  log C  7  2.5  9.5
22. B
0.558  i  1.86  0.1
23.
i3
Co  NH 3 5 Cl  Cl2
Tb  3  0.52  0.1
55.55
P  PA0 X A  760 
55.55  3  0.1
 756 atm
3
24. Co  H 2O  6  - 0 unpaired e 

 FeBr4  - 5 unpaired e
3
Cu  CN  4  - sp3 - diamagnetic
2
Cr  H 2 O 6  = d 4 = t 2g 3eg1
CFSE   3  0.4  1 0.6  0  0.6 0
25.
O O O O O O
HO S O S OH HO P O P OH HO P O P OH
, , ,
O O OH OH H H
O O
HO S S OH
O

26.
C C Cl C CH
C CH
(1) Cl
Cl
(1) (4)
C CH C CH
Cl
(2)
Cl
(4)
27. G  nFE
 2  96500   0.36  0.12 
 E 
  2  96500  1.110 
4
S  nF 
 T P
H  G  TS  40 kJ / mol
1 1
28. Sor  SoH 2O(  )  SHo 2 (g)  SOo 2 (g)  70  130   204 
2 2
G  H  TS
G
Sou 
T
29. For species with same bond order bond length decreases with decrease in atomic size.
Li 2  B2  F2  C 2  O 2  N 2
30. Galena, Sphalarite.

31. With H 2S / HCl , Cu 2 & Pb 2 form black ppt. Cu 2 gives green colour in flame and white
ppt with KI.
32. Pb 2  gives white ppt with dil HCl, blue colour in flame test and white ppt with CN 
which is insoluble in excess reagent.

33. Fe3 gives brown ppt with NH 4 OH / NH 4 Cl , yellow colour in borax bead test and brown
colouration with K 3  Fe  CN 6 
34. D
35. D
36. B
MATHS
37.
n
sin t  cos t
38. (A) Let  t
dt  An
0
1  
 2
sin t  cos t dt
An    sin t  cos t dt    ....
  0 
2 
1  

1  1 1
 1    .....    sin t  cos t dt 
  2 3 n  0 
2 2  1 1 1 
 1    ....  
  2 3 n 
3 sin x  8  3 sin x
(C)
2

 3 sin x 8  3 sin x 
3 1 4
(D) 1  tan x  3 and  
 x 
3 tan x 4 3
So,  
 x 
1 1 1
 
39.
1 1 1
A.M.  H.M. for , , , we get a b c 3  111 3
a b c 3 6 a b c 2

     
2 2 2
a  1   b  1   c  1   a  1  b  1  c  1   6  3 
2 2
 b   c   a   b c a    2 
Now,     3 
3  3  
   
 1 2  1 2  1 2 75

 a    b    c   
 b   c   a  4
40.  AB  BA  0
  A  B   An  B n
n
 A  B   An  B 
n n
3 A  7 B   3n An  7n B n
n
 3n 3n1 A  7n 3n1 B
 An  3n1 A.B n  3n1 B
41. (A) Intersection point is mid–point of AB and CD
(B) 2  6  15  7
 2i  6 j  3k .i   j  5 k   7   2   2  25 2
 2  6 15   7  2   2  25 2
 2   2  25 2  1
(C) Triangle is equilateral
(D) Intersection points are (1, 2, 3) and (2, –3, 1)
42. Centroid G of triangle is collinear with H and O and G lies two third of way from A to
M, therefore H is two third of the way from A to F. So AF = 3 OM = 15.
Since HFB  AFC , HBF  ACF
So, BFH and AFC are similar.
BF AF
  BF .FC  FA.HF  75
HF FC
Now BC 2   BF  CF    BF  CF   4 BF .FC
2 2
But FC  BF   FM  MC    BM  FM   2 FM  22
BC  222  4 75  28
1 n1 r 
43. T 
n r0
f   where f  x   x 4  x 3  x 2  2 , f(x) is an increasing function for
 n 
 x>0.
1 1  n 1
Tn   f 0   f  .....  f  
n   n   n 

1
167
Tn    x 4  x 3  x 2  2 dx 
0
60
1 n  r  1  1  r  167
Sn  
n r1
f     f    ..... 
 n  n   n 
f   
 n  60

44. 1000  23.53 , 2000  24.53
So, a  2 A.5R , b  2 B.5S , c  2C .5T ,
max  A, B   3, max  R, T   max  B, C   4

max  R, S   max  R, T   max  S , T   3
There are 10 ways of choosing R, S, T.
1 with all 3, 3 with one 2, 3 with one 1, 3 with one 0, C must be 4. There are 7 ways of
choosing A, B; 1 with both 3, 3 with A = 3, B not, 3 with B = 3 and A not. Thus7
ways of choosing A, B, C hence 7.10 = 70 ways.
45. Any point on the line of intersection is (t, –1, 2–t)
3  t   52  3  t   43  2t 2  t  0
2 2
For maximum distance =
   
Normal n  3  0 i   4  1 j 5  2 k
Equation of plane through the line at maximum distance 3x + 5y + 3z = 1

1  2
46. The graph of f(x) = y and y    e x  Two solutions exist.
 e  e

47. Conceptual
5
48. 2sin1   3sin 1  
2

max. of sin1  &sin 1  is
2
 
So sin 1   & sin 1  
2 2
P 2sin   3sin   2
1 1
So 
 
12  2
   3
 4
So 3   9
52,53,54
Selection Arrangement
Dream 5
C3 5
C3  3!
3! 8
Dedication 2
C1 7 C1  8C3 2
C1 7 C1   C3 3!
2!
Powerful 8
C3 8
C3 3!
3! 8
Combination 3
C1 7 C1  8C3 3
C1 7 C1   C3 3!
2!

2017-PAPER -I
MATHS:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
PHYSICS:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
CHEMISTRY:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 28-04-19_Sr. COIPL_Jee-Adv_2017-P1_GTA-09_Q’P
Time: 03:00 Hr’s IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 183
PHYSICS:
Sec – I (Q.N : 1 – 7) +4 -2 7 28
Sec – II (Q.N : 8 – 12) Questions With Integer Answer Type +3 0 5 15
Sec – III (Q.N : 13 – 18) Questions With Single Answer Type +3 -1 6 18

Total 18 61
CHEMISTRY:
Sec – I (Q.N : 19 – 25) +4 -2 7 28
Total 18 61
MATHEMATICS:
Sec – I (Q.N : 37 – 43) +4 -2 7 28
Total 18 61

SECTION – I
This section contains 7 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 options (A), (B), (C) and (D) for its answer, out of which ONE OR
MORE than ONE option can be correct.
1. Three identical resistances are connected in series with an ideal battery of emf  =62V.
A voltmeter having finite resistance is used to measure potential drops across different
resistors. It is found that voltmeter reads VAB  VBC  VCD  20 volt. If same voltmeter is
used to measure potential drop across different points then it's reading will be
A B C D

A) VAC  41volt B) VAC  40 volt C) VAD  60 volt D) VAD  62 volt
1 1
2. If in the AC circuit shown, R  1, C  F, L  H and, frequency of AC
80 40
source=20 Hz, then select correct option(s).

A) Impedance of the AC circuit is 1

B) Impedance of the AC circuit is 2
C) Current through an AC source will lead its EMF
D) Current through an AC source will be in phase with its EMF
3. Mark the correct choices (x, y denotes x and y coordinates respectively and a is a
constant of appropriate dimensions).

A) If electric field is given by E  axi  ayj, then shape of equipotential lines would be
circular

B) If electric field is given by E  ayi  ax j, then shape of equipotential lines would be
circular.

C) If electric field is given by E  ayi  ax j, then shape of equipotential lines would be
rectangular hyperbola.

D) If E  ayi  axj, then we can’t define electric potential for this field.
4. Four concentric conducting spherical shells of radii R, 2R, 3R and 4R carry charges
Q, –2Q, –3Q and 4Q respectively. These shells are provided with switches
K1 , K 2 , K 3 and K 4 respectively. Which of the following operations will not change
electric potential of spherical shell A?
4R
4Q
-3Q
-2Q
Q
3R K1 K2 K3 K4
R
A
2R
A) switch K1 alone is closed B) Both K1 and K 2 are closed

C) Both K 2 and K 3 are closed D) K 4 alone is closed
5. In the electric circuit shown, the resistors R1 and R 2 have unequal (non-zero) resistance
and L is an ideal inductor. The cell is ideal and all conducting wires have zero

resistance. Initially the key k was open and the circuit was in steady state. Then just
after the key k is closed which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
R1 R2
k
E
L
A) Current through R1 will not change

B) Current through R 2 will not change
C) Current through L will not change
D) Current will pass through closed key
6. Shown is a DC circuit that contains two switches S1 and S2 . Each switch has zero
resistance when closed. All of the connecting wires should be considered to have zero
resistance. All of the resistors shown are identical. The circuit contains an ideal
ammeter and an ideal voltmeter. The diagram shows the switches open. Below the
diagram are four different switch configurations for the circuit. Rank these
configurations in terms of the ammeter reading & voltmeter reading.

Configuration S1 S2
a open open
b open closed
c closed open
d closed closed
A) i a  i b  i c  i d B) i a  i c  i b  i d C) vc  vd  va  vb D) vc  vd  v b  va
7. A parallel beam of light of intensity I is continuously incident normally on a plane
surface A which absorbs 50% of the incident light and reflect remaining light in
backward direction. The reflected light falls on B which is perfect reflector. The light
reflected by B is again partly reflected and partly absorbed by A and this process
continues. For all absorption by A, absorption coefficient remains equal to 0.5. The
pressure experienced by A due to light is

1.5 I I 3I 3I
A) B) C) D)
c c 2c c
SECTION-II
8. A charging device consists of eight identical, ideal cells in a proper series connection
and a capacitor is charged using this device. Charging process is done by two ways :
In first case, capacitor is connected across the whole device (eight cells) in a single
step. In second case charging is done in steps which means, first capacitor is
connected across a single cell, then across two cells, .............,then across eight cells. If
E1
loss of heat in first case is E1 and in second case is E 2 , then find .
E2
dI
9. Scientists have made a light source whose spectral emissive power is constant over
d
dI
visible range. Here I is intensity and  is wavelength. In other words, graph is
d
2
shown below. This beam of area 1m is incident on emitter plate of photoelectric tube.
The collector plate is sufficiently positive so that tube is in saturation mode. Assume
that each capable photon liberates 1 electron. If work function is 2eV, what is the
current (in A) in the tube? Round off to nearest integer.
10. Three equidistant slits are illuminated by a monochromatic parallel beam of light
falling normally onto them. The screen is parallel to the plane of the slits and the slit
separation d << D (D is the slit-screen separation). The observation point P is directly

opposite to A. It is given that BP – AP = ,  being the wavelength of light used. Find
4
the ratio of the intensity at P when all slits are open to the intensity at P when only one
slit is open.

11. Two equi-convex thin lenses ‘A’ and ‘B’ of focal lengths 20 cm and 30 cm
respectively are placed at a separation ‘d’ with their principal axes coinciding. An
object placed at a distance ‘u’ from the lens ‘A’ (away from B) forms an image at a
distance ‘v’ from the lens ‘B’(away from A). If it is observed that u and v have the
v n
same set of values for d = 30 cm, 60 cm, 120 cm and 150 cm and ratio  then n=?
u 4
12. In the arrangement shown in figure, find the potential difference VB  VA (in V). (Take
V0 = 55 V)

SECTION – III
A thermodynamic reversible cyclic process ABCDA of one mole of an ideal mono-
3R
atomic gas  CV   is drawn on a PV indicator diagram. The catch is that instead of
 2 
usual orthogonal axes, the ‘P’ axis is inclined to ‘V’ axis at an angle 60 . In an inclined
axes system (say x-y), the co-ordinates of a point in first quadrant (x, y) should be
understood as follows: From origin, x is the distance of the point along
x-axis, y is the distance of the point along y-axis. For example, the co-ordinate  P0 , V0 
is read on the diagram (graph) as shown
P
Y X P , V 
0 0
P0
O V0 Z V

XY  OZ  V0 and OY  XZ  P0
Here scale on both P and V axes is 1 unit = 1 corresponding SI unit. Q, V , T in this

situation have usual meanings.  in a process is defined as ratio of work done by gas in
a process to the modulus of the area of the PV graph of a process projected “normally”
on to ‘V’ axis. For example in the cyclic processes ABCDA and for process AB, area
referred to in the above statement is area of trapezium ABFE and for process BC, area
is area of trapezium BCGF. Column I refers to a thermodynamic process, column II
refers to a physical quantity and column III refers to their value. Process DA and BC
are parallel to V-axis, process CD is perpendicular to V-axis and process AB if
extended passes through origin and is inclined to V-axis by 30 .
P
2P0 B
C
P0 A 30
D
60
V
E F G

Column I Column II Column III
(I) AB (i)  (P) Positive
(II) BC (ii) Q (Q) Negative
(III) CD (iii) V (R) Zero
(IV) DA (iv) T (S) 1
13. Which one of the following options is the CORRECT combination?
A) (I) (i) (S) B) (II) (i) (Q) C) (IV) (i) (Q) D) (III) (iii) (R)
14. Which one of the following options is the INCORRECT combination?
A) (II) (ii) (P) B) (IV) (ii) (Q) C) (I) (i) (P) D) (III) (iv) (R)
15. Which one of the following options is the INCORRECT combination?
A) (I) (iv) (P) B) (II) (iv) (P) C) (IV) (i) (Q) D) (III) (i) (Q)
Answer the following three questions based upon the given diagram (take all
capacitors to be uncharged initially)

Column I – Charge Column II – Charge in Column III – Charge in

drawn from battery in capacitor connected capacitor connected between B
C between A & D in C & C in C
(I) 100 (i) 120 (P) 0
(II) 210 (ii) 0 (Q) 40
(III) 180 (iii) 40 (R) 50
(IV) 200 (iv) 50 (S) 100
16. If a 10 V battery is connected across the terminals A and D:
A) (I) (ii) (P) B) (IV) (i) (P) C) (II) (i) (Q) D) (IV) (iii) (S)
17. If a 10 V battery is connected across the terminals B and C:
A) (I) (ii) (P) B) (II) (iii) (R) C) (II) (ii) (S) D) (IV) (iii) (S)
18. If a 10 V battery is connected across the terminals E and F:
A) (I) (i) (P) B) (II) (ii) (Q) C) (III) (ii) (Q) D) (IV) (iii) (S)
SECTION – I
19. Find the correct statement(s)-
A) CHCl3 undergoes alkaline hydrolysis much more rapidly than CCl 4 or CH 2Cl2
B) Hydrolysis of chloroform is carried out in D 2 O in presence of OD , when the
reaction is interrupted and unconsumed chloroform is recovered, it is found to contain
deuterium.
C) The presence of added Cl  slows down alkaline hydrolysis of CHCl3
D) When alkaline hydrolysis of CHCl3 in presence of I  is interrupted, there is
recovered not only CHCl3 but also CHCl2 I .
20. Micelle formation is accompanied by the
A) decrease in overall entropy due to ordering
B) increase in overall entropy due to increase in solvent entropy
C) increase in overall entropy due to increase in solute entropy
D) increase in overall entropy and decrease in enthalpy

21. The initial rate of hydrolysis of methyl acetate (1M) by a weak acid (HA, 1M) is
1
th of that of a strong acid (HX, 1M), at 25C . Then choose the correct
1000
statement(s):
A) K a of HA is : 105 B) pK of A  is : 8
b
C) pH of 0.1 M HA is : 3.5 D) pH of 0.1 M NaA is: 9.5

22. The major product [U] in the following reaction sequence is-
OH
1.K 2 S 2O 8 ,KOH

2.H + ,H O
[U]
2
3.CHCl 3 , NaOH
4. HCN/ NaCN
5. DIBAL-H
6. H 2 O
7.LiAlH 4
8. H 2 O
9. H + , Δ
OH
HO
O O
A) B)
OH
HO O O
C) D)
23. If the freezing point of 0.1 molal aqueous solution of cobalt (III) chloride - ammonia
complex    1 is 0.558C . Then choose the correct statement(s):
Given K f  1.86 K kg mol 1 , K b  0.52 K kg mol 1 , R  0.0821L atm mol1K 1 , m  M 
A) The formula of the complex is Co  NH 3 4 Cl 2  Cl
B) The bp of the aqueous solution is 100.156

C) The vapour pressure of the solution at 100C is 721 mm of Hg
D) The osmotic pressure of the solution at 25C is 7.34 atm
24. Which of the following option(s) represents the correct first - transition metal M that
satisfies the requirements given?
3
A)  M  H 2O 6  having one unpaired electron: Co

B)  MBr4  having the most unpaired electrons: Fe
3
C) diamagnetic  M  CN 4  : Cu
2 3
D)  M  H 2 O 6  with CFSE=   0 : Cr
5
25. Which of the following is (are) dibasic acid(s) with bridging oxo group?
A) pyrosulphuric acid B) pyrophosphoric acid
C) pyrophosphorus acid D) pyrosulphurous acid
SECTION-II
26. The total possible structure(s) (including stereomers) of R-X (mol. formula C8H11Cl )
involved in the following reaction is [X],
1.Mg,Et 2 O
R-X 
2.H 2O
 C CH
Find [X-6].
27. Consider the electrochemical cell M(s) | MI 2 (sat) | M 2 (aq) | M(s) where 'M' is a metal. At
298K the standard reduction potentials are E oM 2
(aq)/M (s)
 0.12V , EoMI2 (sat )/ M(s)  0.36V and
the temperature coefficient is 1.1 104 VK 1 . At this temperature the standard enthalpy
change for the overall reaction, H or , is -5x kJ/mole. Then the value of x is:
(1F = 96500C)
y
28. The Souniverse for the following reaction at 298K is approximately kJ K 1 mol1 . The
10
1
 H2O  
value of y is: H 2 (g)  O 2 (g) 
2
Given: H or  285 kJ mol1 , SoH O(  )  70JK 1mol1 SoO (g)  204JK 1mol1 SoH (g )  130JK 1mol1
2 2 2

29. How many of the following species have more bond length than C 2 ?
Li 2 , B2 , N 2 , O 2 , F2
30. How many of the following ores are subjected to froth floatation and then carbon
reduction for extraction of corresponding metal? Chalcopyrite, Calamine, Sphalerite,
Heamatite, Argentite, Cinnabar, Azurite, Galena, Cassiterite.
SECTION – III
Answer the Q 31, 32 and 33 by appropriately matching the information given in
Consider the cations given column-I, dry test(s) given in column-II and wet tests given
in column-III.
Column-I Column-II Column-III
2
I) Co i) Bluish green colour in flame test. P) White precipitate with KI.
Q) Blue colour solution
II) Pb 2 ii) Blue colour in flame test.
with NH 4SCN
iii) Green coloured borax bead in R) Brown colour solution with
2
III) Cu
reducing flame K 3  Fe(CN)6 
iv) Blue coloured borax bead in S) White precipitate with KCN

IV) Fe3
reducing flame which is insoluble in excess KCN.
31. Which of the following combination is correct for the ion which gives black
precipitate with H 2S in presence of dil. HCl?
A) I, iv, Q B) II, ii, P C) III, i, P D) II, iv, P
32. Which of the following combination is correct for the ion which gives white
precipitate with dil. HCl?
A) II, i, P B) II, ii, P C) II, ii, S D) II, i, S
33. Which of the following combination is correct for the ion which gives brown
precipitatewith NH 4 OH in presence of NH 4 Cl ?
A) IV, iv, R B) IV, iii, R C) III, ii, P D) I, iv, Q
Answer the Q34, 35 and 36 by appropriately matching the information given in
COLUMN - I COLUMN II COLUMN III
A) 4 
i)HNO ,H SO , 60° 
1)  3 2
ii) Na 2S iii)HNO 2 iv)CuBr, Δ P) C6 H 6

i) NaOI
NO 2 ii) H  (workup)
iii) NaOH,CaO, Δ
B) 2) Q) C6 H 6 NF
iv)CH 3Cl, AlCl 3
NO 2 v)CrO 2Cl 2 / CS 2
vi) H 3 O 
OH
i) NH 3 -H 2S ii) NaNO 2 ,HCl

C) 3) 
iii)HBF4 ,Δ iv)Sn/ HCl
 R) C7 H 6 O
COOH
O
i)Br2 , H 2 O ii)Zndust
D) CH3 4) 
iii)Mg  THF  iv) H 2O
 S) C6 H 4 NO 2 Br
34. Find the correct combination -

A) B-2-R B) A-3-Q C) D-2-P D) C-4-P
35. Identify the incorrect combination -
A) A-1-S B) B-3-Q C) D-2-R D) B-2-S
36. Column-I reactant [D]can not be distinguished from its correct matched product in
column III by-
A) Tollen's Test B) Fehling test C) Haloform test D) Schiff test
MATHS Max.Marks:61
SECTION – I
  3 
37. If  is the root of the equation x – tan x = 3where    ,  ; then which of the
2 2 
following is/are correct? (Where [.] denotes the greatest integer function and {.}
fractional part function)
 max  tan x, x    min  tan x,  x  
A) lim   1 B) lim   1
x 
x3 x   x3
   
 min  tan x,  x  
D) lim  max  tan x,  x    1
 
C) lim  0
x 
 x3 
x 
 tan x 

38. Which of the following option(s) is/are incorrect?
 /8
A) sin 8nx  cos  8nx 2 2 1 1 1

0
x
dx 

1    ....  
2 3 n
1 1
B) 2  3 x dx  4 x dx
1/3 1/3

ln 3 
0 0
 /6
8
C) 0

sin x 8  3 sin x dx   9
 /3
D) 1  tan xdx  1
4   /4
x 3
2 2 2
39. Let a>0, b>0, c>0 and a + b + c = 6 then

 ab  1 
 bc  1 
 ca  1 may be equal
2
b c2 a 2
to
75
A) B) 35 C) 15 D) 10
4
1 1 1  2 1 1
40. Let matrix A  1 1 1 and B   1 2 1 , then –
 
1 1 1  1 1 2 
2005 2005
A)  A  B   A2005  B 2005 B)  A  B   A2005  B 2005
n n
C) 3 A  7 B
   3n 1 3n A  7 n B
  D)  3 A  7 B   32 n A  3n 7 n B
 
A) The point of intersection of AB and CD where A (4, 7, 8), B (–1, –2, 1),
3 5 9
C (2, 3, 4) and D (1, 2, 5) is  , , 
2 2 2
B) If   ,  ,   be a point on the plane 2x + 6y + 15z = 7 then the least value of
 2   2  25 2 is 7
C) The circumcenter of the triangle formed by the points (3, 2, –5), (–3, 8, –5) and
(–3, 2, 1) is the point (–1, 4, –3)
x  1 y  12 z  7
D) The length of intercept on the line   by the surface
1 5 2
11x 2  5 y 2  z 2  0 is 30 units
42. A rectangle HOMF has sides HO=11 and OM=5. A triangle ABC has H as the
intersection of the altitude, O the centre of the circumscribed circle, M the mid–point
of BC, and F the foot of the altitude from A, then which of the following is/are true?
A) Perimeter of ABC is greater than 70
B) Area of ABC in integer
C) One side of ABC is rational
D) All sides of ABC are less than 30
n
 r 4  r 3 n  r 2 n 2  2n 4  n1  r 4  r 3 n  r 2 n 2  2n 4 
43. Let S n    n 5  and Tn
 
r 0

 n 5
,

r 1   
n = 1, 2, 3,…… then which of the following is/are true?
167 167 167 167
A) Tn  B) Tn  C) S n  D) S n 
60 60 60 60
SECTION-II
44. If the number of ordered triplets (a, b, c) such that L.C.M (a, b) = 1000, L.C.M (b, c) =
2000 and L. C. M (c, a) = 2000 be N then sum of digits of N is/are ___________

45. The equation of a plane which passes through the line of intersection of the planes
x + y + z – 1 = 0 and x – y + z – 3 = 0 and which is at maximum distance from the
 a  b  c
point (3, 4, 5) is ax + by + cz – d = 0, the value of   is
 d
 e x  e  x x0
46. If f  x    then the number of solution of the equation
log10 100  x , x  0,100
 1 2
f  x    e   x  is
 e e
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
47. Let , , , , , , , are vertices
a1  2i a 2  2i a3  2i a4  2i a5  2i a6  2i a7  2i a8  2i
of regular octagon. Then the area of octagon is (1/A)
(where a j  R for j = 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 and i  1 where (A2/8) is
48. The quadratic equation 2 x 2  5 x  p  0 has roots equal to 2sin 1  and 3sin 1  ,
 p
then   equals, [.] denotes greatest integer function.
 

SECTION – III
Answer Q.No:49, Q.No:50, Q.No:51 by appropriately matching the information
given in the three columns of the following table.
Column 1, 2 & 3 contain parameters equation of conics, equation of chord joining two
parametric point and equation of tangents at parametric point respectively
Column– 1 Column– 2 Column– 3
(I) x  2cos x y
(i) x    y    2 
cos  1 2   sin  1
 1   2  (P)  sin   cos
  cos  2 
y  a sin  2  2  a  2    2 a
(II) x  2sec
(ii) x  1  2  y
sin
       
 co s  1 2   cos  1 2   0 (Q) y sin 2  2 x sin 2   2a cos 2 
y  a tan  2  2  a  2   2 
(III) x  2 tan  x y
(iii) ysin(1 2 )  2xsin1 sin2  2acos1 cos2 (R) cos  sin   1
y  a sec 2 a
(IV) x  a cot 2  x y
(iv) x     y       
cos  1 2   sin  1 2   cos  1 2  (S) sin    cos   0
y  2a cot  2  2  a  2   2  2 a

49. For a = 2 if a tangent is drawn to a suitable conic whose equation is x – 3y + 18 = 0,
the correct combination with which the equation is obtained is:
A) (II) (i) (S) B) (III) (ii) (Q) C) (I) (ii) (R) D) (IV) (iii) (Q)
50. Which of the following is a correct combination?
A) (III) (i) (S) B) (II) (i) (P) C) (IV) (ii) (Q) D) (I) (ii) (R)
A) (III) (ii) (S) B) (II) (iv) (P) C) (IV) (i) (Q) D) (I) (iii) (R)
Answer Q.No:52, Q.No:53, Q.No:54 by appropriately matching the information
given in the three columns of the following table.
Column 1, 2 & 3 consists of different words, number of selection of 3 letters from the
word and number of arrangements of 3 letters from the word respectively.
Column – 1 Column – 2 Column – 3
(I) DREAM (i) 70 (P) 60
(II) DEDICATION (ii) 10 (Q) 399
(III) POWERFUL (iii) 77 (R) 336
(IV) COMBINATION (iv) 56 (S) 378

A) (I) (i) (P) B) (III) (iv) (R) C) (II) (ii) (S) D) (IV) (ii) (Q)
A) (III) (iv) (S) B) (III) (i) (R) C) (IV) (iii) (Q) D) (I) (ii) (R)
54. Which of the following is correct combination?
A) (I) (ii) (S) B) (III) (i) (Q) C) (II) (i) (S) D) (IV) (iii) (R)

Sec: Sr. COIPL GTA-09 Date:28-04-19
Time: 02:00 PM to 05:00 PM 2017_P2 Max.Marks:183
KEY SHEET
PHYSICS
1 C 2 A 3 C 4 C 5 A
6 D 7 C 8 ACD 9 ABC 10 ABC
11 ACD 12 CD 13 ABD 14 AB 15 B
16 A 17 C 18 C
CHEMISTRY
19 A 20 B 21 B 22 D 23 A
24 D 25 B 26 ABCD 27 AC 28 ACD
29 ABCD 30 ABC 31 ABC 32 BCD 33 B
34 D 35 D 36 D
MATHS
37 A 38 C 39 A 40 B 41 D
42 D 43 C 44 ABC 45 ABCD 46 ABC
47 AC 48 ACD 49 ABC 50 BD 51 C
52 C 53 B 54 C
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 28-04-19_Sr.COIPL_JEE-Adv_2017-P2_GTA-09_Key & Sol’s
SOLUTIONS
PHYSICS
u  2d v  
1. 100      100
u  d v  
 30  0.04  30  
  2     100  8.166%  8.2%
 1800  1  6  1800  
dB
2. f 
dx
2 M dB 6 M
B 0 3   0 4
4d dd 4d
 6 0 
F  M1M 2  
 4d 
4

6 0 M1M 2


6 0 r 2i r 2i  
4 d4 4d 4
3. Uinitial  LI 2  LI 2  2LI 2
U final  4LI 2
  kp kp 3kpq
4. f net  F1  F2  3 q  3 2q  3 by action reaction
d d d
5. Conceptual
6. The flux of the magnetic field through the loop when it has rotated through   t ,
BR 2
  2 cos 45 cos t 
2
d BR 2 
EMF    sin t
dt 2
EMF
Current, i 
 .2R
 BR 3 
Magnetic moment = current x area =  sin t 
 4 
7.


mg cos   T 
2
mg cos 
T  Tmin 
2
23 
8. The reading on C1 is = 2.5  6   1    0.1  2.548 cm and the reading on
 25 
 27 
C 2 is  2.6  6   1    0.1  2.552 cm
 25 
9.
Q Q 1
i max  
2 2 L0 A / d
10. Conceptual
11. Conceptual
12. Conceptual
13. Perimeter is decreasing at a rate of 2v
d dr v
  2r   2v  
dt dt 
 v 
 r   r0  t 
  
d dr
  B. r 2     B.2 .r
dt dt
 v  v  v 
  2B  r0  t  .  2Bv  r0  t 
      
 2BVr Bv
I  
R .2r 
14. Just after switch is closed, L is open circuit and C is short circuit
Just after

Long time
15. In steady state, current through branch of capacitor is zero,
16  4 3
Current will flow as shown in the diagram I  
4R R
For potential difference across C2
Let, F be the reference position,
So, VF  0
Potential difference across C 2 , VC2  5V

16. If points H & B are shorted, then, the new path of current I is

E 4 16 8
I  
2R 2R R
For charge on C2 , let F be the reference position,
So, VF  0
Potential difference across C 2 , VC2  0

So, charge on C 2  0
17. Conceptual
18. Conceptual
h p
18.  ; k
p h
CHEMISTRY
u avg KT
19. (1)   
Z1  2   P 2
1 T12 22 2 2
 2 2   2    2   16
 2 T2 1
1   2
P
(2) Z1  2 2 u avg
KT
2 P
Z1  Constant
MT
2 2 2
Z1  1   P1  M 2T2  1  M 2 T2  1   M2 
          
Z2   2   P2  M1T1   2  M1T1   2   M1 
2

 2 2 2
2
Z1  Z 2
1 N 1 P
(3) Z11  Z1    Z1  

2  V  2  KT 
2 2
 Z 11 1  Z (1)    M2 1 1
 1   1    
 Z 11 2  Z1 (2)  P,T   2  M1 2 2
 Z11 2   Z11 1
3
(4) KE  KT
2
KE1  KE 2
20.
O
O Me OH
Me
C
AlCl 3
O
OMe (1) I2 / NaOH

OMe
(2) H 
OH
COOH
OMe
21. B
22. D
I.E = K.E + W.F
W.F = I.E - K.E
1
W.F = h  mv2e
2

HC O +H 2 N - NH - Ph HC N NH Ph HC NH HC N NH Ph
HO H HO C H C O C N NH Ph
HO H HO H HO H HO OH
  
-PhNH 2
 
2PhNHNH 2
 
-H 2 O
H OH
  H OH
-NH 2
H OH -H 2 O H OH
H OH H OH H OH H OH
H2C OH H2C OH H2C OH H2C OH
23. A (A) D - mannose  Osazone 
O Cl
NH2 OH
NaN 3 (aq)
  NaNO 2 + HCl
Δ
-CO 2

25°C
 + N2
-H 2O
CH3 CH3 CH3

(B)
O
H H
NH 2 -NH 2

KOH,Δ
 + N 2 + H 2O
Cl
(C)
S
||
NaNO +HCl
(D) N 2 H - C- NH 2   S = C = O + N 2 + H 2O
2
24. D
Fusion
4FeCr2 O4  8Na2 CO3  7O2  8Na 2 CrO4  2Fe2 O3  8CO 2
Y is Na2Cr2O7 and Z is CrO 5

cold
K 2 Cr2 O7  H 2 SO4   CrO 3  KHSO4  H 2O
chromic anhydride

K 2 Cr2 O7  H 2 SO4   Cr2 ( SO4 )3  K 2 SO4  H 2 O  O2
25. B
dN u  dN Th 
  2  V N V  2 Th N Th
dt  dt 
 dN   dN Ra 
  Th   2 
 dt   dt 
 Th N Th  2 Ra N Ra
n 2 N Th n 2
3
2 N Ra
80 10 16 102
N Th 2  80 103 100
 
N Ra 16 102 1

26. (A) Adiabatic since heat energy will flow from high to low temperature.
spontaneously therefore it is adiabatic it is adiabatic irreversible process.
Ssys  0
(B) same reason as of (A) option

(C) If TA  TB
S  SA  SB  0  0  0
(D) W  0 Q  0 U  0
CH3 CH3
CHO
MeMgBr HO H H OH
H Ph

followed H Ph H Ph
CH3
by CH3 CH3
27. H 3O 
28. ACD
A(g) 
 2B(g)  C(g)
29. t0 10  
t  70sec 10  x 2x x
PT  20 atm , 2x  10 , x  5
0.7
(A) K  0.01sec1
70
r = kP
r0  0.01 10  0.1
(B) PB  2x  10 atm
3
(C)  PC   10   7.5atm
4
(D) r0  K  PA 0  0.0110  0.1 atmsec1
n +
30.
31. The reactions involved are

3 
K 4 [Fe(CN)6 ]  Fe  Fe 4 [Fe(CN)6 ] 3   K
prussian blue ppt
K 4 [Fe(CN)6 ]  Cu2  Cu2 [Fe(CN)6 ]   K 

chocolate brown ppt
K 4 [Fe(CN)6 ]  Zn2  Zn2 [Fe(CN)6 ] 2   K 

blueish white ppt
32. BCD
33. B
34. D
CH O O
O
C CH2 CH2 C CH3 Ph
(A)
(B) (C)
Ph
OH
(D) (F)
(E)
35. D H 2 SiF6  Al2O3  AlF3  SiO2  H 2O

36. D
MATHS
2 2
37. f ''  x   f  x   0 and  f '  x     f  x    1
 x   sin 1  f  x    c
f  0  1  f  x   cos x
Equation becomes
 3x  2
3 cos x  sin x  2  cot 3x  cos ec 2 x  4  sin    is satisfied by only
 2 2
13
x
6
3! 3!

38. P (passing through a23 ) = 2! 2!  9
6! 20
3!3!

2 2
39. DE  AK  r
2
 r1    r2  r1   2 r1r2
Similarly EF  2 r2 r3
APD   and PD = x then

AD BE CF r1
tan     
PD PE PF x
r2 r3
 
x  2 r1r2 x  2 2r1r2  r2 r3
r2  r1 r3  r2
Hence, 
2 r1r2 2 r2 r3
 r2 r1r3  r2  2  8  4
i j k

40. n  1 0 1  i  j  k
1 1 0
Now, equation of plane is  1 x  1  1 y  1  1 z  1  0
x y z
  1
3 3 3
Plane meets coordinate axes at A(3, 0, 0), B(0, 3, 0), C(0, 0, 3)
1 9
Volume of tetrahedron is
6
 3i 3 j 3k   cubic units
2
41. Equation of tangents is y  4 x  16 a 2  b 2 this normal passes through (–2, 0)
Giving AM  GM
16a 2  b 2
 16a 2 b 2
2
64
 16a 2 b 2
2
4ab  32
ab  8
42.  a  b . a .c b  a .b c  0  a .b  a b c 

        
1 1
 
2 2
1 1
1
2 2
1 1 1
  a b c  
2
1 
2 2 2
1 1
1
2 2
a b c
43. Since in x AM and ND are concurrent b c a  0
c a b
    
a bc  a 2  b b 2  ac  c ab  c 2  0 
abc  a 3  b 3  abc  abc  c 3
3abc  a 3  b 3  c 3  0
 
a 3  b 3  c 3  3abc   a  b  c  a  b  c 2 a  b 2  c  0 
7/8
44. I  f  f  x dx
1/8
………(1)
7/8 7/8
I  f  f 1  x dx   f 1  f  x dx
1/8 1/8
……….(2)
3
So, 2 I 
4
1 1
x x
45. (A) x  x
 2 1
4  x  2  1
 x 

 4  x  1/ x  2  1 

1
x
1 x 1
So,   2

8  1  8
4   x    1
 x 
 x x2 1


1
0

4
2
 4 x  x  1 8  
1
So: f  x   2 x   x   sin 2 x injective but not onto
2
(B) f '  x    x 3 cos x  x 2  3sin x  2cos x   4 x  sin x  2
x x  i 1 1 1
46.   
 x  i !  x  i !  x  i  1 !  x  i  !
y
1 1 1
x   ..........(1)
i 1  x  i! x!  x  y!
1 1
lim  f  x, y     ..........(2)
y  xx ! x !
1 1 1 x 1
f  x, x     .....   
 x  1 !  x  2 !  x  x ! x!  x  1 !
2 2
47. Given circle is  x  1   y  3  1
Let of tangent to circle is y  3  m  x  1  1 1  m 2 (3, 4) lies on axis
1  2m  1  m 2
1  2m 2  1  m 2
4m 2  2m  1  1  m 2
3m 2  4m  0
4
M = 0,
3
y4 4
  m  0.0r
n3 3
4
Smallest is o and tangent =
3
48. If 0  x  1, a  6; if x  1, a  2, if x  1, a  2
 
 m.n  m n
49. 2S     n m m
 n

m 1 n 1 m.3  n.3
3 3 
50. P lies on circumcircle
So, L, M, N are collinear (i.e. Simson’s line)
51. f ' x  5x 4  3 px 2  q  5x 4  i x3   5 p   i2  x 2   pi  i3  x   pi2  i4  q
   i  0;   i2  2 p
p   i    i3  0    i3   p  i  0
52. f '  x  3 x 2  4 x  1  3x 2   i  

6 x 2
i
 2  i  3 
   i  2;   i2  2  i  3  1    i2  2
As  i is a root   i3  2 i2   i  1  0    i3  2  i2    i  3  0
3
As  i is a root   i
 2  i2    i  3

53&54.Any two point on y  x 2 is P  ,  2 ; Q  ,  2   
Equation of PQ, y   2       x   
y      x  

     x    x  dx
2
Required area

    2
Pair of tangents from origin are y = 2x and y = –2x
1
2
  x  
2
Area  1  2 x dx 
0
3

GT 15 [ ROTATIONAL MOTION ] @UNACADEMY FOR JEE 2021-2022
POWERED BY : INDIAN SCHOOL OF PHYSICS [NITIN SACHAN]
MAX MARKS : 88 TIME : 90 MINS
PART A : INTEGER/SUBJECTIVE TYPE[ +4 , -1 ]

1. A hollow cylinder of radius R = 2.0 m is rotating at constant angular acceleration
about its stationary horizontal axis into the plane of the paper as shown in the
figure. If a uniform solid cylinder is placed horizontally with its axis parallel to
the axis of hollow cylinder at an angular position of   30 , the solid cylinder
starts rolling with its axis motionless. The angular acceleration  (in rad/ s 2 ) of
the hollow cylinder is x. Find x
Ans: 5
2. A uniform rod has mass m = 2kg and length l = 13m. One end of the rod is
pulled with a constant velocity of v0  34 m / s along a frictionless horizontal
floor in the negative x direction. The other end is moving along a parabolic fixed
curve. The equation of the parabola is x 2  20 y . Find the angular velocity of the
rod (in rad/s) when the end point ‘B’ is at (10, 5)
Ans: 2
3. A block of mass m is attached to one end of a uniform rod of mass M = 10 kg
with the help of a light inextensible thin cord. This arrangement is placed on a
fixed horizontal frictionless cylinder of radius r as shown in the figure. In
equilibrium, the rod leans at an angle   30 with horizontal and the distance
between the point of contact of the rod with cylinder and top end of the rod is
1
k . The mass of the block m is 3(n), then the value of n is
2
Ans: 5
4. Consider the following statements

(a) The angular velocity of all points on the rigid body as seen from any other
point on it is the same
(b) A rigid uniform disc rolls without slipping on a fixed rough horizontal
surface, the velocity of the lowest point is zero and hence the acceleration of the
lowest point is also zero
(c) If two different axes are at the same distance from centre of mass of rigid
body, then moment of inertia of the given rigid body about both the axis will
always be same
(d) When a cylinder is rolling with slipping on a rough horizontal surface the
work done by friction on the surface is negative
(e) Friction acting on a cylinder without sliding on an inclined surface could be
positive, negative or zero depending on the external force acting on it
(f) A rigid body cannot roll on a smooth horizontal surface
(g) In the centre of mass frame a rigid body can have only rotational motion
(h) net  Icm is valid in all frames of reference
(i) A sphere is rotating uniformly about an axis passing through its centre then,
all the particles on the surface have same linear speed.
Ans: 3
5. In the figure shown, a wedge is being moved on a horizontal surface with a
velocity ‘v’ as shown. At the instant shown, if angular velocity of the rod of
xv
length l (about hinge) touching the wedge as shown is where x is a rational
l
1  3
number. What is the value of ?  sin 37  
1 x  5
Ans: 4
6. Three light rigid rods are hinged at A, B, C and D. ‘O’ is the instantaneous centre
of rotation for rod BC. The ratio of angular velocity of AB to that of DC is
_________
1 1
AB  r1  1m , BO  I1  m , DC  r2  2 m , CO  I 2  m
2 4
Ans: 4
7. A disc of radius r and mass m hinged to a light rod AC has initial angular
velocity 0 as shown. End A of rod is fixed and disc is free to rotate about C in
vertical plane. Coefficient of friction between the disc and surface B is  . If disc is
suddenly allowed to rest its full weight on the horizontal rough plane, the time
r a
after which it comes to rest is t  0 1  b tan   . Then  ___________
2ag b
Ans: 1
8. A rigid smooth semicircular wire of radius R is supported in vertical plane by a

smooth hinge at “O” and a smooth peg A as shown in figure. If peg starts from O
and moves with constant speed V0 along the horizontal x-axis, the angular
V0
velocity of the wire at the instant when   60 is . Where N = ___________
NR
Ans: 1
9. A rod of mass m and length l is hinged to a plank of same mass m. The plank is
kept on a smooth horizontal surface and rod makes  with the vertical. The
system is released from rest at   0 . The speed of plank when rod makes
3l g
  180 is V  where x = ____
3  x 
Ans: 2
10. Figure shows a paper role mounted on horizontal fixed axis. Paper is drawn at a
constant speed V. The thickness of paper is b and r is the instantaneous radius of
the roll (b << r such that the time taken to complete one rotation can be taken as
2r
approximately). The angular acceleration of the paper roll (approximately)
v
bV a
is given by   . Then a  c  __
2rc
Ans: 5
11. A Reuleaux triangle is a shape formed from the intersection of three circular
rings, each having its center on the boundary of the other two. Its boundary is a
curve of constant width, the simplest and best known such curve other than the
circle itself. If moment of inertia of each of the uniform identical circular rings
about their individual axes is I then what is the moment of inertia of the same
material Reuleaux triangle wire frame formed in the figure on the right about its
 
2
3 1
symmetrical axis perpendicular to its plane ? If the value is I , where x is
x
a positive integer, then find x ?
Ans: 6
12. A particle is projected horizontally with velocity V0  2ga along the smooth
inside surface of a fixed hollow sphere of inner radius ‘a’ at the level of the centre
‘O’. The subsequent motion of the particle is confined between the horizontal
planes one through the centre and the other at a depth h. Then the value of h is
x 1
a , where x =
2
Ans: 5
13. A uniform rod of length 2l and mass m is suspended from one end by
inextensible string and other end lies on smooth ground. The angle made by rod
 
with vertical is   sin 1 1/ 3 . If N1 and N 2 represents the contact force from
ground on rod just before and just after cutting string then find the ratio of
N1 / N 2
Ans: 1
PART B : MULTICHOICE MULTI CORRECT [ +4 ,-2]

14. A massless spool of inner radius r, outer R is placed against vertical wall and
tilted split floor as shown. A light inextensible thread is tightly wound around
the spool through which a mass m is hinging. There exists no friction at point A,
while the coefficient of friction between spool and point B is  . The angle
between two surfaces is  .
A) The magnitude of force on the spool at B in order to maintain equilibrium is

2 2
r  r 1
mg    1  
 R   R  tan 
2
B) The magnitude of force on the spool at B in order to maintain equilibrium is

 r 1
mg 1  
 R  tan 
cot 
C) The minimum value of  for the system to remain in equilibrium is
R / r  1
tan 
D) The minimum value of  for the system to remain equilibrium is
R / r  1
KEY : ad
15. A uniform rod with length l is attached with a weightless thread (whose length is
also l) to the ceiling at point A. The bottom end of the rod rests on a frictionless
horizontal floor at point B, which is exactly below point A. The length of AB is
H, l  H  2l . The rod begins to slide from rest. The maximum velocity of the
centre of rod during subsequent motion
 H H
A) g  Hl  B) g l   C) g  D) Cannot be
 2 2
determined
KEY b
16. A point object of mass m is slipping down on a smooth hemi-spherical body of

mass M and radius R as shown in figure. The point object is tied to a wall with
the help of a light string. At   60 , the speed of the hemisphere is v towards the
wall and its acceleration is a. Mark the correct statements
A) The velocity of the particle at   60 is v with respect to ground

v2
B) The acceleration of the particle at   60 is with respect to hemisphere
R
C) The acceleration of the particle at   60 with respect to ground is
 3  a  
2
 2 2
v  a
 
R 2  2
 
v
D) The velocity of the particle at   60 is with respect to ground
2
KEY : abc
17. A uniform rod of mass m and length L is held at rest by a force F applied at it’s
end as shown in the vertical plane. the ground is sufficiently rough. Then mark
the correct options
mg cos 
A*) Force F is
2
 cos 2  
B*) Normal reaction exerted by the ground is mg 1  
 2 
mg sin  cos 
C*) Friction force exerted by the ground is
2
D*) For maximum frictional force  should be 45
KEY : abcd
18. A rectangular rigid fixed block has a long horizontal edge. A solid homogeneous
cylinder of radius R is placed horizontally at rest with its length parallel to the
edge such that the axis of the cylinder and the edge of the block are in the same
vertical plane as shown in figure. There is sufficient friction present at the edge
so that a very small displacement causes the cylinder to roll off the edge without
slipping
A) The angle c through which the cylinder rotates before its leaves contact with
the edge is cos  4 / 7 
B) The speed of the centre of mass of the cylinder before leaving contact with the
7gR
edge, is
4
C) The ratio of the translational to rotational kinetic energies of the cylinder
when its centre of mass is in horizontal line with the edge is 6
D) The ratio of the translational to rotational kinetic energies of the cylinder
when its centre of mass is in horizontal line with the edge is 1/6
KEY : ac
19. A sphere is thrown along a rough surface as shown. Mass of the sphere is M and
radius is R. If t is total time taken to start pure rolling after thrown, then :
5v0
A*) Speed of the sphere when it start pure rolling is
7
t
B*) Work done by friction is greater in first half i.e. 0 to compare to later half
2
t
i.e., to t
2
C*) Work done by friction zero after time t
1
D) The net work done on the sphere is Mv02
4
20. A uniform rod AB of length ‘L’ mass M is suspended by two massless identical
threads. Initially the rod AB s in equilibrium in the horizontal position and the
system is in vertical plane as shown in figure. Immediately after the thread (1)
breads, (take g is acceleration due to gravity)
Mg sin 
A*) Tension in thread (2) is
1  3sin 2 
6 g sin 2 
B*) Angular acceleration of the rod about it’s centre of mass is

L 1  sin 2  
C) The end A of the rod has acceleration component in vertically upward
direction
D*) Centre of mass of the rod has horizontal acceleration component towards
leftward
21. Three identical cylinders of rough surfaces are mounted on frictionless

horizontal axles passing through their centers. They are all given angular
velocity o as shown. They are brought closer in contact and their axles are held
stationary till slipping between them ceases. The final angular velocities of the
three cylinders in order are
J 1 1  J 1 1 
i j i j J 1 1 
a  11 6 
i j
a  11 6  a  11 6 
I   dmr2
o
A*) first cylinder is (anti clock wise)
3

B*) second cylinder is o (clock wise)
3

C) third cylinder is o (anti clock wise)
2

D) second cylinder is o (clock wise)
2
22. There is a cube of mass M and side L. It is hinged at one of its edge as shown in
figure. If initially it is kept as shown in figure, and a very slight clockwise
impulse is given to it so that it first starts toppling (w = 0) about hinge, it begins
to rotate clockwise. When the face of the cube strikes the ground, it immediately
comes to rest. Then
A*) The angular velocity of the cube just before it strikes the ground is
3g
2L
 2 1 
B*) The total impulse in the vertical direction that has acted on the cube during
the collision with the ground is M

3gL  
2 1
8
C*) The impulse of torque about the hinged edge that has acted on the cube
during the collision is

2M 2 L3g  
2 1
3
D) The impulse of torque about the hinged edge that has acted on the cube
during the collision is

3 2 3
2
M L g 2 1  
D*) For maximum frictional force  should be 45

New Model-I_PAPER-II
MATHS:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
PHYSICS:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
CHEMISTRY:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 10-02-19_Sr.COIPL_Ph-III_JEE-Adv_(New Model-I_P2)_GTA-3_Q'P
IIT-JEE-NEW Model-1_P2
Time:2:00 PM to 5:00 PM IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 264
MATHEMATICS:
Sec – I(Q.N : 1 – 6) Questions with Multiple O ption Correct 4 -2 6 24
Sec – II( Q.N : 7 – 12) Passage with Multiple Option Correct 4 -2 6 24
Sec – III(Q.N : 13 – 22) Questions with Integer Answer Type 4 -1 10 40
Total 22 88
PHYSICS:
Sec – I(Q.N : 23 – 28) Questions with Multiple O ption Correct 4 -2 6 24
Sec – II(Q.N : 29 – 34) Passage with Multiple O ption Correct 4 -2 6 24
Sec – III(Q.N : 35 – 44) Questions with Integer Answer Type 4 -1 10 40
Total 22 88
CHEMISTRY:
Sec – I( Q.N : (45 – 50) Questions with Multiple Option Correct 4 -2 6 24
Sec – II(Q.N : (51 – 56) Passage with Multiple O ption Correct 4 -2 6 24
Sec – III(Q.N : (57 – 66) Questions with Integer Answer Type 4 -1 10 40

Total 22 88

MATHS: Max. Marks : 88
SECTION – I
out of which O NE OR MORE than ONE option can be correct.
1. Let A be a point on x-axis, B be a point on 2x-y+6=0 and C(2,5) such that the
perimeter of ABC is minimum then which is/are correct
A) B = (−1, 4) B) A=(1,0)
20
C) Perimeter = 2 10 D) Area of ABC equals square units
3
2. If a circle touches the parabola y 2 = 4 x at A(9,6) and is tangent to x-axis then which
is/are correct
A) The minimum possible radius of circle is 60 −18 10
B) The maximum possible radius of circle is 60 + 18 10
C) The y-intercept of common normal through A is 3 times x-intercept of common
normal through A
D) The area of triangle formed by tangent, normal at A to parabola and x-axis is 60
square units

2Z 2 − Z π
3. If Z is a complex number such that Arg 2
= then which is/are correct
Z +Z 6
A) All such Z lie on a circle

B) All such Z lie on a parabola
5
C) Maximum value of Re(Z) equals
4
6+3 3
D) Maximum value of Im(Z) equals
4
4. If L1 : x − 2 y + Z + 2 = 2 x − y + z −1 and L2 : x + y + Z − 4 = x + λ y − z − 4 are two lines
which are coplanar then which is/are correct
A) λ = 2 B) λ = −2
32
C) Acute angle between lines cos−1
77
D) L2 intersects atleast one of the coordinate axes
5. If the line y=k divides the area bounded by y=sinx and x-axis, 0 ≤ x ≤ π , into two
equal parts and if k satisfies 1 − k 2 − k cos−1 k = p then which is/are correct
1 2 2 1
A) p > B) p > C) p < S) p >
3 3 3 4

6. The volume of a right triangular prism ABC A1B1C1 is equal to 3. Then the co-ordinate
of the vertex A1, if the co-ordinates of the base vertices of the prism are A(1,0,1),
B(2,0,0), C(0,1,0) be (a,b,c) (AA1,BB1,CC1 are edges) then which is/are correct
A) Maximum value of a + b + c is 6
B) Minimum value of a + b + c is 2
C) Maximum value of a + b + c is 6
D) Minimum value of a + b + c is 0
SECTION - II
(PASSAGE WITH MULTIPLE CORRECT ANSWER TYPE)
This section contains Two or Three Paragraphs ,Total Six multiple choice Questions b ased on these p aragraphs.
Each question has 4 options (A), (B), (C) and (D) for its answer, out of which O NE OR MORE than O NE option
can be correct.
Paragraph for Questions 7 to 9
sin 2 n x + x 2 n + 1 π π
Consider f ( x) = lim 2n
then answer the following − < x <
n→∞ tan x + 2 2 2
7. f(x) is discontinuous at
π π
A) x=0 B) x = C) x=1 D) x =
4 3

8. If the number of non- differentiable points of f(x) equals m and number of
discontinuous points of f(x) equals n then which is/are incorrect ([.] is GIF)
m
A) m>4 B) m<3 C) m+n=8 D) =1
n
9. Which is/are incorrect
A) f ( x) = sin x has exactly 2 solutions
B) f ( x) = cos x has no solutions
C) f ( x) = x has exactly one solution
D) f ( x) = x has exactly four solutions

If xi ∈ W (set of whole numbers) then number of solutions of the algebraic equation
x1 + x2 + ... + xr = n is (n + (r −1))C
r −1
10. The number of ways of arranging all the 6 different coloured flags on 4 different flag
poles (a pole may or may not possess a flag) is K then
A) Exponent of 2 in K is 6
B) Exponent of 3 in K is 3
C) Exponent of 5 in K is 2
D) Exponent of 7 in K is 1
11. If the number of positive integral solutions of the equation xyz=1200 is K then K is not
divisible by
A) 7 B) 4 C) 6 D)9
12. A regular polygon of 20 sides is given. If the number of obtuse angled triangles that are
possible taking vertices at the vertices of polygon is λ then which is/are correct
A) λ is divisible by 7
B) λ is divisible by 6
C) Number of positive integral divisors of λ is 30
D) Exponent of 5 in λ is 2
SECTION – III
(INTEGER ANSWER TYPE )
1
dx
13. If the value of ∫ 2 4 2
is equal to K π then the value of [8K ] equal s
−1 x + x + 1 x + 3 x + 1
([.] in GIF)
14. If , , are different from 1 and the roots of ax3 + bx 2 + cx + d = 0(a ≠ 0) and
1 1 1
15 pd
( )( )( ) = and if equals then p
2 2 2 2 a +b +c + d
equals ([.] is GIF)

15. Let r = (a × b )sin x + (b × c ) cos y + 2 (c × a ) where a, b, c are non-zero and non-coplanar
vectors. If r is orthogonal to the vector a + b + c then the minimum value of the

4 2
2(
expression x + y 2 ) equals
π
16. Let f ( x) = sec { x} where [.] and {} denote greater integer and fractional part function
and if g ( x) = 2 x3 − 3x ( K + 1) + K (3K + 1) . The number of integral values of K if
g ( f ( x)) < 0 ∀x ∈ R is
x , x is rational
17. Let g ( x) be a function defined on [0,1] such that g ( x) = .
1 − x, x is irrational
Given that f ( f ( x)) = lx + m ∀x ∈ [0,1] then the value of l 2 + l + 2lm equals
18. Let f : R → R be a function such that f (1) = 1 and f ( x + 5) ≥ f ( x ) + 5 and
f ( x + 1) ≤ f ( x ) + 1 ∀x ∈ R then the value of f (log 5 50) − f (log 5 10) equals
19. In a ABC , side AB is parallel to y-axis, side BC is parallel to x-axis. If centroid is at
(2,1) and if the equation of median through C is x-y=1 then the value of slope of the
median through vertex A equals

20. The maximum value of the functions f ( x) = tan −1

( 12 − 2 x 2) equals K then the
x4 + 2x2 + 3
1
value of equals ([.] is GIF)
2K
−1 −1 −1
21. The number of real solutions of the equations 2sin x
+ 2cos x
+ 2tan x
=3 is
equal to
x x
n tan r +1
+ tan 3 r +1
2 2
22. Let f ( x ) = lim Sn where S n =
n→∞
∑ x then the value of
r =0
1 − tan 2
2r +1
x3
lim equals
x →0 f ( x ) − sin x

SECTION – I
23. Work function of a metal X equals the ionization energy of Li 2+ ion in second excited
state. Work function of another metal Y equals the ionization energy of He + ion with
electron in n = 4 . Now photons of energy E fall separately on both the metals such that
maximum kinetic energy of photoelectron emitted from metal X is half that of
photoelectron emitted from metal Y. Choose the correct statement (E0 = Potential
energy of electron in ground state of hydrogen atom)
A) E = 3.5 E0
7 E0
B) E =
8
C) If E is increased, difference in maximum kinetic energies of photo electrons emitted
from X and Y increases
D) If E is increased, difference in maximum kinetic energies of photo electrons emitted
from X and Y remains constant

x
24. A medium whose refractive index varies with x as µ = µ 0 1 + . where a is a positive
a
constant, fills the first quadrant as shown. If the ray enters the medium parallel to the
x-axis, from air medium as shown then
y
Air medium
o x
A) The trajectory of the ray inside the medium is a straight line

B) The time taken for the ray to travel a distance a in the variable refractive index
3µ0 a
medium is , where c is the speed of light in air
2c
a
C) apparent distance of a point in that medium at a distance a from the y–axis is ln 2
µ0
(when observed from air medium very close to normal)
2a
D) apparent distance of a point in that medium at a distance a from the y–axis is
3µ0
(when observed from air medium very close to normal)
25. In a vernier calipers with no zero error, 7th division of main scale coincides with 10th
division of vernier scale when nothing is kept between the calipers (Take 1 MSD =
1mm)When a rod of length , is kept between the calipers, it is found that 4th division
of the vernier coincides with 13th division of main scale.
A) = 9.2mm B) = 10.2mm
C) Least count = 0.3mm D) vernier constant = 0.3mm

26. A negative point charge –q of mass m revolves around positive point charge +Q which
has very large mass compared to m so that it remains almost stationary. The only force
acting on negative charge is the electrostatic force due to positive charge and the
system form a bounded system of negative energy with the charge +Q at one focus of
the ellipse and negative charge tracing an ellipse at an instant shown in figure. Then
which of the following statement is/are true:
A) Linear momentum of negative point charge is conserved

B) Angular momentum of negative point charge about fixed positive charge is
conserved
C) Total kinetic energy of negative point charge is not conserved
D) Total energy (kinetic + potential) of system of both point charges is conserved
27. Two metallic spheres A and B are made of same material and have got identical
surface finish. Mass of sphere A is four times that of B. Both the spheres are heated to
the same temperature and placed in a room having lower temperature but thermally
insulated from each other. Then
A) The ratio of heat loss of A to that of B is 2 4/3
2/3
B) The ratio of heat loss of A to that of B is 2
2/3
C) The ratio of initial rate of cooling of A to that of B is 2
4/3
D) The ratio of initial rate of cooling of A to that of B is 2
28. A particle of mass m and charge q moving with a velocity V in region I enters region II
normal to the boundary as shown in figure. Region II has a uniform magnetic field of
strength B perpendicular to the plane of paper and length of region II is . Choose the
correct choice
Region II
Region III
Region I x x x x
x x x x
x x x x
v x x x x
x x x x
B q
A) Particle enters region III only if its velocity v
m
B q
B) Particle enters region III only if its velocity v
m
B q
C) Path length of particle in region II is maximum when v
m
D) Time spent in region II is same for any velocity as long as particle returns to region
I

SECTION - II
can be correct.
In the circuit shown, both the switches S1 and S2 are open initially. At t = 0 both S1
and S2 are closed. The power dissipated in the resistor R in the steady state is 0.2 W
and initial current through r is 10 mA
S1 S2
C
R E = 100 V
r
29. The value of R and r respectively are

A) 10 , 20 B) 20 k , 10 k C) 10 k , 50 k D) 50 k , 10 k
30. When the capacitor gets fully charged, switch S2 is opened. It is observed after 5 sec,
the current in the resistor R is 0.74 mA, the value of C is e0.37 0.994
A) 100 µ F B) 50 µ F C) 25 µ F D) 2.5 µ F
31. At this moment, the switch S1 is opened and S2 is closed simultaneously. The
instantaneous charge on the capacitor after ‘t’ second will be
A) 10 6.3 e t mC B) 15 2.3 e t mC
C) 20 6.3 e t
mC D) 10 5.66 e t
mC
In the circuit shown in figure switch S is closed at time t = 0
3Ω
6Ω
1H
S
18V
32. Current i from the battery at time t is given by
A) 3 (1 e 2t
) B) 3 + e-2t (
C) 3 1- e
-t/9
) D) 3 e-2t
33. Potential difference across 3 Ω resistance at time t is given by
A) 9 e 2t
B) 6e 2t
C) 3e 2t
D) 18 (1-e t/9 )
34. At what time current through 3 Ω resistance and 1 H inductor are equal ?
5 8 5 8
A) ln B) ln C) ln D) ln
3 3 3 3

SECTION – III
35. A system of trolley and child of total mass 200 kg is moving with a uniform speed of
36 km/h on a frictionless track. The child of mass 40 kg starts running on the trolley
1
from one end to the other (10 m away) with a speed of 10ms relative to the trolley in
the direction of the trolley’s motion and jumps out of the trolley with the same relative
velocity. What is the final speed of the trolley ?
36. For the arrangement shown in the figure, mass of block A is 50 kg and mass of block
B is 70 kg. Coefficient of static friction between all plane surfaces is µ s = 0.3 . The
largest value of mass of block C is 9x (in kg) so that blocks A and B remain at rest.
(Neglect friction in the pulleys), then x =
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
A
B
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
C
37. Water is filled in a uniform container of area of cross-section A. A hole of cross
sectional area a (<<A) is made in the container at the height of 20m above the base.
Water stream coming out of hole hits a small block on surface at some distance from
container. The block is moved on the surface in such a way that the stream always hits
a 1
on the block. The initial velocity of the block (in m/s) is (Given = take
A 20
g = 10 ms 2 )
A
---------------
--------------
---------------
--------------
---------- ----
------------- 20m
---------------
- - - - - - - - - - - ----
- - - - - - - - - - - - - --
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
38. A piece of ice (specific heat = 0.5cal / gm / 0 C and latent heat = 80cal / gm ) of mass m
gram is at 50 C at atmospheric pressure. It is given 420 J of heat so that the ice starts
melting. Finally when the ice-water mixture is in equilibrium, it is found that 1 gm of
ice has melted. Assuming, there is no other heat exchange in the process, he value of
m is ( J = 4.2 J / cal )

39. In a race between two cars, sound signals emitted by the two cars are detected by the
detector on the straight track at the end point of the race. Frequencies received by the
detector from the two cars are 330 Hz and 360 Hz respectively, and the original
frequency emitted is 300 Hz from both the cars. The race ends with the separation of
100m between the cars. Assume that both cars move with constant velocities and the
velocity of sound is 330m/s. Find the time taken (in sec) by the wining car
1
40. The pressure and volume of a monoatomic ideal gas are related as P for a
V2
process A C as shown in the figure. The pressure and volume at A is 3P0 and
V0 respectively and the pressure at C is P0 . The molar heat capacity of the
R
ideal gas for the process A C is . Find x. (R gas constant)
x
A
3P0
1
P
V2
P0 C
T
V0

41. A satellite of mass m and radius r is projected with a velocity V0 tangential to the
surface of the earth (radius R and mass M) at the North Pole. Given r << R . If the
satellite goes to infinity, for RV02 = x GM . Find x.
42. A uniform rod of mass m and length L is hinged at one of its end with the ceiling
and other end of the rod is attached with a thread which is attached with horizontal
ceiling at point P. If one end of the rod is slightly displaced horizontally and
perpendicular to the rod and released. The time period of small oscillation
2 sin θ
is 2π . Find x.
xg

43. A radioactive sample decays through two different decay processes and . Half life
time for decay is 3 hr. and half life time for decay is 6 hr. The ratio of number of
initial radioactive nuclei to the number of radioactive nuclei present after 6 hr is….
44. When a wave pulse is propagating through a medium, displacement of a particle ‘x’ at
5x 2 5x 2 40x 80
time t = 0 and t = 2 sec are given by Ae and Ae . Speed of pulse is
given by 2p m/sec. value of p is ……..

CHEMISTRY Max. Marks: 88
SECTION – I
45. Compound(X), C4 H 8O decolorises Baeyer's reagent. It undergoes hydrolysis on
reaction with dil. H 2SO4 and produces (Y) and (Z) . Both (Y) and (Z) give iodoform
test positive . Only (Y) gives Tollen's test positive.
Choose the correct statement(s)-
A) [Y] aq.NaOH(10%)
Δ
CH 3 - CH = CH - CHO
B) [Z] PCC
[Y]
Br2 /CCl 4
C) [X] CH 2 - CH - O - CH 2CH 3
Br Br
D) [X] 1)O3
2)Zn, H2 O
[Y] + Other product
46. P+Q R+S

For the above reaction, if only the concentration of P is increased to nine times, rate of
the reaction becomes thrice its original value. If only the concentration of Q is doubled,
the rate becomes four times the original value. Select the true statement(s) from the
following

(A) Half–life is independent of the initial concentration of reactants
(B) Units of rate constant are L3/ 2 mol e 3/ 2s 1

(C) Overall it is fractional order reaction
(D) Rate of reaction is independent of concentrations of P and Q
47. Which of the following regarding silicates and their formulae is/are correct
A) ortho silicates – SiO44 B) Sheet silicates – Si2O52
C) Amphiboles – 6
Si4 O11 D) Pyrosilicates – Si2O74
O
1.LiAlH 4 HCHO
(U) dry HCl (Z)
O 2.H 2O
CrO 3 / H
(T)
(V) Δ
(W)
48.
A) U is optically inactive
B) V gives effervescence with aq. NaHCO 3
C) Molecular formula of Z is C6 H12O 2
D) W give iodoform test

49. From the given plot of kinetic energy vs frequency (Hz)
19.86
13.24
6.62
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
( is to be multiplied by 1015 and K.E to be multiplied by 10 19

)
Identify the correct statement.
°
A) Wavelength corresponding to threshold frequency is 3000A
B) Work function is 3.313 × 10 19 J
C) Threshold frequency is 2 × 1015 Hz
19
D) Work function is 6.613 × 10 kJ
50. The correct statement(s) among the following is/are :

A) The second ionization potential order is O > F > N > C
B) The electron affinity order is O > S > Se > Te
C) The electro negativity order is B > Al < Ga < In < Tl
D) Acidic nature of oxides is MnO2 < Mn 2 O7

SECTION - II
can be correct.
Three isomers of molecular formula ( C6 H12O 3 ) is shown. On complete acidic

hydrolysis, P,Q,R and S formed as organic products-
H3C O CH3
H 3O
O O P
CH3
O CH3
H3C
H3O
Q+R+P
O O
O
H 3O
O O R+S
CH3
H3C
51. Which pair can be distinguished by Iodoform test
A) P, R B) R, S C) P, S D) Q, S
52. Positive tollen's test is shown by-
A) P B) Q C) R D) S
Coagulation is the process by which the dispersed phase of a colloid is made to
aggregate and thereby separate from the continuous phase. The minimum
concentration of an electrolyte in milli-moles per litre of the electrolyte solution which
is required to cause the coagulation of colloidal sol is called coagulation value.
Therefore higher is the coagulating power of effective ion, smaller will be the
coagulation value of the electrolyte.
1
Coagulation value
coagulatingpower
The coagulation values of different electrolytes are different. This behaviour can be
easily understood by Hardy-Schulze rule which states.
“The greater is the valency of the effective ion greater is its precipitating power.”
53. Capacity to precipitate As2 S3 Sol is highest for,
A) K 2 SO4 B) Na3PO4 C) AlCl3 D) CaCl2
54. The ability of an ion to bring coagulation of a given colloid depends upon:
A) Only the sign of its charge B) only magnitude of its charge
C) Both magnitude and sign D) molecular mass

The Ellingham diagram for a number of metallic sulphides is shown below.
55. Identify the no of questions which are correctly answered?

Q: Formation of which of the sulphides is most spontaneous?
A: PbS
Q: Which sulphide occurs to minimum extent in nature?
A: CS2
A) 0 B) 1 C) 2 D) 3
56. Which of the following sulphides cannot be reduced to metal by H2 at about 1000°C ?
A) HgS B) PbS C) Bi2 S3 D) All of these

SECTION – III
57. Find the total number of product(s) in the following reaction-
CH3
HBr
CCl 4
58. 6.0 g of 4 He having average velocity 4 × 10 2 ms 1 is mixed with 12.0g of Ne20 having
same average velocity. If the average kinetic energy per mole of the mixture is x kJ,
then find the value of 10x.
59. In how many of the following reactions Boron is formed?
(i) NH 4 Cl + Na 2 B4 O 7
Re d hot
?
140° C
(ii) BCl3 + NH 4 Cl
NaBH 4
C6 H 4Cl
? ?
(iii) KBF4 + K
(iv) B2O3 + Cr2 ( SO4 )3
CH3 NH 2
(v) B2 H 6
( CH 3 )3 N
(vi) B2 H 6
NO 2
NH 4SH Br2 / H 2 O NaNO 2 CuBr Sn Br2 major end

(excess) HCl HBr HCl H 2O
product
60. NO 2
Find the total number of Halogen atoms present in the major end product?
61. A solution of potassium dichromate is orange in colour. When alkali is added, the
colour changes to yellow. What is the change in oxidation number of chromium in the
reaction which takes place?
62. Identify the no of correct statements?
(I) only type of intermolecular forces operating among noble gases are weak dispersion
forces
(II) Ionisation enthalpy of molecular oxygen is very close to that of xenon
(III) Hydrolysis of XeF6 is a redox reaction
(IV) Xenon fluorides are not reactive
63. How many of the following have locant-2 for bromine atom-[Locant = Figure to
indicate the position of a Bromine atom] as per IUPAC nomenclature
CHO CHO Br Br
Br Br CHO CHO
CHO
Br CHO
Br

64. pH of 0.1 M solution of NaH 2 PO4 is close to?
K a1 ( H3 PO4 ) = 4.1 x 10–3
K a 2 ( H 3 PO4 ) = 4.2 x 10–8
K a 3 ( H 3 PO4 ) = 1.0 x 10–12
65. How many of the following statements are correct.
a) Sodium amalgam is better reducing agent than hydrogen
b) Sodium carbonate can be decomposed to its oxide on heating
c) On adding excess of NaOH to salt solution of ZnCl2 soluble product is formed.
d) Copper sulphate on treatment with aq. Na 2CO3 gives basic copper carbonate.
e) In case of alkali metals, for performing flame test, chlorides are preferred over
carbonates.
66. Volume strength of H 2 O 2 is 22.4. What volume of it in mL is required to oxidise 0.34
g H 2S gas?

Sec: Sr. COIPL Jee-Advanced Date: 10-02-19
Time: 02:00 PM to 05:00 PM New Model-1_P2 Max Marks: 264
KEY & SOLUTIONS
MATHS
1 AD 2 AB C D 3 AC D 4 ACD 5 AC D
6 AB C 7 BC 8 AB 9 D 10 AB D
11 AB 12 BC 13 2 14 7 15 5
16 1 17 2 18 1 19 4 20 6
21 0 22 2
PHYSICS
23 BD 24 AB C 25 BD 26 C 27 AC
28 AC D 29 D 30 A 31 D 32 D
33 B 34 A 35 8 36 9 37 1
38 8 39 4 40 2 41 2 42 3
43 8 44 1
CHEMISTRY
45 AB C 46 BC 47 AB C 48 BCD 49 A
50 AC D 51 AB D 52 AB C 53 C 54 C
55 C 56 B 57 4 58 8 59 1
60 5 61 0 62 2 63 4 64 5
65 4 66 5
Narayana Sri Chaitanya IIT Academy 10-02-19_Sr. COIPL_Ph-III_JEE-ADV_New Model-1_P2_GTA-3_Key&Sol’s
SOLUTIONS
MATHEMATICS
1. C ' = (2, −5)
C '' = (−2, 7)
C(-2,7)
B
C(2,5)
0
6=
-y+
2x
C(2,-5)
Perimeter AB+BC+CA
=AB+BC’’+AC’
≥ C 'C "
≥ 16 + 144 = 4 10
C ' C '' equation : 3x+y-1=0
Solving with C ' C ''
1
→ A= ,0 : B=(-1,4)
3
1 3 3/ 5 1 5 20
Area = = 15 − = sq. units
21 5 2 3 3
3
2. Minimum 6 − r =r
10
⇒ r = 60 − 18 10
3
Maximum 6 + r =r
10
⇒ r = 60 + 18 10

Tgt: x − 3 y + 9 = 0
Normal 3x + y − 33 = 0
x y
⇒ + =1
11 33
62 1 10
Area = + 3 = 18× = 60 sq. units
2 3 3
1
Z (2 Z −1) π Z−
3. Arg = ⇒ arg 2 =π
Z ( Z + 1) 6 Z +1 6
1 3 3
Contre = − ,
4 4
3
rad =
2
1 3 5
∴ Re ( Z ) max = − + =
4 2 4
3 3 3 6+3 3
ln(Z) max = + =
4 2 4
1 3 3
− ,
4 4
60º
(−1,0) 1 1
− ,0
4 ,0
2
4. Solving 3 planes (1,2,1), substituting in 4th plane λ = 2

1 −2 1 1 1 1
2 −1 1 1 2 −1 8 32
θ = cos−1 = cos−1
11 14 77
a = (−1,1,3) b = (−3, 2,1)
Also y = 0, z = 0 ⇒ x = 4 ∴ (4, 0, 0) lies on L2 (needs x-axis)

y = sin x
(α,sin α)
y=x
0 α π − απ
5.
π−α
∫ α
(sin x − K )dx = 1
π−α
⇒ (− cos x − kx )α =1
⇒ −{− cos α − cos α + K (π − α ) − k α} = 1
⇒ 2 cos α − k π + 2k α = 1
π
⇒ 2 cos α − 2k − α = 1 ⇒ 2 1 − k 2 − 2k .cos−1 k = 1
2
1 1
⇒ 1 − k 2 − k cos−1 k = ⇒ P =
2 2
1
6. 3 = × 2 × 3×h ⇒ h = 6
2
A1 A. AB = 0, A1 A.BC = 0, A1 A.CA = 0
∴ AA1 = 6
∴ A1 = (0, −2,0)(or )(2, 2, 2)
∴ (a, b, c ) = (0, −2,0) (or) (a, b, c ) = (2, 2, 2)
7,8 & 9.
π
x=−
1 4
,
3 −π π
< x<
1 4 4
,
2 π
x=
f ( x) = 1 , 4 (f(x) is even function)
3 π
< x <1
0, 4
0, x =1
1, π
1< x <
2

−1
3
−1 −π π 1 π
−π 2
4 4
2
10. R.W = K = 4×5× 6× 7×8×9 = 26.33.51.71
11. 1200 = 24.31.52

K = (4 + 3 −1)C (1 + 3 −1)C .(2 + 3 −1)C = 15×3× 6 = 270
3−1 3−1 3−1
12. λ = 20×9C2 = 720 = 24.32.51
1 x 4 + 3 x 2 + 1 − ( x 2 + x + 1) 1 x 4 3x 2 + 1 − ( x 2 + x + 1)
13. GE= ∫ dx = ∫
−1
( x 4 + 3x 2 + 1) − ( x 4 + 2 x3 + 3x 2 + 2 x + 1) −1 = (2 x 3 + 2 x )
1 x 1 1 1 π
=∫ 3
dx = 2r ∫ 2 dx = ⇒ GE = 2
−1 2 x + 2 x 2 0 x +1 4
1 1 1
14. αβγ αβγ
1− α 1− β 1− γ = .(α − β )(β − γ )(γ − α )
(1 − α )(1 − β )(1 − γ ) (1 − α )( − β )(1 − γ )
1
α (1 − α ) β (1− β ) γ (1− γ )
−d / a 15
= ×
a+b+c+d 2
a
⇒ GE = 7
15. r.a + r.b + r.c = 0 ⇒ sin x + cos y + 2 = 0 ⇒ sin x = −1, cos y = −1
π
⇒± ,y=π
2
4 π2
∴ (G.E )min = 2 + π2 = 5
π 4
1
16. Clearly f ( x) = 0 ⇒ g (0) < 0 ⇒ k (3k + 1) < 0 ⇒ − < k < 0
3

f ( x) = 1 ⇒ g (1) < 0 ⇒ 2 − 3(k + 1) + 3k 2 + k < 0
1
⇒ (3k + 1)(k −1) < 0 ⇒ − < k < 1
3
∴ ∴ No. of in tegers =1
17. f ( f ( x)) = x ∀x ∈ [ 0,1] ⇒ l = 1, m=0
GE=2
18. f ( x + 5) ≥ f ( x ) + 5 & f ( x + 5) ≤ f ( x ) + 5
⇒ f ( x + 5) = f ( x ) + 5 ⇒ f ( x ) = x ⇒ GE = 1
19. Conceptual
π 1
20. Maximum value = 15° = ⇒ K = ⇒ G. E = 6
12 12
21. A.M ⇒ G.M ⇒ LHS > 3 ≠ RHS
Number of solutions =0
x x
n
sin
r
− r +1
2 2 x
22. Sn = ∑ = tan x − tan n+1
r =0 x x 2
cos r +1 cos r
2 2
∴ f ( ) = tan x ∴ G.L = 2
PHYSICS
RhcZ 2
23. WX = ( Z = 3)
32
RhcZ 2
WY = ( Z = 2)
16
Ex = Wx + K1
1
E y = WY + K 2 & K1 = K2
2
C0 dx 3µ a
24. = Integrate t = 0
x dt 2C
µ0 1 +
a
25. Least count is not always 1M.S.D-1 V.S.D
26 Since net force on negative charge is always directed towards positive charge so all the
variable (like energy, eccentricity etc) must be depending on the angular momentum.
The negative charge revolve around positive charge and hence it must emit radiation
which makes all variable non-conserved.
27. conceptual

mV
28. Radius of circular path performed by charged particle is R
Bq
2 m
Time period T =
Bq
For particle to enter in region III
R
mV Bq
V
Bq M
mV
Path length of particle is region II is maximum when R
Bq
Bq
So V for maximum path length in region II.
M
T M
If the particle has to return to region I, time spent by particle in region II is i.e.,
2 Bq
29. In steady state, the equivalent electric circuit is as shown
R R r
E E
2
E2 100
R= 50 k
P 0.2
E 100
r= 10 k
I 10 10 3
30. When capacitor gets fully charged and S2 is suddenly opened. Then it is a case of
discharging in C – R circuit
Where q = q 0e−t / τ
dq q
and i = − = o e−t/ τ
dt τ
Here q 0 = CE = (100C)
τ = C (R 1 + R 2 )
On solving we get C = 100µF
31. Initially charge on capacitor q 0 0.37 CE
C 100 F
r 10 k E 100V
q q dq
E ir r
C C dt
dq dt q dq 1 t
dt
q r q0 q r 0
E E
C C
Solving this we get

−t
q = CE − (CE − q 0 )e Cr
Substituting the values we get

q = (10 − 5.66e−t ) mC
32, 33& 34.
Applying loop law in abcdefgha :
18 = 6i + 3 ( i - i1 ) ..... ( i )
In loop cdefc :
di1
3 ( i - i1 ) = (1) ... ( ii )
dt
From Eq. (i)
6 + i1
i= .... ( iii )
3
3Ω
d e
6Ω
b g
i C i1 1H f
a h
18 V
Substituting in Eq. (iii), we have
6 + i1 di
3 - i1 = 1
3 dt
di1
( 6- 2i1 ) =
dt
i1 t
di1
= dt
0
6 - 2i1 0
Solving this equation, we get i1 = 3 (1- e-2t )
Substituting this value in Eq. (iii), we get i = 2 + (1- e-2t )
Potential difference across 3 resistance at time t is also equal to potential difference
di1
across inductor. Hence V3 = VL = L = 6e -2 t
dt
Further current across 3 and current across inductor are equal at i - i1 = i1 or i = 2i1
Or 2 + 1- e-2t = 6 - 6e-2t
5 5
5e-2 t = 32t = ln or t = ln
3 3
35. Applying momentum conservation
200 × 10 = 40 ( v + 10 ) + 100v
v = 8m / s
36. Let f1 and f 2 be the friction force between A and B and between B and horizontal
surface respectively. Limiting values if these frictional forces will be

A T1
f1
C
f1
T B 2T1
f2
f L1 = 0.3 × 50 × 10 = 150 N
f L2 = 0.3 × 120 × 10 = 360 N
The FBD of the three blocks are shown in figure
Let m is the mass of block C. For A and B to remain at rest, block C should also
remain at rest
For block C : T = mg
For block A : T1 = f1
For block B : T = f1 + f 2 + 2T1
For largest value of mass of C , the friction f 2 must be towards left
T = 3 f1 + f 2 = mg
f1 f L1 and f 2 f L 2
Hence mg 3 f L1 + f L 2 or m 81
maximum value of m = 81kg
37. Velocity of efflux v = 2 gy
2h
Range x = 2 gy ×
g
A
---------------
- - - - - - - - - - - -y- - a
--------------- v
--------------
h ---------- ----
-------------
---------------
- - - - - - - - - - - ----
- - - - - - - - - - - - - --
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
x
dx
The velocity of block must be
dt
dx 2h 1 dy
vb = = × 2g ×
dt g 2 y dt
h dy
= ---------------(i)
y dt
Using equation of continuity
dy
A = a 2 gy --------------(ii)
dt

From equation (i) and (ii)
h a
vb = × 2 gy
y A
a 1
= 2 gh × = 20 × = 1ms 1
A 20
20
38. m × 0.5 × 5 + 1× 80 = 100 m = =8
25
39. Let the velocity of cars 1 and 2 be v1m / s and v2 m / s respectively
a parent frequencies of sound emitted by car 1 and 2 as detected at end point are
v v
f1 = f 0 , f2 = f0
v v1 v v2
300 330
330 = 300 and 360 = 300
300 v1 330 v2
Solving above equation we get
v1 = 30 m / s and v2 = 55m / s
The distance between both the cars just when the 2nd car reaches end point B
100m = v2t v1t or t = 4sec
40. The process is described by
k
P= Where k is a constant
V2
Let volume at C be V 3PV 0 0 = PV
2
0
2
V = 3V0
3V0 3V0 3V0
W=
V0
PdV =
V0
k
V2
=k
1
V V0
1
V
1
3V0
= 3 ( )
3 PV
0 0
f 3
Change in internal energy U = nR T = nR t
2 2
T = TC TA =
3PV
nR
0 0 3PV
0 0
nR
= ( PV
3 3 0 0
nR
)
U=
3
2
(
3 )
3 PV
0 0
First law of thermodynamics, Q = U + W

Q
3
2
(3 )0 0 + 3
3 PV ( )
0 0 =
3 PV
1
2
(3 )
3 PV
0 0
(3 3 ) = (3 3 PV)
1
( )
0 0
and Q = nC T nC T = 3 3 PV
0 0 n.c c= R/2
2 nR 2
41. When the centre of the satellite is at a distance y from the centre of the earth,
By conservation of energy

1 2 GMm 1 2 GMm
mv = mv1
2 R+r 2 y
Since r << R ,
1 2 GMm 1 2 GMm
mv = mv1
2 R 2 y
Also by conservation of angular momentum at the for that distance
vR
mvR = mvy v1 =
y
1 2 GMm 1 2 GMm 1 mv 2 R 2 GMm
mv = mv1 =
2 R 2 y 2 y2 y
1 2 R2 1 1
mv 1 2
= GMm
2 y R y
1 2
mv
(y R )( y + R )
= GMm
y R
v 2 ( y + R ) R = 2GMy
2
2 y Ry
v 2 R2
v 2 R 2 = y 2GM v2 R y=
2GM v 2 R
If Rv 2 = 2GM y =
Satellite will escape to infinity.
42. Consider a small angular displacement
Torque about the rotational axis
l
T= mg sin ( )
2
T
( l sin )
2
l 2 sin 2
1= m =m
3 3
l ml 2 sin 2
mg sin ( ) =
2 3
3g
=
2l sin
2l sin
T =2
3g
t 1t 2 6 3
43. t 2 hr
t1 t 2 9
6 hr. is equal to three half lines
N0 N0 N0
N 8
23 8 N
5x 2 40x 80
44. y Ae
2
5 x 4
Ae
2
y= Ae b kx t
k = 1, 2 V 2 m / sec
k

CHEMISTRY
H 3O
(X) = CH 2 = CH O CH 2 CH 3 CH 3CHO + CH 3CH 2 OH
45. (y) (z)
46. (B, C) If only the concentration of P is increased to nine times, than the rate of the
reaction becomes thrice its original value. This means the order with respect to is 1/2. If
only the concentration of Q is doubled, the rate becomes four times the original value.
This means the order with respect to Q is 2. So, overall order is 5/2.
Units of rate constant
= (conc)1–ns–1
5
(moles L )
1
= 1 2 s 1
3 3
= L2 mol
2
S 1
Only for the 1st order reactions, half–life is independent of the initial concentration of
reactants.
47. Pyrosilicate: Si2O76
48.
OH
O
HCHO O O
1.LiAlH 4
OH dry HCl
O 2.H 2O
(U)
(T) (Z)
CrO3 / H
O
O
Δ COOH
COOH
(W)
(V)
49. From the graph it is clear that,

Threshold frequency is o = 1× 1015 Hz
c 3 × 108 °
o = = = 3000A
o 1× 1015

And work function ( W ) = h o
= 6.62 × 10 34
× 1× 1015 = 6.62 × 10 19
J
50. (b) Ea, order S > Se > Te > O

Due to very small size and higher electronic density oxygen has lesser EA, value than
other elements in its group.
Acidic nature magnitude of O.S.
(51-52)SOLUTON :
H3C O CH3
H 3O
O O 3CH 3CHO
(P)
CH3
O CH3
H3C
H3O
HCHO + CH 3CHO + CH 3CH 2CHO
O O
(R) (P) (Q)
O O
H3O
O O 2HCHO +
(R)
CH3 (S)
H3C
53. Negative soles are precipitated by high positive charge on metals.

54. Coagulation depends on both magnitude and sign.
55. G is more negative for PbS formation
G is positive for formation of CS2 at room temperature
56. Because PbS is below H2S formation in the diagram
HBr
57. Br Br Br Br
8RT RT
58. Average velocity = = 4 × 102 m / s = 2 × 104 .
M M
RT = 2 M x 104.
Total KE of He = 3 nRT = 3 × W × RT = 3 × 6 × RT = 9RT

2 2 M 2 4 4

9
= × 2 M × 10 4 x 10–3
4
= 180 Joule.
12 3 9 9
Total KE of Ne20 = × RT = RT = × 2 M × 104 × 10 3
= 360 Joule
20 2 10 10
Average KE per mole = (

360 + 180 )
= 807.84J = 0.8KJ =x.
1.5 + 0.6
x = 0.8 kJ ; 10 x = 0.8 x 10 = 8.
59. (i) BN
(ii) B3 N 3H3Cl3 , B3 N3H 6
(iii) B + KF
(iv) Cr ( BO2 )3
+
(v) BH 2 ( CH3 NH 2 ) 2 [ BH 4 ]
(vi) 2BH 3. ( CH3 )3 N
60.
NO 2 NH2 NH2 N2
Br Br Br Br
NH 4SH Br2 / H 2 O
NaNO 2
(excess) HCl
NO 2 NO 2 NO 2 NO 2
CuBr HBr
Br Br Br
Br Br Br Br Br Br
Br2 Sn
H 2O HCl
Br Br
NH2 NH2 NO 2
61. CrO72 OH CrO42 t

orange yellow
2
Oxidation number of Cr in Cr2O7 = +6
2
Oxidation number of Cr in CrO4 = +6
62. I and II
63.

CHO CHO Br Br
1 Br 1 Br 2 CHO 2
2 CHO
6 2 1 1
3 5
4
CHO
1
Br 6
2 1 CHO
3 2
5 Br
4
64. H2PO4 HPO42 + H+
pH = 1 (pK1 + pK 2 )
2
(
pK1 = log 4.1× 10 3
)=3 log 4.1 = 2.39
(
pK 2 = log 4.2 × 10 8
)=8 log 4.2 = 7.38
1
pH = ( 2.39 + 7.38 ) = 9.77 = 4.89
2
1
65. a. Na-Hg+H 2 O NaOH+Hg+ H 2
2
c. 4NaOH+ ZnCl2 Na 2 ZnO2 +2NaCl+2H 2O
d. CuSO4 +H2 O+Na 2 CO3 CuCO3 .Cu (OH ) 2 + Na2 SO4 + CO2
e. In case of alkali metals for performing flame test, chlorides are preferred over
carbonates as they are more volatile
22.4
66. Molarity of H2 O2 solution = =2
11.2
H 2 S + H 2O2 2H 2O + S
i.e., number of moles of H2 O2 required = number of moles of H 2 S

0.34
2 × V ( in mL ) ×10 3
=
34
V ( in mL ) = 5

Time: 09.00 AM to 12.00 Noon IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max
Marks: 183
PHYSICS:
Sec – I (Q.N : 1 – 7) +4 -2 7 28
Sec – II (Q.N : 8 – 12) Questions with Integer Answer Type +3 0 5 15
Sec – III (Q.N : 13 – 18) Questions with Single Correct Choice +3 -1 6 18
Total 18 61
CHEMISTRY:
Sec – I (Q.N : 19 – 25) +4 -2 7 28
Total 18 61
MATHEMATICS:
Sec – I (Q.N : 37 – 43) +4 -2 7 28
Total 18 61
SECTION – I
This section contains 7 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 options (A), (B), (C) and (D)
for its answer, out of which ONE OR MORE than ONE option can be correct.
Marking scheme: +4 for all correct options, 0 if not attempted and -2 in all wrong cases.
1. choose the correct statement(s) regarding work.

a) work done is frame dependent
b)work is a scalar quantity
c) work is frame independent
d) work is defined at all times and every where in space
2. Identify the correct statement(s) related to conservative force.

a) it is always a force, which is constant in magnitude and direction
b)it is always a function of distance
c) it can be a function of time.
d) it may be a constant force (both in magnitude and direction)
3. A small bead starts sliding down a rigid helical wire frame. The axis of the helix is
vertical, radius R and pitch is h. The motion of the bead is a combination of
horizontal motion and vertical motion. In one complete rotation , it travels 2πR
horizontal distance and h vertical distance . The total distance travelled can be
given by a right angled traiangle as shown in figure. The height of the triangle is h.
Consider
Case-a: friction less helical wire frame
Case-b: bead slides down the helical wire frame with a constant speed v such that
the turns in the helix are tilted by angle θ with horizontal
Then identify the correct statements from the following:

2 H (4 R 2 + h2 )
2
a)if the total height descended by the bead is H, it takes a time
gh2
in case-a
2 H (4 R 2 + h2 )
2
b)if the total height descended by the bead is H, it takes a time
gh2
in case-b
c) in case-b coefficient of kinetic friction between the wire and the bead is
Rg tan
g 2 R 2 + v 4 cos 2
d)in case-a, if the total height descended by the bead is H , the speed after
2 ghH
descended by H is
(h 2 + 4 2
R2 )
4. A boy lifts a stack of several identical books
pressing hard with his hands. Coefficient of static
friction between hand and a book is µ1= 0.40,
between the books is µ2= 0.25 and mass of the
book is 400g. Now the boy starts decreasing the
pressure (force per unit area) gradually. When the horizontal component of the
force applied by the boy becomes F=120N, the books are about to fall. (g = 10 ms-
2
) Then
a) the number of books in the stack are 17
b) the number of books in the stack are 15
c)magnitude of frictional force between the third and the fourth book is
(counted 1 as the left most) 22N
d) magnitude of frictional force between the second and the third book is
(counted 1 as the left most) 26N
5. A horizontal conveyer belt is running with a constant

speed vb=3.0m/s . A small disc enters the belt
moving horizontally with a velocity v0= 4.0 m/s and
that is perpendicular to the relative velocity of the
belt. Coefficient of friction between the disc and belt
is 0.50. Then identify the correct statements from the
following
a) The path of the disc is parabola relative to the ground

b) The path of the disc is a straight line relative to the belt
c) The minimum width of the belt is 2.0m so that the disc always remains on the belt
d) The minimum speed of the disc relative to the ground is 2.4m/s.
6. Two motorboats that can move with velocities 4.0m/s and 6.0 m/s relative to water
are going up-stream in a river. When the faster boat over takes the slower boat , a
buoy is dropped from the slower boat(let this be t=0 sec). After lapse of a time
interval , both the boats turn back simultaneously and move at the same speeds
relative to the water as before. Their engines are switched off when they reach the
buoy again. If the maximum separation between the boats is 200m after the buoy
is dropped and water flow velocity in the river is 1.5m/s, then(buoy is a floating
object like a wooden block)
a) at t= 100 sec both the boats are separated by 200m with both of them being
upsreaming
b) at t= 100 sec the displacement of buoy is 150m(down stream) from the postion
where it is dropped.
c) the faster boat cross the buoy again at t= 200 sec while it is down streaming.
d) the distance between the places where the faster boat passes by the buoy is
300m
7. Choose the correct options(s):

a) if only conservative forces act on a particle, the Kinetic energy remains
constant.
b) if the net force acting on an object is zero, the object must be in the state of
rest.
c)If net mechanical work done on a body is non Zero, the body must have change
in KE
d)if net mechanical work done on a body is non zero, the body must experience
acceleration.
SECTION-II
This section contains 5 questions. The answer is a single digit integer ranging from 0 to 9 (both
inclusive).
8). To whirl a stone tied to a cord, one has to move
the free end of the chord on a circular path pulling
the stone on a larger circular path. In this way a
stone of mass ‘m’ is whirled on a horizontal
circular path of radius R with the help of a light
inextensible cord of length l by moving the free
end on a circular path of radius r with a uniform
speed v as shown in the figure. At sufficient great
speed , tensile force in cord becomes so large
that the effect of gravity can be neglected but at
this speed air resistance becomes considerable. The force of air resistance is expressed as
NR 4 2
R2
[ given l = r ) F = m −
2
.Find N
r 2 ( R2 + ( − 1)r 2 )
2
2 r4
9). In the set up shown a block is

placed on a friction less floor,
the cords and pulleys are ideal
and each spring has stiffness
constant k. The block is pulled
away from the wall. While the pulling force is increasing gradually from zero to a
10F
value F , block will shift by a distance . Find N(springs are ideal)
NK
10). A light block P on a horizontal table top placed
equidistant from the pulleys support a load with the
help of a cord as shown in the figure. If the
minimum and maximum force applied by hand to
keep the system in equilibrium are respectively
Fmm = 25 N and Fmax = 100 N . Calculate the
(
mass ' m ' of the load in kg g = 10 ms
−2
)
11). A small block of mass m slide on a friction less table. It is constrained to move in side a
ring of radius ‘r’ which is fixed to the table. At t = 0 , the block is moving along the
inside of the ring with tangential speed v0 . If ' ' is the co efficient of friction between
r 2 v0t
the block and ring, the distance travelled by the block in ‘t’ sec is log e 1 + .
Nr
Find N
12). Under the action of force, 2 kg body moves such that its position ‘x’ as a function of
t3
time ‘t’ is given by x = . (x is in meter, t in second) . Calculate the work done by the
3
force in the first 1 second . ( express in joule)
SECTION – III
This section contains 6 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 options (A), (B), (C) and (D)
for its answer, out of which ONLY ONE option can be correct.
Answer Q13,14,15
Three Column Matrix -1 :
Case – A: Block ‘B’ sandwiched between bars A and C
that are connected by light m extensible thread which
passes round an ideal pulley. Mass of each block is ‘m’
and co-efficient of friction between the bars is ' ' and
the floor is frictionless. A horizontal force F is applied on pulley
Case –B : On a horizontal friction less floor a block A
of mass ‘m’ rests on another block B of mass 2 m..
with a thin paper sheet of negligible mass inserted
between them. The paper sheet is wide enough to
prevent direct contact between the blocks. Co-efficient
of friction between each block and paper sheet is . A
horizontal force ‘F’ is applied on the paper sheet as shown in figure.
Case – C : Mass of block A is equal to ‘m’ mass of block B is equal

to ‘2m’ co-efficient of friction between A & B is and that
between A and floor is zero (smooth). A horizontal fore ‘F’ is
applied to A.
For all the three cases consider the following data

F = magnitude of horizontal force
a A = magnitude of acceleration of block A aB = magnitude of acceleration of block B
aC = magnitude of acceleration of block C

i) caseA 3 mg i) a A = aB = aC
i) F
2
ii) case B ii) 6 mg F 10 mg
ii)
a A = aB
iii) case C iii) 3 mg F 6 mg iii)
aA aB
iv)
aA aB
v)
aA aB
13). Identify the option which is correctly matched
a) i, ii, i b) iii, ii,ii c) ii, i, v d) i,i,i
14). Identify the option which is correctly matched
a) ii, i, ii b) iii, ii, ii c) ii, i,iii d) i,i,iv
15). Identify the option which is not correctly matched
a) i, iii, i b) iii, ii, iii c) iii, iii, iii d) iii, ii, ii
Answer Q16,17,18
Three column matrix -2
Case –A Infinite Atwood’s machine:
All the blocks are identical , pulleys are light strings are mass less and inextensible.
Mass of each block is ‘ m ’.
Case-B : Line of pulleys

N + 2 equal masses hang from a system of pulleys as shown in figure.(N is very large
can be considered tending to infinity)(mass of each block is m)
Case –C : Ring of pulleys

Consider the system of pulleys shown in figure. The
string which is a loop with no ends, hangs over N fixed
pulleys which hang on the string.( N is sufficiently
large, mass of each block is m)
For all the three cases consider

a A = magnitude of acceleration of A
aB = magnitude of acceleration of B
TA = magnitude of tension in string connected to block A.
All pulleys are ideal,massless . all the strings are inextensible,massless.

−2
i) Case-A i) a A in ms i) g/2 ms −2
−2
ii) Case-B ii) aB in ms ii) 3 mg / 2
iii) Case-C iii) TA in N iii) Zero
iv) a A = aB
iv)Regarding acceleration v) a A aB
16) Identify the option which is correctly matched

a) i,iii, iii b) i, iv, iv c) i, i, i d) i,ii,iii
17) Identify the option which is correctly matched
a) ii,iv,iii b) ii, iv, v c) ii, i, i d) ii, iii, iii
18). Identify the option which is not correctly matched
a) ii, iv, iv b) ii, i, i c) iii, i, iii, d) iii, iv, v
Narayana IIT Academy
INDIA
Sec: Jr_IIT_IZ_N120 Jee-Advanced Date:
13-08-18
Time: 09:00 AM to 12:00 Noon 2017_P1 MODEL
Max.Marks:183
KEY SHEET
PHYSICS
1 AB 2 D 3 AC 4 ACD 5 ABCD
6 ABCD 7 CD 8 4 9 9 10 5
11 2 12 1 13 D 14 A 15 D
16 C 17 C 18 D
SOLUTIONS
PHYSICS
1) ans: a,b
hint: work is defined over an interval of time and work is defined for a region of space.
2) ans: d
hint: a time dependent force cannot be a conservative force.
3) Take this case as if the bead is sliding down the inclined plane of length
H h
(h 2 + 4 2 R 2 ) g sin = g
h with an acceleration (h 2 + 4 2 R 2 )
H
2 (h 2 + 4 2
R2 )
h 2 H (h 2 + 4 2
R2 )
Time taken is = so a is correct and b is wrong
h gh 2
g
(h 2 + 4 2
R2 )
Also in case-b while sliding down with constant speed v, there are two normal reactions
One due to component of weight and the other due to centrifugal force and both are
mutually perpendicular to each other and perpendicular to the spiral frame at that
contact point
By equating N eff = mg sin
Use law of conservation of energy 2gH is the answer for option d. so d is incorrect
4) Consider that N-2 blocks are held between the left most and right books in contact with
the hand
Let F be the normal force of hands on the book.
2F
The force of limting friction between hand and book is and where as that
5
F
between two books is .
4
Consider the FBD of N-2 Books as one single block
F
( N − 2) mg =
2
N= 17,
2F
On the left most block the force limiting of friction is = 48 N upwards, 4N weight of
5
block downwards
So friction on the 1st book and 2nd book is 30 N (limiting) so the force of friction between
the hand and first book is static in nature.
Following we will get the friction between 2nd and 3rd block is 26N upwards
And that between 3rd and 4th block is 22N upwards
5) Hint friction oppose relative motion.

With respect to the conveyor belt immediately after droping the block the direction of
relative motion is −3$i + 4$jm / s , friction is exactly opposite to this direction and so with
respect to belt it goes straight line and that with respect to ground it is a parabola.
v 2 rel
srel = = 2.5m
2 g
Width required is srel cos 37 = 2m
o
r
Instantaneous velocity of the object wrt ground is vinst = 3ti$ + (1 − t )$j
By taking min condition we will get 0.64 sec
6) solution: during up stream starting from t=0
6t − vr t = 200 + 4t − vr t
This gives t = 100sec.
Again for down streaming
6(t − 100) = (450 + 150)
This gives t = 200 sec
Mean while the buoy travels 200 x 1.5=300 m
7) ans:CD
apply work energy theorem.
8) Hint:
Angular velocity of rotation of stone and angular velocity of rotation of hand are same
Component o f tension in the string along the radius R supplies the necessary centripetal
force to the stone and component of tension in the string perpendicular to the Radius R
supplies the necessary force to over come air friction
9)
Here
T3 = T4 = To (say)
F = 3To
T T 3T 2T
e3 = o , e4 = o , e1 = o , e2 = o
k k k k
Following from constrained motion we will
get
3 xc = 2e1 + 2e2 + e3 + e4
We will get
10To
3 xc =
3k
10To
xc =
9k
Displacement of the block is xc
10) Let θ be the angle made by both the strings with the horizontal on the either sides of
block
Then
(Mg − Fmin ) cos = ( Fmin + Mg )sin − − − −(1)
( Fmax − Mg ) cos = ( Fmax + Mg )sin − − − −(2)
By taking ratio we will have
Mg = Fmax .Fmin
mv 2
11) Ft =
r
− dv
= ds
v r
We will get
r vo
s= log e
v
dv mv 2
−m =
dt r
vor
v=
r + v ot
r r + v ot
s = log e
r
12) Use work energy theorem
13,14 & 15 QUESTIONS Hint : study the maximum force F that can be applied so that A
moves on B or
B moves on C accordingly decide the accelerations in the options
16-18) Hint: Infinite AT woods machine:
Assume the entire pulley system is replaced by one single Block of mass M.
Applying infinite logic, this system is similar to a simple Atwoods machine with m block
left side and M mass right side
For the other cases
If string is the same ai = 0 − − −
2018-PAPER -I
MATHS:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
PHYSICS:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
CHEMISTRY:
TOTAL SYLLABUS
Time: 3:00Hour’s IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 180
PHYSICS:
+Ve - Ve
Marks Marks
Sec – I(Q.N : 1 – 6) (partial marking scheme) (+1,0) +4 -2 6 24
Sec – II(Q.N : 7 – 14) (e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
+3 0 8 24
Sec – III(Q.N : 15-18) (2 Comprehensions – 2 +2 = 4Q) +3 -1 4 12
Total 18 60
CHEMISTRY:
+Ve - Ve
Marks Marks
Sec – I(Q.N : 19 – 24) (partial marking scheme) (+1,0) +4 -2 6 24
Sec – II(Q.N : 25 –32) (e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
+3 0 8 24
Sec – III(Q.N : 33-36) (2 Comprehensions – 2 +2 = 4Q) +3 -1 4 12
Total 18 60
MATHEMATICS:
+Ve - Ve
Marks Marks
Sec – I(Q.N:37 – 42) (partial marking scheme) (+1,0) +4 -2 6 24
Sec – II(Q.N :43–50) (e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
+3 0 8 24
Sec –III(Q.N : 51-54) (2 Comprehensions – 2 +2 = 4Q) +3 -1 4 12
Total 18 60

SECTION – I
out of which ONE OR MORE than ONE option can be correct.
Marking scheme: +4 for all correct options & +1 partial marks, 0 if not attempted and -2 in all wrong cases.
1. The resistance of wire PQ is 410 , which is tapped with the external wire as shown in
the figure. The value of R is not known. When a battery of 400V is connected across
AB, the net current through the source battery is 6 ampere. Then which of the
following is/are correct.
A) The resistance of unknown resistor R is 200

200
B) The equivalent resistance across AB is
3
2
C) The current in 25 resistor is ampere
5
D) The potential drop across 120 resistor is 60 volts

2. A small charged particle 'q' lies at the centre of two concentric conducting hollow
spheres of inner radii R and 5R and outer radii 3R and 7R respectively. Then which of
the following is/are CORRECT. (K = 1/4 0)
Kq 2
A) The energy stored in the space between 3R to 5R (cavity) is
15R
Kq 2
B) The energy stored in the space between 3R to 5R (cavity) is
30R
C) The amount of work has to be performed to slowly transfer the charge 'q' from
29 Kq 2
centre through the orifice to infinity is
210 R
D) The amount of work has to be performed to slowly transfer the charge 'q' from
38 Kq 2
centre through the orifice to infinity is
105 R

3. Two surfaces OABC and OCDE lies in the plane of xy and yz as shown in the figure.
A charged particle 'q' lies in the space at a point P, if
A) Coordinates of 'P' is ( a r, a r, r ) and a >> r , then flux passing through

7q
surface OABC is
24 0
B) Coordinates of 'P' is ( a r, a r, r ) and a >> r , then flux passing through
q
surface OCDE is
24 0
C) Coordinates of 'P' is ( a + r, a + r, r ) and a >> r , then flux passing through
q
surface OABC is
24 0
D) Coordinates of 'P' is ( a + r, a + r, r ) and a >> r , then flux passing through
q
surface OCDE is
24 0
4. Bodies of mass m = 0.5 kg, resting on a horizontal frictionless table, are connected
with an unstretched spring of length L = 20 cm, and of spring constant k=16N/m. The
mass of the spring is negligible. At a certain moment the bodies are given an initial
speed of v 0 = 0.36 m / s , towards the wall on the right. The collision with the wall is
perfectly elastic.
A) The greatest compression of the spring during the motion is 9 cm

B) The right body hits the wall again, when the spring is unstretched
C) The change in the linear momentum of the system after all possible collisions will
be 0.72 kgm/s
D) Finally both the bodies will have same velocity
5. One end of a thread of length = 1m is attached to an inclined plane of angle of
elevation of = 30° . A point-like body of mass m = 1 kg is attached to the other end of
the thread as shown in the figure. The body is released without initial speed, such that

the thread is tight and horizontal. The coefficient of friction between the slope and the
body is µ = 0.2 .
A) The tension in the thread when the angle between the thread and the horizontal is
is T = ( 3sin sin 2µ cos ) mg
B) The tension in the string will be maximum when = 90°
2µ
C) The tension in the string will be maximum when = cos 1
3 tan
D) The maximum speed of the particle will be when = cos 1

( µ cot )
P2
6. During an experiment, an ideal gas is found to obey a condition = constant
(P is pressure and is the density of gas). The gas is initially at temperature T0,
pressure P0 and density d. The gas expands such that density changes to d/2. Then,

A) Pressure of gas changes to 2P0
B) Temperature of gas changes to 2T0

C) The curve of above process on P-T graph is a parabola
D) The curve of above process on P-T graph is a hyperbola
SECTION-II
This section contains 8 questions. Each question is numerical value. For e ach question, enter the correct
numerical value (in decimal notation, truncated / rounded-off to second decimal place.
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30).
Marking scheme: +3 for correct answer , 0 if not attempted and 0 in all other cases.
7. There is a parabolic shaped bridge across the river of width 10 meter. The highest
point of the bridge is 4 meter above the level of bank. A car of mass 72 kg is crossing
the bridge at a constant speed of 5 m/s. Find the force (in Newton) exerted on the
bridge by car when it is at the highest point 'P' of the bridge. (take g = 10 m / s 2 )

8. A wire of infinite length carrying current 'I' lies along the z-axis. A square loop of side
' ' is placed such that the plane of the loop makes an angle 74° with the positive x-
axis at ( , 0, 0 ) and side AB touches the x-axis and parallel to z-axis as shown in the
kµ 0
figure. The magnetic flux passing through the loop is . Find the value of k.
[take I = 10 amp, ln1.6 = 0.47 and tan 37° = 3 / 4 ]
9. A ball is projected with speed 20 2 m/s at an angle of 45° with horizontal. It collides
first with the right wall A (e = 1/2) and then with the left wall B, and finally returns to

the projection point. Then find the coefficient of restitution between ball and wall B.
(g = 10m/s2)
10. Two charged particles (m, q) and (2m, -2q) are placed in a gravity free space where a
uniform electric field E exists as shown in figure. After the particles are released they
stay at a constant distance from each other. What is the square of distance between
q
them in meter-square? (Neglected the gravitational interaction, take = 200
4 0 E
metre-square)

11. The main scale of vernier callipers reads in millimetre and its one division is equal to
one millimetre. Its vernier is divided into 6 divisions, which coincide with 15 divisions
of main scale. Furthermore when a cylinder is tightly placed along its length between
two jaws, it is observed that the zero vernier scale lies just right of 25th division of
main scale and fifth division of vernier scale coincide with the main scale. Then find
the measured value in millimetre.
12. One end of copper rod of uniform cross section and length 13.5 m is kept in contact
with ice and other end with water at 100°C . At what distance 'x' (in meter) from 100°C
water along its length should a temperature of 400°C be maintained so that in steady
state, the mass of ice melting be equal to that of the steam produced in same time
interval of time ? Assume that whole system is insulated from surrounding. Latent heat
of fusion of ice and vaporization of water are 80 cal/gm and 540 cal/gm, respectively.
13. A rod of length ' ' can rotate freely in a horizontal plane about vertical axis OO '
passing through one of its ends with angular velocity . The mass per unit length
linearly increases from to 2 from the axis of rotation to other end as shown in the
figure. Find the tension (in Newton) in the rod at the middle point. (take = 2 rad/sec,
= 4 kg/m, ' ' =3 meter and neglect the gravity)
14. Find the moment of inertia of a cuboid of mass 0.5kg and sides 3m, 4m and 6m about
its shortest possible face diagonal (in SI units).
SECTION – III
(COMPREHENSIN TYPE)
This section contains 2 Para graphs. Based on e ach para graph, there are 2 questions. Each question has 4
options (A), (B), (C) and (D) for its answer, out of which ONLY ONE option can be correct.
A tall tower is built from alike tubes, which have thin walls, and from rectangular
sheets, which have negligible mass with respect to that of the tubes, as shown in the
figure. Rectangular sheets are numbered from bottom as S1 , S2 , S3 ...... (Static friction is
big enough, such that the tubes do not slip.) The radius of each tube is 1 cm.

15. The minimum distance by which S2 should be pulled towards right so that the tower
collapses is:
A) 2 cm B) 3 cm C) 4 cm D) 5 cm
16. The minimum distance by which S6 should be pulled towards right so that the tower
collapses is:
A) 2 cm B) 3 cm C) 4 cm D) 5 cm
In a cylindrical container of sufficiently large height, two movable pistons enclose
certain amount of same ideal gas in two chambers as shown in the figure. The upper
piston is at a height 20 cm from bottom and lower piston is at a height 8 cm from the
bottom. The mass of each piston is m kg and cross-sectional area of each piston is A
mg
m 2 , where = P0 and P0 is the atmospheric pressure = 1×105 N / m 2 . The cylindrical
A
container and piston are made of conducting material. Initially the temperature of gas
is 27°C and whole system is in equilibrium. Now if the upper piston is slowly lifted by
16 cm and held in that position with the help of some external force. Then
17. The lower piston will rise by

A) 2 cm B) 4 cm C) 8 cm D) 6 cm
18. The ratio of volume of gas in upper chamber to that of in lower chamber in final state.
A) 2:1 B) 1:2 C) 4:1 D) 1:4
CHEMISTRY Max. Marks: 60
SECTION – I
19. Phosphorous forms a number of compounds with the halogens. One phosphorous
halide is PCl5 which of the following statements is/are true concerning PCl5 ?
A) The formal charge on phosphorous is zero and the molecular geometry is trigonal
bipyramidal.
B) The s-character of the hybrid orbitals overlapped with p-orbital of chlorine in
equatorial plane is more those in axial direction.
C) The axial P – Cl bonds are weaker than the equatorial P – Cl bonds.
D) There are six 900 interactions between bond pair electrons.
20. C – O bond in CO 2 is shorter than the C – O bond in the species given below:
A) Cr ( CO )6 B)Dimethyl ether
C) Ethyl alcohol D) Acetate ion

21. The equilibrium constant of heterogeneous chemical equilibrium at a given
temperature
A) Depends on the total pressure of the equilibrium
B) Does not depend on the concentration of the products and reactants at equilibrium.
C) Does not depend on the molar free energy of pure solid or pure liquid at given
pressure and temperature
D) Decreases during the progress of the reaction as entropy of universe increases
22. During a negative –decay
A) An atomic electron is ejected.
B) Potential energy of the nuclide increases if proton–proton repulsion pair are
stronger than neutron neutron repulsion pair
C) A neutron in the nucleus decays emitting an electron.
D) A part of the binding energy of the nucleus is converted into an electron.
23. The compound(s) formed as intermediate(s) in the following reaction sequence is/are
C H3 OH
1.Li,N H 3 ,T H F
2. O 3 , Z n
3.N a B H 4 , E t O H
C H3
4.Tosylc h loride,py ridi n e
C H3 5.LiAl H 4 , E t 2 O C H3

O Me O Me
O
O Ts
A) C H3 B) C H3
O Me O Me
CHO O
CHO
CHO
C) C H3 D) C H3
24. The diastereomeric pair(s) among the following option(s) is/are

Br Br
Ph Et Ph H C H3 C H3
A) H 3 C H H3C Et B) Bu Bu
OH OH
OH OH
HO
OH OH
C) Br Br D) OH

SECTION-II
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30).
25. In the quantitative oxidation of hypo with potassium permanganate in faintly alkaline
or neutral medium, the equivalent weight of hypo is______
26. A complex compound having general formula CrCl3 .6H 2O when treated with silver
nitrate produced two moles of AgCl precipitate. What will be the percent loss of
weight of this compound on treating with concentrated sulphuric acid?
( At. Weight of Cr = 52,Cl = 5.5,O = 16,H = 1)
27. The following represents a part of graphite oxide (GO) sheet. It was assumed that only
one functional group, namely (–O–) is formed in the carbon plane as a result of the
graphite oxidation. Let all the sheets in a GO lattice look like it was predicted.
Calculate Х in the net formula СОХ of graphite oxide, if 25% of carbon atoms in GO
keep the sp 2 hybridization. Adjust answer to three significant figures

28. What is the E 0 (in mV) of the reaction when 1 M solution of bismuth trichloride in
1 M HCl is added to the 1 M solution of tin(II) chloride? Use the following data and
report answer in ‘mV’. Assume that the complex formation of the metal ion or its
counter ions can’t affect the reduction potentials given below.

29. An element crystallizes in a structure having fcc unit cell of an edge 200 pm. Calculate
the density in g/cc, if 200 g of this element contains 5 × 1024 atoms.
30. 5.3 g of benzaldehyde was reacted with an excess of acetophenone to produce 5.2 g of
the enone product as per the reaction shown below. The yield of the reaction is
__________ %. (Round off to the nearest integer).
O
O O
Na O Et
+ Ph Ph
Ph H Ph CH3
M W = 1 06 M W = 120 M W = 2 08
M W = mole cu l a r w e igh t
31. Assume that the reaction of MeMgBr with ethylacetate proceeds with 100%
conversion to give tert-butanol. The volume of 0.2 M solution of MeMgBr required to
convert 10 mL of a 0.025 M solution of ethylacetate to tert-butanol is _________ mL.
(Round off to one decimal place)
32. (R)-2-methyl-1-butanol has a specific rotation of +13.5°. The specific rotation of
2-methyl-1-butanol containing 40% of the (S)-enantiomer is __________ °. (Round
off to one decimal place)

SECTION – III
(COMPREHENSIN TYPE)
The noble gases have closed-shell electronic configuration and are mono atomic gases
under normal conditions Xenon react directly with fluorine and gives compounds from
oxidation states II to VIII which includes fluorides, oxides and oxyfluorides.
33. The FALSE statement among the following is:
A) Volatility of fluorides of Xenon increases in the order XeF2 < XeF4 < XeF6
B) The rate of hydrolysis of Xenon fluorides will be in the order XeF2 < XeF4 < XeF6
C) All the Xenon fluorides can act as fluoride ion donor and fluoride ion acceptor
D) All the Xenon fluorides can act as oxidizing agents.
34. The wrong statement among the following is:
A) When XeF4 is hydrolyzes completely in water, it gives explosive compound
B) When XeF6 is hydrolyzed in a strongly alkaline solution gives perxenate ion
C) In perxenate ion, Xenon is present in its maximum oxidation states in the
compounds known so far.
D) XeO 4 obtained by treating barium perxenate with anhydrous sulphuric is more
stable than XeO 3
H3C C H3
1. B 2 H 6 1.LiAl H 4
HOOC C O O C H3 + 'A' + 'B '
2. H 2. H C H O , H
35. The structure of ‘A’ is
H3C CH3 H3C CH3
A) O O B) O O
H3C C H3 H3C C H3
C) O D) O
36. Which of the following option is correct regarding ‘B’ is/are….

A) Chiral compound B)Soluble in cold.conc. H 2SO 4
C) Soluble in hot aq. NaOH D) Cannot show geometrical isomerism

MATHS Max. Marks: 60
SECTION – I
37. Let f be a differentiable function satisfying
f ( x + y ) = f ( x ) + f ( y ) + ( e x 1)( e y 1) , x , y R and if f 1 ( 0 ) = 2 then which of
following statement(s) is /are true

A) Number of solutions of f(x) =0 is 1
1
B) Lt ( f ( x ) + cos x ) ex 1 = e2
x 0
1
C) If f ( )= 2 then tan 1
+ tan 1
=
2
f ( x)
D) Lt =2
x 0 x
38. P is a set consisting of those points which lie on the portion of a curve given by
3 z 6 3i
arg = . Q is a set consisting of those points which lie on the curve given
2 z 8 6i 4
by z 3 + i = 3 , then which of following statement(s) is /are true
4 2
A) 4 + + i (1 ) is the complex number associated to both the sets
5 5
B) Complex number z in the set Q for which z (2 + i ) z (4 + 3i ) takes
maximum value is – i
C) Complex number z in the set Q for which z (2 + i ) z (4 + 3i ) takes
5 5
minimum values are 2 + i and 3 + i
2 2
D) There is no complex number associated with both the sets
39. Which of the following statements are FALSE?
A) If A and B are square matrices of the same order such that ABAB = 0, it follows
that BABA = 0.
B) Let A and B be different n × n matrices with real numbers. If A3 = B3 and
A2 B = B2 A , then A 2 + B2 is invertible.
1
( )
1
1
C) If A is a square, non-singular and symmetric matrix, then A is skew
symmetric.
D) The matrix of the product of two invertible square matrices of the same order is
also invertible.
x 3
3 x + 3; x [ 2,0 )
40. Consider f ( x ) = x +1 ; x [0,5] ; then,
1 e x; x >5
which of following statement(s) is /are true

A) f ( x ) has local maxima at two points
B) f ( x ) has local minima at only one point
C) Global minima of f ( x ) does not exist
D) Global maximum value of f ( x ) is 6
1
41. Let a , b , c , d are unit vectors such that a b . c d 1 and a . c then which of
2
following statement(s) is /are true
A) a , b , c are coplanar B) b , c , d are coplanar
3
C) b , d are non-parallel D) If b , c cos
2

42. Let C1 = x + y = r , C2 = x + y = r ( r1 < r2 ) be two circles. Let A be the fixed point
2 2
1
2 2 2
2
2
( r1,0 ) on C1 and B be a variable point on C2 . Let the line BA meet the circle C2
again at E. Then, which of following statement(s) is /are true
A) The maximum value of BE is 2r2
B) The minimum value of BE is 2 r22 r12
C) If O is origin, then, the best possible lower bound for OA2 + OB 2 + BE 2 is,
5r22 3r12
D) If O is origin, then, the best possible upper bound for OA2 + OB 2 + BE 2 is, r12 + 5r22
SECTION-II
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30).
( )
n
43. If R = 7 + 48 , n N then ( R + 2)( 3 R ) + R [ R ] = ___________
(Where [ ] denotes step function)

44. A fair coin is tossed n times let an denotes the number of cases in which no two heads
occurs consecutively then the value of a5 a2 a1 is
45. Let a,b,c be distinct positive integers such that ab + bc + ca 107 then the minimum
1 3
value of
6
( a + b 3 + c 3 3abc ) is
46. Let f ( x ) = cos 1

( cos x ) and g ( x ) = sin 1 [ x + 1] + cos 1 [ x ] ([x] = The greatest integer
function), then the number of solutions of the equation f ( x ) + g ( x ) = 3 , is
x2 y 2
47. A straight line PQ touches the ellipse + = 1 and the circle x2 + y 2 = r 2 ( 3 < r < 4 ).
16 9
RS is a focal chord of the ellipse which is parallel to PQ and meets the circle at points
R and S. Then the length of RS is
3 5 7 9
48. Let Sn = + + + + ........... to ' n ' terms. Then the value of digit in the 10th
4 36 144 400
1
place of is
1 s40

49. The projection length of a variable vector xi + yj + zk on the vector P = i + 2 j + 3k is
6. Let k be the minimum projection length of the vector x 2 i + y 2 j + z 2 k on the vector
P then the value of 3

k 2 + 152 is
2 y2 y2 k
50. If f 2 x ,2 x 2 xy and f 60,48 f 80,48 f 13,5 k then
8 8 56
SECTION – III
(COMPREHENSIN TYPE)
x 2 + 10 x + 8, x 2
Let continuous function f ( x ) = px 2 + qx + r , 2 < x < 0, where p 0. If a line ‘L’
x + 2 x,
2
x 0
touches the graph of y = f ( x ) at 3 points, then

51. The value of p + q + r is equal to
A) 5 2 B) 5 C) 6 D) 7
52. Range of f ( x ) in [ 2,0] is
A) [ 8, 0] B) [ 9,1] C) [ 10,3] D) none of these

1
Let f ( x ) = 0 e t x dt, 0 x 1 then
53. Minimum value of f ( x ) equals
A) e 1 B) 2 ( e 1) C) 2 e 1 D) e 2
54. Maximum value of f ( x ) equals
A) e-1 B) e 1 C) 2 ( e 1) D) 2 e 1

Time: 09:00 AM to 12:00 NOON 2018-P1 Max.Marks:180
KEY SHEET
PHYSICS
1 AB C D 2 AD 3 A BC D 4 A BC D 5 AC D
6 BD 7 14 4.0 0 8 2.35 9 0.2 5 10 3 0 0.0 0
11 25.5 0 12 1.35 13 9 6.0 0 14 6.4 8 15 D
16 D 17 B 18 A
C H E MIST RY
19 A BC D 20 BCD 21 AB 22 BC 23 AB D
24 A BD 25 3 1.0 0 26 6.7 5 27 0.3 8 28 16 7
29 20 30 50 31 2.5 32 2.7 33 C
34 D 35 B 36 D
M A T HS
37 A BC D 38 AB 39 A BC 40 AC D 41 AB C D
42 A BC D 43 7 44 8 45 9 46 0
47 6 48 8 49 9 50 2 51 D
52 A 53 B 54 A
SOLUTIONS
PHYSICS
1. ABCD
Equivalent resistance between P and Q = 100
400
So current towards P = = 4 ampere
100
Current through R = 6 4 = 2 ampere
400
So, R = = 200
2
2. AD
3R 7R
1 1 kq 2 kq 2
Work performed = 0 E dV +
2
0 E 2dV = +
R
2 5R
2 3R 35R
3. ABCD
q
Usinge symmetry if charged particle lies at P1 then OCDE = and
24 0
q q
8 0 7q
OABC = 0
=
3 24 0
If the charge particle lies at P2 then

q q
OCDE = and OABC =
24 0 24 0
Sec:Sr. C O IPL Page 2

st
4. Immediately after 1 collision :
Since the situation is symmetric, both will come to rest simultaneously.
x 0 : maximum compression
1 1
2 × mv 02 = kx 20
2 2
2m
x 0 = v0
K
Just before 2nd collision :

Finally :
P = 4 mv0 ( )
5. ACD
mv2
T mg sin sin = (i)
dv
mg sin cos µ mg cos = m (ii)
dt
work energy theorem
1
( mg sin ) sin ( µmg cos ) = mv 2 (iii)
2
From (i) and (iii)
T mg sin sin = mg sin sin 2 ( µ mg cos )
T = mg ( 3sin sin 2 µ cos )
dT
= 0 = 3sin cos 2µ cos
d
6. PM = RT, Polytropic process

7. 144

equation of parabola
y = kx 2
y = h = ka 2
h
k=
a2
h
y= x2
a2
2 3/2
dy
1+
dx
R=
d2y
dx 2
1
R ( x = 0) =
2k
mv2
mg N =
R
8. 2.35
Flux passing through the loop ABCD
( 8/5 )
µ0 I µI 8
= dr = 0 n
2 r 2 5
µ0 0.47 × 10 µ
= = 2.35 0
2
9. 0.25
2u sin
T= = 4sec
g
When the ball collide with the wall B, time elapsed
10 15
= + = 2 sec
20 10
So remaining time = 2 sec
5
Velocity of the ball after the collision with ball = = 2.5 m / s
2
2.5
e= = 0.25
10
10. The two particles have equal acceleration
11. Least count is 0.5mm
12. 1.35
400 0
Q ice = KA t
13.5 x
Q ice KA ( 400 0 ) t
So ice melt, m ice = = (i)
LF 80 (13.5 x )
( 400 100 )
Q water = KA t
x
Q water KA ( 400 100 )
m steam = = t (ii)
LV 540 x
mice = msteam
400 300
=
80 (13.5 x ) 540 x
6 (13.5 x ) = 54 x
6 × 13.5 = ( 54x 6x )
6 × 13.5
x= = 1.35 m
60
T /2
x
13. dT = 1+ dx x 2
0
2 2
T =2 l /3

14.
15&16.
The pipes just below and just above the sheet which is moving will move the other
pipes and the other pipes will remain in the original place. If the sheet is moved by
distance greater then 5 cm the centre of gravity of the system would fall outside the
base and the system will collapse.
17&18.
Let P2 is the initial pressure in upper chamber
mg
P2 = P0 + = 2P0
A
V2 = A × 12 × 10 2 m 3
Let P2' and V2' are final pressure and volume of upper chamber and lower piston moved
by cm.
V2' = A ( 28 )10 2 m3
P2 V2 = P2' V2'
24P0
P2' =
28
Let P1 is initial pressure in lower chamber
2mg
P1 = P0 + = 3P0
A
V1 = A × 8 ×10 2 m 3
Let lower piston moved by ' ' cm and P1' and V1' are final pressure and volume of lower
chamber
mg 24P0 52
P1' = P2' + = + P0 = P0
A 28 28
V1' = A ( 8 + )10 2 m 3
P1V1 = P1' V1'
52
3P0 A × 8 × 10 2 = P0 A (8 + )10 2
28
Solving this = 4 cm
52 4
P1' = P0 = 2P0 = 2 × 105 N / m 2
28 4
24P0
P2' = = P0
28
V2' 28 24
= = =2
V'1
8+ 12

CHEMISTRY
19. Geometry of PF5 is trigonal bipyramidal with sp3 d hybridization, in which there are
two sets of hybrid orbitals sp 2 in equatorial plane and p z d z 2 in axial direction. Axial
bonds are longer and weaker than equatorial P – F bonds.
20. Conceptual
21. Equilibrium constant is dependent on pressure and temperature for heterogeneous
equilibrium.
22. Nuclear potential energy increases due to formation of additional proton –proton
repulsion pair.
O Me O Me O Me OH
O Me
O O O
OH O Ts
CHO C H3
CH3 C H3 C H3 C H3
23. C H3
24. Cis and trans isomers are diastereomers.

25. The quantitative reaction
− 2− 2− −
8 MnO4 + 3S 2O3 + H 2O → 8MnO2 + 6 SO4 + 2OH
M.W. of hypo = 248. (Hypo is Na 2S2O 3.5H 2O )
No. of electrons involved in the oxidation of hypo is 8 per one mole of hypo.
248
So E.W. = =31.
8
26. Molecular weight of CrCl3 . 6H 2O =266.5. Since it produces 2 moles AgCl precipitate
100 ×18
is Cr ( H 2O )5 Cl Cl 2 . H 2O . Then the percent loss is = 6.75 . Range is 6.74–
266.5
6.76
27. 25% of carbon atoms retain the sp 2 hybridization, which means that they are not
bonded to oxygen atoms. 75% of carbon atoms form chemical bonds with oxygen.
Each oxygen atom is bonded to the pair of carbon atoms. The net formula is СО0.375 .
28. 2 BiCl3 + 3SnCl2 + 6 HCl 2 Bi + 3 H 2 SnCl6
E 0 = 0.317 0.15 = 167mV

M
4X
NA
29. d = = 20 g / cc
(200 X 10 10 ) 3
30. Mole concept

31. Mole concept
32. Enantiomeric excess concept.
33. XeF2 can act only as fluoride ion donor but cannot act as acceptor.
34. XeO 4 is less stable than XeO 3 .
35 & 36.
H 3C C H3 H3C C H3 H3C C H3
O O OH OH
MATHS
f ( x + y) = f ( x ) + e e
1 1 x
( y
1)
37. f 1 ( x) ex = k f 1 ( x ) = k + ex
f ( x + y) = f ( y) + e
1 1 y
(e x
1)
But f ( 0 ) = 0, f 1 ( 0 ) = 2
f ( x ) = ex + x 1
f 1 ( x ) = e x + 1 > 0 f is increasing
f( )=
f( )=
No of solutions of f ( x ) = 0 is 1
1
f ( x + cos x 1)
Also Lt ( f ( x ) + cos x ) ex (1 ) = e
Lt
1 x o
x 0 ex 1
Lt e x + + cos x 2
=e x o
x
= e2
e 1
f ( 0) > 0
Also
f ( 1) < 0
( 1,0) G .E = tan 1
+ ( + cot 1
)= 2
ex + x 1
Also Lt =2
x 0 x

38. Equation of C 2 .
( x 3) 2 + ( y + 1) 2 = 9 x 2 + y 2 6 x + 2 y + 1 = 0 For
(3 2) 2 + (2 1) 2
C1 sin 45° = r = 2 2 = 2.
r
Centre (4,1)
Equation of curve C1 ( x 4) 2 + ( y 1) 2 = 4 x2 + y 2 8 x 2 y + 13 = 0
Solving C1and C2 2 x + 4 y 12 = 0 x = 6 2 y
2 4
Put value of x in (1) and after solving y = 1 , x = 4+
5 5
(b) x (2 + i ) z (4 + 3i ) will take maximum value if, z , 2 + i, 4 + 3i are collinear
Equation of the joining (2+i) and (4+3i) is

y 1 = 1( x 2 ) x y 1= 0
Intersection of x y 1 = 9 with C2 ( x 3) 2 + ( x 1 + 1) 2 = 9 x = 0,3 x = 0 y= 1
(C) Point will lie on C2 and on the line which is perpendicular bisector of line joining
(2,1) and (4,3) then value will be zero. One of the possible value id x < 3, y = 2 .
0 0 1 0 0 1
39. (A) A = 0 0 0 ; B = 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 0
is a counter example. Therefore, (A) is wrong.

(B) We have ( A 2 + B2 ) ( A – B ) = A 3 – B3 – A 2 B + B2 A = 0
and A B 0 A 2 +B2 is not invertible. Therefore (B) is also wrong.

(C) A T = A
1
(A )
1
1 1
=A
(A ) = (A )
T 1
1 T 1
=A
1
( )
1
1
So, A is also symmetric. Therefore (C) is also wrong.
(D) | A | 0, | B | 0 | AB | 0
40. Draw the graph

a,b 2 a b
41. c a sin .sin .cos 1
2
c d Also a , c 600
a b ,c d 00 a b || c d
(given) a , b , c , d are coplanar
42. use parameric equations of circle
( )
n
43. If a + a 2 1 = x, n N then x x 2 + x [ x ] = 1
44. Cases for a1 {H,T} i.e. a1 = 2
Cases for a2{HT , TH , TT }, a2 = 3

For n 3 . If the first out come is H and next just T and then an 2
If the first out come is T then an 1 should follow

an = an 2 + an 1
a3 = a1 + a2 = 5
a4 = a3 + a2 = 8
a5 = a3 + a4 = 13
2
a b c x y y
45. (3abc a 3
b 3
c )
3 2
=b c a = y x y = (x y) (x + 2y)
2
c a b y y x
Where x = a 2 + b2 + c 2 , y = ab + bc + ca
a 3 + b 3 + c 3 3abc = ( x y) x + 2y (x 107 ) x + 214 54 When x = 110
46. Clearly domain and Range of g(x) are [- 1, 1) and { } respectively

cos 1
( cos x ) = x for x [- 1, 0]
For 1 x 0 the equation becomes
x+ =3
x= 3 [ 1,0]
No solution.
cos 1 ( cos x ) = x for x [0,1)
For 0 x 1 equation becomes
x+ =3
x = 3- [ 0, 1]
no solution.
r2 9
47. If m is the slope of common tangent, then m =
16 r 2
40
2n + 1 40
1 1 1
= =1
n =1 n ( n + 1) (n + 1) 2
2 2
n2 (41) 2
48. n =1
x + 2y + 3z
49. =6
14
x 2 + 2y 2 + 3z 2
k = min
14
n
ax + by + cz ax n + by n + cz n
a +b+c a+b+c
2
x 2 + 2y2 + 3z 2 x + 2y + 3z
= 6.14
6 6
51&52
The equation of line ‘L’ is y = 4x – 1 and the value of p = 1, q = 6 and r = 0
53 &54
x 1
f ( x ) = e dt + e t x .dt
x t
0 x
= ( e x t x
) + ( e ) = ( 1) ( e ) + e
0
t x 1
x
x 1 x
1 = e x + e1 x
2
2 1 x
f ( x ) = e x + e1 x
2
1
f | ( x ) = e x + e1 x
=0 x=
2
1
f decreases in 0,
2
1
f increases in ,1
2
1
f has min at x =
2
( )
1 1
1
f min =f =e +e
2 2
2=2 e 1
2
Also f ( 0) = 1 + e 2 = e 1
f (1) = e + 1 2 = e 1
Maximum of f ( x ) = f max = e 1

PHASE-III
GRAND TEST-3
Time: 2.00 PM to 05.00 PM Max Marks: 240
Name of the Student: ___________________ I.D. NO:
PAPER-II
Sri Chaitanya Narayana IIT Academy
16-04-15_Sr.COIPL_Jee-Adv(2011-P2)_GTA-3
Weekend Syllabus
Mathematics: Total Syllabus
Physics : Total Syllabus
Chemistry : Total Syllabus
Sri Chaitanya Narayana IIT Academy 16-04-15_Sr. COIPL_Jee-Adv_(2011_P2)_Q’Paper
Paper-2
Time: 3:00 IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 240
CHEMISTRY
Sec – I (Q.N : 1 – 8) Questions with Single Correct Choice 3 -1 8 24
Sec – II (Q.N : 9 – 12) Questions with Multiple Correct Choice 4 0 4 16
Sec – III (Q.N : 13 – 18) Questions with Integer Answer Type 4 0 6 24
Sec – IV (Q.N : 19 – 20) Matrix Matching Type 8 0 2 16

Total 20 80
PHYSICS:


Total 20 80
MATHEMATICS:


Total 20 80
Sr. COIPL_P2_Advanced space for rough work Page 2

PHYSICS
SECTION-1
Section-I (Single Correct Answer Type, Total Marks: 24) contains 8 multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONLY ONE is correct. For each question
you will be awarded 3 marks if you darken ONLY the bubble corresponding to the correct answer and
zero marks if no bubble is darkened. In all other cases, minus one (-1) mark will be awarded.
21. Consider an elastic string stretched between two fixed ends. The string is plucked in
the middle and is held in a triangular form with a maximum height h at its middle
point. A time t=0, the plucked string is released from rest. All effects due to gravity
may be neglected. If linear mass density of the string is and the speed of
propagation for transverse waves in the string is ‘c’, find the total mechanical energy
of vibrating string. (Assume that tension in the string does not change during
oscillation)
c2 h 2 c2 h 2 c2 h 2 2 c2 h 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 4
22. Which of the curves shown in the figure depicts correctly the temperature (T)
dependence of surface tension (S)? Curve (1) falls off to zero at the boiling point of
the liquid, curve (2) falls off to zero at the critical temperature, curve(3) tends to zero
asymptotically, and curve (4) shows that surface tension is temperature independent
A) Curve(1) B) Curve (2) C) Curve (3) D) Curve(4)

23. A balloon filled with helium gas is tied by a light string to the floor of a car; the car is
sealed so that the motion of the car does not cause air from outside to affect the
balloon. If the car is travelling with constant speed along a circular path, in what
direction will the balloon on the string lean towards?
(A) A (B) B (C) C (D) D

24. Three blocks A,B and C of identical mass are placed on a frictionless table as shown.
B is at rest whereas A and C are moving directly towards it at identical speeds V. B is
initially closer to A than to C. All motion takes place along a single horizontal line.
After a long time, B is observed to be at rest somewhere to the right of its initial
position. Let e be the coefficient of restitution for all the collisions (same for all the
collisions). Then find the value of e.
(A) e=0 (B) e=1

(C) e=0.5 (D) e can be any value but less than one.
25. When the sun is directly overhead, a narrow shaft of light enters an ancient temple
through a small hole in the ceiling and falls on a mirror placed on the floor to reflect
the beam on to the ceiling. At what speed will the reflected spot move across the
ceiling? The separation between ceiling and floor of the temple is 10.8 m (Duration of
a day = 24 h)
(A) 2 cm/min (B) 4 cm/min (C) 3 cm/min (D) 5 cm/min
26. An organ pipe has one end closed and at the other end is a vibrating diaphragm, which
is a displacement antinode. When the frequency of diaphragm is 2, 000Hz , a stationary
wave pattern is set up in the tube. The distance between adjacent nodes is 8.0 cm. As
the frequency is slowly reduced, the stationary wave pattern disappears, but another
stationary wave pattern reappears at frequency 1,200Hz calculate the length of the
tube.
(A) 20 cm (B) 40cm (C) 30 cm (D) 60 cm
27. A uniform rod AOB, O being the mid-point of AB, rests on three vertical springs of
identical geometry and with stiffness constants k1 , k 2 and k 3 at A, O and B
respectively. The bases of the springs are fixed to a horizontal platform. Let F1 , F2 and
F3 be the compressional forces in the springs of stiffness k1 , k 2 and k 3 respectively.
If k1 : k 2 : k 3 = 1: 2 : 3 , find the ratio F1 : F2 : F3 (Assume that the springs are always
vertically oriented)
(A) 3 : 4 : 3 (B) 1 : 2 : 3 (C) 3 : 2 : 1 (D) 1: 1: 1
28. A metal ring of mass m, radius r with a small cross-sectional area, and resistance R
starts falling, symmetrically, from rest, at time t=0, in a horizontal radial magnetic
field of magnitude B, as shown in figure. Find the velocity of the ring when its
acceleration becomes zero
mgR mgR mgR mgR

(A) (B) (C) (D)
r 2 B2 2 r 2 B2 4 2 r 2 B2 2 2 2
r B

SECTION-2
Section - II (Multiple Correct Answers Type, Total Marks: 16) contains 4 multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which ONE or MORE may be correct. For each
question you will be awarded 4 marks if you darken ALL the bubble(s) corresponding to the correct
answer(s) ONLY and zero marks otherwise. There are no negative marks in this section.
29. In the figure shown, two blocks of equal mass ‘m’ are connected by an ideal string that
passes over an ideal pulley. The blocks are connected by springs of force constants k1
and k 2 ( k1 ). Initially, both the springs are relaxed. Then the left block is pulled down
a distance x and released. Magnitudes of accelerations of the left and the right blocks
immediately after release are a1 and a 2 respectively. Then
2mg
(A) a1 a 2 (B) a1 a 2 if k1 k 2 +
x
2mg
(C) a1 = a 2 if k1 k 2 + (D) a1 = a 2
x

30. Two bodies A and B of mass 5.00kg and 10.0kg respectively moving in opposite
directions with velocities 4.00m/s and 0.50m/s respectively undergo head-on collision
in free space. The force of their mutual interaction (F) varies according to the given
graph. From this graph, it can be concluded that :
(A) Body A will move with a velocity 0.50m/s in its original direction of motion
(B) Body B will move with a velocity 1.75m/s in its original direction of motion.
(C) Coefficient of restitution is 0.50
(D) Period of deformation during the collision is 0.20 s
31. The following figure shows part of a large network. Potentials of some of the points
are shown. Each capacitor has capacitance of 5 F . Which of the following
statement(s) is/are true?
(A) From the given information, potential of point O can be determined

(B) From the given information, potential of point B can be determined
(C) If charge on C2 is known, potential of point ‘O’ can be determined
(D) If charge on C2 in known, potential of point ‘B’ can be determined
32. Two identical cylinders A and B are wrapped by a common ideal string. The cylinder
B can rotate without friction about a horizontal axis passing through ‘O’. Both the
cylinders are confined to move in the vertical plane. Initially, the distance between
centers of mass of both the cylinders is just greater than 2r ;where r is radius of each
cylinder .If the system is released form rest, then (assume no slip anywhere )
2g
(A) Angular acceleration of A is
5r
3g
(B) Angular acceleration of B is
5r
4g
(C) Acceleration of centre of mass of A is
5
2 2
(D) Distance covered by centre of mass of A at time ‘t’ after the release is gt
5

SECTION-3
Section-III (Integer Answer Type, Total Marks: 24) contains 6 questions. The answer to each of the
questions is a single-digit integer, ranging from 0 to 9. The bubble corresponding to the correct answer is
to be darkened in the ORS. For each question you will be awarded 4 marks if you darken ONLY the
bubble corresponding to the correct answer and zero marks otherwise. There are no negative marks in
this section.
33. Three identical voltmeters each have a fixed resistance R which allows a small current
to flow through them when measuring a potential difference in a circuit. The
voltmeters, v1 , v 2 and v 3 are connected in the circuit shown below. If v 2 reads 2V and
v 3 reads 3V, what is the reading on v1 . ‘D’ is a device with unknown V-I
characteristics. Give the answer in multiple of V.
34. A light uniform spring of force constant 1N/cm is connected between two walls so
that the spring is just taut. Point ‘C’ is located on the spring at distance 40 cm from
the left end. Now a force of F=5N is exerted along the spring at point ‘C’ as shown.
Find the displacement of point ‘C’ in ‘mm’ from initial state to final equilibrium
state.

35. The peripheral velocity of a particle located on the equator of a planet is V0 due to
rotation of the planet about its own axis. The apparent weight of the particle is half
its true weight. If escape velocity of a polar particle from this planet is kv0 , find the
value of k.
36. One mole of a mono-atomic gas is heated in such a way that its molar specific heat
in the process is 2R. During the heating, the volume of the gas is doubled. Ti and T f
are the absolute temperatures of the gas at initial and final states respectively. Find
Tf
the ratio of temperatures
Ti
37. Initially an inductance coil is connected to a parallel plate capacitor. Electrical
oscillations of energy ‘E’ are set up in this circuit. The capacitor plates are slowly
drawn apart till the frequency of oscillation is doubled. If the work done in this
W
process is W, find the ratio .
E
38. To measure the length of a cylindrical rod ,it is placed along a meter scale .Left end of
the rod exactly coincides with 22mm mark of the meter scale while its right end
coincides with 72mm mark . Radius of the rod is computed using a Vernier calipers as
5 mm .Find maximum percentage error in the measurement of volume of the rod. LC
of Vernier calipers is 0.1 mm
SECTION-4
Section-IV (Matrix-Match Type, Total Marks: 16) contains 2 questions. Each question has four
statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column I and five statements (p, q, r, s and t) in Column II. Any
given statement in Column I can have correct matching with ONE or MORE statement(s) given in
Column II. For example, if for a given question, statement B matches with the statements given in q and
r, then for the particular question, against statement B, darken the bubbles corresponding to q and r in
the ORS. For each question you will be awarded 2 marks for each row in which you have darkened ALL
the bubble(s) corresponding to the correct answer(s) ONLY and zero marks otherwise. Thus, each
question in this section carries a maximum of 8 marks. There are no negative marks in this section.
39. Sound is travelling in a long tube towards right and the graph of excess pressure
variation Vs position (at some instant) is given below.
Match velocities in column-I with column-II. P,Q,R,S,T are medium particles inside
the tube.
Column-I Column-II
A) Velocity is towards right P) P
B) Velocity is towards left Q) Q
C) Velocity is zero R) R
D) Speed is maximum S) S
T) T
40. A siphon transfers liquid from high level to low level as shown in figure. If is
density of liquid, P0 atmospheric pressure, Va is velocity at point a (on the surface of
water in the tank) and Vb is velocity at point b (at the right open end of the siphon),
then (Vb 0) . Pa , Pb are pressures at points a and b respectively
Column-I Column-II
P0
A) ( h1 + h2 ) − P) is equal to one
g
B) va − vb Q) is less than zero
C) h1 R) is greater than zero
Pb − Pa
D) S) is equal to zero
gh1

Sri Chaitanya Narayana IIT Academy
SR. COIPL JEE ADVANCED DT: 16-04-15
TIME : 3:00 2011_P2 MODEL MAX MARKS : 240
KEY & SOLUTIONS
PHYSICS
QNO KEY
21 D
22 B
23 D
24 A
25 C
26 A
27 A
28 C
29 BC
30 CD
31 CD
32 ACD
33 5
34 8
35 2
36 4
37 3
38 3
39 A–P;
B – RS ;
C – QT ;
D - PR
40 A –Q;B–Q;
C – R ; D -S
Sri Chaitanya Narayana IIT Academy 16-04-15_Sr. COIPL _Jee-Adv( 2011_P2)_Key & Sol’s
HINTS & SOLUTIONS

PHYSICS
2
y 2 c2h2
21. E = U extreme = 1/ 2 T l=
x l
ANS: D
22. S is very sensitive to T. It becomes zero at critical point.
ANS: B
23. mHe 2
R O → mair 2
R , mair mH
ANS: D
24. B finally comes to rest only when e = 0,1 when e = 1, B will come back to original position but when e = 1, it
will stop at a place right of original place.
ANS: A
2
25. V= 2d ; where w = rad / min
24 60
= 3 cm / s, ( d = 10.8 m)
ANS: C
26. GCD of 2 kHz and 1.2 kHz = 400 Hz .
1
2000 Hz Corresponds to second over tone or 2 loops
2
5
l= 8 cm = 20cm
2
ANS: A
27.
Page 2
Let x1 , x2 and x3 be the deformations of the springs.
x1 + x3
x2 = → (i )
2
0 =0 F1 = F3 or k1 x1 = k3 x3 or x1 = 3x3 → (ii )
ANS: A
28. = BV 2 r , I = , a=0 BI 2 r = mg
R
ANS: C
29. If T 0, a1 = a2 = a ( say )
T + k1 x − mg = ma k2 − k1 2mg
T = mg + x 0 or k1 k2 + .
mg + k2 x − T = ma 2 x
2mg
If the string becomes slack, a1 a2 & k1 k2 +
x
ANS: B,C
1
30. P1 = 20 N − s, P2 = 5 N − s & I = 0.3 150 = 22.5 N − s
2
P11 = 2.5 N − s, P21 = 17.5 N − s . Both reverse the direction of motion
Vs I 1/ 2 ( 0.3 − t ) 150
e= = 1/ 2 = reform = t = 0.2s
Va I deform 1/ 2 t 150
ANS: C,D
V0 + 10 V0 − VB V0 − 10 V0 − 0
31. + + + 4 = 0 or 4V0 = VB .
c1 c2 c3 c
Page 3
One more condition is required to solve for V0 & VB
ANS: C,D
32.
mg − T = macm → ( i )
acm = 2rd → ( ii )
mr 2
Tr = → ( iii )
2
ANS: A,C,D
33.
v1 = 5v
Ans: 5
5 5
34. k1 = N / cm k2 = N / cm
4 1
5N
F = ( k1 + k2 ) x x= = 0.8 cm
( 5 / 4 + 5) N / cm
ANS: 8
mV02 mg
35. = , Ve = 2 gR
R 2
ANS: 2
p dV p dV R dV V T
36. C = Cv + , = or = = Cono tan t
n dT n dT 2 dT 2T V2
Page 4
ANS: 4
Q02 1
37. E= & =
2c LC
E 2
E f = 4Ei & = E f − Ei = 3Ei
W
=3
E
ANS: 3
dV dD d l
38. V = D 2l =2 +
v D l
dD = 1mn, dl = 0.5 mm, D = 10 mm, l = 50 mm
ANS: 3
39. Let S = a sin ( t − kx )
s
p = −B = Bak cos ( t − kx )
x
s
V= = a cos ( t − kx )
t
P & V are in phase.
ANS: A-P, B-R,S C-Q,T D-P,R
40. Pb − Pa = 0, Va Vb Va − Vb 0 , pressure in the tube must be non-zero every where
P0 ( h1 + h2 ) g , Vb 2 gh , h1 0
ANS: A-Q, B-Q, C-R, D-S
Page 5
Page 6
GRAND TEST-8
Sec: Sr.IPLCO_IC_ISB_LIIT Date: 01-05-16

Time:02.00 PM to 05.00 PM Max. Marks:246

PAPER-II
01-05-16_Sr.IPLCO_IC_ISB_LIIT_GTA-8(P2)_Weekend Syllabus
Mathematics : Total Syllabus
Physics : Total Syllabus
Chemistry : Total Syllabus

JEE-ADVANCE-New Model-IV_P2-Model
Time: 3:00 Hours IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 246
PHYSICS:
Sec – I(Q.N : 1 – 4) Questions with Three digit Integer Answer Type (000 to 999) 4 0 4 16
Sec – III(Q.N : 9 – 14) (2 or 3 Comprehensions –6Q)
5 -2 6 30
Matrix Matching (+2/-1 for every match)
Sec – IV(Q.N : 15 – 16) If all are correct a bonus of 2 marks will be awarded
2 -1 2 20
Total 16 82
CHEMISTRY:
Sec – I(Q.N : 17
1 -–4 20) Questions with Three digit Integer Answer Type (000 to 999) 4 0 4 16
5-–
Sec – II(Q.N : 21 8 24) Questions with Multiple Correct Choice 4 -2 4 16
Sec – III(Q.N : 25
9 - –1430) (2 or 3 Comprehensions –6Q)
5 -2 6 30
Sec – IV(Q.N : 31
15 –- 16
32) If all are correct a bonus of 2 marks will be awarded 2 -1 2 20
Total 16 82
MATHEMATICS:
Sec – I(Q.N : 133- 4–36) Questions with Three digit Integer Answer Type (000 to 999) 4 0 4 16
Sec – II(Q.N : 37
5-–8 40) Questions with Multiple Correct Choice 4 -2 4 16
9-–
Sec – III(Q.N : 41 1446) (2 or 3 Comprehensions –6Q)
5 -2 6 30
Sec – IV(Q.N : 47
15 -–16
48) If all are correct a bonus of 2 marks will be awarded
2 -1 2 20
Total 16 82
PHYSICS Max Marks : 82
SECTION – I
This section contains 4 questions. The answer is a Three digit integer ranging from 000 to 999 (both inclusive-Ex:
If answer is 1 you should mark as 001).
1. A conducting disc of radius r can rotate about a horizontal conducting shaft. A
smaller non conducting disc of radius r0 is fixed onto the same shaft and has an
ideal mass less cord wrapped around it, which is attached to a small object of mass
m hanging vertically as shown. Two ends of the resistor ‘R’ are connected to the
perimeter of the disc and to the shaft by wiping contacts. The system is then
placed into a uniform horizontal magnetic field B and mass m is released. If
r  10 cm , r0  2cm , R  0.01 , B  0.2T , m  50 gm then find the constant angular
velocity (in rad/s) with which the disc will rotate after a certain time?
r0
2. In standard YDSE (D>>d>>  ) with identical slits S1 and S 2 light reaching a point.
A on the screen opposite to slit S2 has an intensity I. It was also found that when
only one of the two slits S1 or S2 was illuminated by same light beam, the intensity
at A is still I. Now when a third slit S3 of four times the slit width is made as
shown  S1S 2  S 2 S3  d  and all the three slits are illuminated then intensity of light
reaching A is nI where n=_________
s3
s2 A
d
s1
 D
3. Moseley’s law for K photon is given by   a Z  b where a is a universal

constant and b is a screening constant. Moseley’s logic helps us assume b  1 for
K photon. If there is a percentage error  102 in the measurement of ‘b’ due to
actual electronic orbital configuration of an atom, then the relative error in the
measurement of  if Z  51 is a 10b in scientific notation where a is a rational
number and b is a positive integer. The value of a + b is __________
4. If three sources of frequency 400Hz, 402Hz, 405 Hz of similar loudness are
sounded together, the number of beats produced per second is __________
(Assume the minimum intensity detectable is nearly zero)
SECTION – II
5. In a model experiment, a rigid surface consists of a rough horizontal plane and an
inclined plane connecting to it. A thin hoop of radius r is rolling towards the slope
without slipping at a velocity v0 , perpendicular to the base of the slope. The slope
connects to the horizontal plane with a smooth curve of radius R > r, which is
considered part of the slope, such that the hoop will move up the slope without
collision. In three different models of the experiment, everything is kept same
except the friction coefficient of slope which is 1  0 , 2  tan  , 3  2 tan 
respectively. In each case the height to which hoop rises on the incline before
stopping momentarily is h1 , h2 , h3 respectively. Then
v0

a) h1  h2  h3 b) h1  h2  h3
c) 2h1  h2 d) h2  h3
6. All the batteries in the infinite chain shown in the figure have emf  and internal
resistance r.
A
a) effective internal resistance of battery system across AB is 3 r

b) effective emf of battery system across AB is 3 
c) If a resistance of value r is connected across AB the terminal voltage across the
battery system is 
d) Short circuit current across AB for the above system is 
r
7. A charged particle (charge q, mass m) is placed at the centre of a circular region
containing a magnetic field. The field is given as B  B r  ie; it is a function of
radial distance and it is perpendicular to the plane of the circle. The total magnetic
flux through the circle is zero. The particle is given a radial impulse. At a later
instant the radial and tangential components of velocity of the particle are vr and
v respectively.
a) The tangential force on the particle at an instant is qv B
b) The torque about centre on the particle is qBrvr
c) If the particle leaves the circular region then at the instant it leaves, its velocity
is only in radial direction
d) If the particle leaves the circular region then at the instant it leaves, its velocity
is only in tangential direction
8. In the diagram shown take 1MSD = 1mm and there is no zero error. The left most
zero and the right most zero in the vernier scale are the only divisions coinciding
with a MSD. Which of the following statement(s) regarding the shown vernier
calipers is (are) true?
a) Its least count is 0.1 mm

b) Its least count is 4.9 mm
c) Its vernier constant  MSD  VSD  is 2.9 mm
d) Its vernier constant  MSD  VSD  is 3.9 mm
SECTION - III
(COMPREHENSION TYPE)
This section contains 2 or 3 Comprehensions. Each comprehension has 2 or 3 multiple choice questions based on
a paragraph. Each question has 4 choices A), B), C) and D) for its answer, out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
On a fixed cylindrical rod of radius R hangs a thin uniform bangle of radius 2R
and mass m. The bangle can swing freely in a vertical plane parallel to the cross
section of the cylinder. Now the bangle is given a slight disturbance in its plane.
R
2R
9. What will be time period of small oscillations of the bangle if the rod is
frictionless?
R 2R 4R 8R
a) 2 b) 2 c) 2 d) 2
g g g g
10. What will be time period of small oscillations of the bangle if the rod has
sufficient friction to present slipping?
R 4R 8R 2R
a) 2 b) 2 c) 2 d) 2
g g g g

Suppose you slide a puck over frictionless ice toward an ice-covered hill as shown
in figure 1 below. As the puck climbs the hill, kinetic energy K is transformed into
gravitational potential energy U. If the puck reaches the top, its potential energy is
Ub .
Figure 1: A puck slides over frictionless ice toward a hill. The puck’s
gravitational potential at the top of the hill will be Ub
Thus, the puck can pass over the top only if its initial mechanical energy E  Ub .
Otherwise, the puck eventually stops its climb up the left side of the hill and slides
back to the left. For instance, If U b  20J and E=10 J, you cannot expect the puck to
pass over the hill. We say that the hill acts as a potential energy barrier (or, for
short, a potential barrier) and that, in this case, the barrier has a height of U b  20J .
Figure 2 shows a potential barrier for a nonrelativistic electron traveling along an

idealized wire of negligible thickness. The electron, with mechanical energy E,
approaches a region (the barrier) in which the electric potential Vb is negative.
Because it is negatively charged, the electron will have a positive potential energy
U b (  qVb ) in that region. If E  Ub , we expect the electron to pass through the
barrier region and come out to the right of x=L in figure 2. Nothing surprising
there. If E  Ub , we except the electron to be unable to pass through the barrier
region. Instead, it should end up traveling leftward, much as the puck would slide
back down the hill in figure 1 if the puck has E  Ub
Figure 2 : The elements of an idealized thin wire in which an electron (the dot)
approaches a negative electric potential Vb in the region x  0 to xL
However, something astounding can happen to the electron when E  Ub . Because

it is a matter wave, the electron has a finite probability of leaking (or, better,
tunneling) through the barrier and materializing on the other side, moving
rightward with energy E as though nothing (strange or otherwise) had happened in
the region of 0  x  L .
The wave function  ( x) describing the electron can be found by solving
Schrodinger’s equation. Separately for the three regions in figure 2 : (1) to the left
of the barrier, (2) within the barrier, and (3) to the right of the barrier. The
arbitrary constants that appear in the solutions can then be chosen so that the
values of  ( x) and its derivative with respect to x join smoothly (no jumps, no
kinks) at x=0 and at x=L. Squaring the absolute value of  ( x) then yields the
probability density.
Figure 3 shows a plot of the result. The oscillating curve to the left of the barrier
(for x<0) is a combination of the incident matter wave and the reflected matter
wave (which has a smaller amplitude than the incident wave). The oscillations
occur because these two waves, travelling in opposite directions, interfere with
each other, setting up a standing wave pattern.
Figure 3 : A plot of the probability density  2 of the electron matter wave for the
situation of Fig. The value of  2 is nonzero to the right of the potential

barrier.
Within the barrier (for 0<x<L), the probability density plot describes a transmitted
(through the barrier) wave with low but constant amplitude. Thus, the electron can
be detected in this region but with a relatively small probability.
We can assign a transmission coefficient T to the incident matter wave and the
barrier. This coefficient gives the probability with which an approaching electron
will be transmitted through the barrier- that is, that tunneling will occur. As an
example, if T=0.020, then of every 1000 electrons fired at the barrier, 20 (on
average) will tunnel through it and 980 will be reflected. The transmission
coefficient T is approximately
T  e 2bL ,
82 m  U b  E 
In which b  and e is the exponential function. Because of the
h2
exponential form of Eq. the value of T is very sensitive to the three variables on
which it depends: Particle mass m, barrier thickness L, and energy difference
U b  E . (Because we do not include relativistic effects here, E does not include
mass energy.)
11. A plot of the probability density  2 of the electron matter wave for the situation
in above passage is as shown in figure 3. Consider the following statements:
i) The minima in the values of  2 at the left of x=0 are greater than zero.
ii) The value of  2 is non-zero to the right of the potential barrier.
iii) The amplitude of the reflected wave is not equal to the incident wave
iv) The uncertainty in the measurement of the deBroglie wavelength of electron to
the left of x=0 is zero
The number of above statements which is/are true
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4
12. For three experiments, Fig gives the transmission co-efficient T for electron
tunneling through a potential barrier, plotted versus barrier thickness L. The de
Broglie wavelengths of the electrons are identical in the three experiments. The
only difference in the physical setups is the barrier heights Ub . Rank the three
experiments according to Ub greatest first.
a) 1, 2, 3 b) 3, 2, 1 c) 1 = 2 = 3 d) Cannot be determined
A long cylindrical container whose base area A  10 cm 2 contains h  60 cm high
water column. Taking base of the vessel as origin and upward vertical as direction
of positive x-axis, gauge pressure P at any point x inside the vessel is graphed first
using a solid line. The entire water column is now heated uniformly to a
temperature rise  T  80C > Assume coefficient of volume expansion of water in
the temperature range  0.00013 / K , density of water at initial temperature
 103 kg / m3 , the expansion of the container is negligible. Again the process of
drawing P vs x graph as mentioned above is repeated on same graph paper with a
dotted line.
13. Which of the following best represents the graphs mentioned above?
(Not drawn to scale)
P P
x x
a) b)
P P
dotted line coincides

with solid line
x x
c) d)
14. Which of the following best represents the graph of P (increase in gauge
pressure at a point in the liquid due to T rise) versus x graph? (Not drawn to
scale)
P P
a) x b) x
P P
c) x d) x
SECTION - IV
(MATRIX MATCHING ANSWER TYPE)
This section contains 2 questions. Each question has four statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column I and four statements (P, Q, R and
S) in Column II. Any given statement in Column I can have correct matching with ONE or MORE statement(s) given in Column II. For
example, if for a given question, statement B matches with the statements given in Q and R, then for the particular question darken the
bubbles corresponding to Q and R in the OMR sheet. For each correct matching will be awarded +2 marks ONLY and 0 if not
attempted and -1 in all other cases. If all are correct a bonus of 2 marks will be awarded
15. An ideal gas at initial pressure P0 (= atmospheric pressure) and volume V0 is
enclosed by a light piston in a cylinder as shown. Initial the piston is in static
equilibrium and the gas is in thermodynamic equilibrium. Now we start to move
the piston outwards at a constant slow velocity v. The cross sectional area of
piston is A. While the piston is moving we can deliver heat to the gas through a
heating filament and pull the piston in such a way that temperature of gas remains
constant. Apart from the heat transfer between the gas and the heating filament all
other heat exchange can be neglected and the atmospheric pressure is constant.
Mark the quantities in column-I with their, appropriate variation in column-II
(time t on x-axis)
Atmosphere
ideal gas
v
COLUMN-I COLUMN-II
a) Pressure P of gas on y-axis A)
b) Volume V of gas on y-axis B)
Force applied by pulling agent

c) (apart from atmosphere) on C)
the piston on y-axis
Amount of cumulative work
d) done by gas on piston from D)

start till time ‘t’ on y-axis
16. A non-conducting sphere of radius R is given a volume charge density   kr
where r is the distance of a point in the spherical volume from its centre and k is a
positive constant. Match the physical quantities pertaining to the sphere in
column-I with the values given in column-II
Column-I Column-II
a) If electrostatic pressure at distance r from the A) 7
centre is given by P r   a b  r n  where a, b
and n are constants then n =
b) Electric field at a distance r from the centre is B) 4
2
kr
where m is a positive constant. The value
m0
of m is
c) Electro static force of interaction between the C) 5
k R
2 6
left and right hemispheres is where l is
4 l 0
a positive constant. The value of l is
d) Self energy (Electrostatic) of the sphere is D) 6
given by dR where d and e are constants then
e
value of e is
CHEMISTRY Max Marks : 82
SECTION – I
17. How many of the following statements are correct
(A) Nascent hydrogen is a powerful reducing agent than molecular hydrogen.
(B) White phosphorous is more reactive than red phosphorous.
(C) The reactivity of K2O towards water is more than that of Na2O towards water
(D) Nitrate salt of silver is soluble in ammonia.
(E) Liquid nitrogen does not stick to the poles of magnet whereas liquid oxygen
does
(F) NO2 is brown in colour at room temperature but colourless below 00C.
(G) Bond order of CN and N2 are equal but CN is more reactive
(H) NO+ is having lower bond strength than NO
18.
2 How many are the correct stability order of the following carbanions
: : :
:
I II III IV
A) III > I B) III > II C) II > I D) I> IV

19.
3 Van’t Hoft factor (i) for three different aqueous solution of 0.1 molal K4[Fe(CN)6],
0.01 molal K2SO4 and 1 molal NaCl are 4.5, 2.7 and 1.8 respectively. Then the
number of INCORRECT statement are
A) Boiling point of K4Fe(CN)6 solution is maximum
B) Freezing point of NaCl solution is minimum
C) Boiling point of K2SO4 solution is maximum
D) All the three solution have same freezing point
20.
4 How many of the following statements are correct
STATEMENT  1: CH3NO2 forms CHCl3, when it is reacting with Cl2 + KOH
STATEMENT  2: Cl2 + KOH forms hypochlorite ion
STATEMENT  3: p-chloro phenol is less acidic than p-fluorophenol
STATEMENT  4: Fluorine is more electronegative atom than chlorine.
STATEMENT  5: Bond length C-O bond decreases when CO forms the complex
with metal
STATEMENT  6: The non bonded pair of electrons of metal involves in back

bonding with vacant antibonding molecular orbital of CO.
SECTION – II
21.
5 Ca2B6O11 + Na2CO3 

 [X] + CaCO 3 + NaBO 2 (Unbalanced equation)
Correct choice for [X] is /are

A) Structure of anion of crystalline [X] has one boron atom sp3 hybridised and
other three boron atoms sp2 hybridised.
B) [X] with NaOH (aq.) gives a compound which on reaction with hydrogen
peroxide in alkaline medium yields a compound used as brightness in soaps.
C) Hydrolysis of [X] with HCl or H2SO4 yields a compound which on reaction
with HF gives fluoroboric acid.
D) [X] on heating with chromium salt in oxidizing flame gives green coloured
bead
22.
6 Which of the following is true for 3-methyl-2-butanone?
A) It may be prepared by CrO3 oxidation of 2-methyl-2-butanol.
B) Reaction with NaBH4 gives a secondary alcohol.
C) It may be prepared by acidic Hg2+ catalyzed hydration of 3-methyl-1-butyne.
D) It forms a silver mirror on treatment with Ag(NH3)2+.
23.
7 The four elements A, B, C and D form diatomic molecules and also form singly
charged negative ions. The following observations are made in the series of
experiments
(i) 2 B + C2  2C + B2
(ii) 2A + C2  No reaction
(iii) 2D + B2  2B + D2
Which of the following statements are correct ?
A) E0A / A  EC0 / C  E0B / B  E0D / D
2

2

2

2

B) E0D / D  EC0 / C  E0B / B  E0A / A

2

2

2

2

C) A2 can oxide D into D2, C into C2 and B into B2.

D) A2 is the strongest oxidizing agent.
248 . You are about to undertake kinetic comparisions of rates and intimate mechanism
of fluoride ion exchanges of SF6 and free F versus SeF6 and free F, in a suitable
inert solvent. Which of the following statements are likely to be correct?
A) SF6 is more likely to react by dissociative mechanism.
B) SeF6 is more likely to react by associative mechanism
C) Both react by dissociative mechanism
D) SeF6 is more likely to react rapidly
SECTION - III
Paragraph for Question Nos. 25
9 to 26
10
A sodium salt [X] on treatment with dil HCl gives a colourless gas [Y], which
gave white precipitate when passed through lime water. When salt [X] was heated
with sulphur in boiling water gave [Z], which dissolves AgBr, when [Z] is added
in excess. When salt [Z] solution was treated with AgNO3 solution it gave a white
precipitate of [Q], which slowly gives a black precipitate [R]
25.
9 Which of the following is correct for the salt [Z] solution
A) It on treatment with dil HCl gives an acid which is unstable, decomposes in
water.
B) It can be used for iodine estimation
C) The salt [Z] can act as a reducing agent.
D) All of them
26.
10 2Na2S3 + 3O2 
Heat in air
 (………) + S
in the given reactions the products are

A) salt [X] only B) gas [Y] only
C) salt [Z] only D) salt [Z] and gas [Y]
Paragraph for Questions Nos. 27
11 to 28
12
These are two presentation of reversible cell.
Zn rod salt bridge Cu rod
0.01 M aqs. ZnSO 4 0.01 M aqs. CuSO4
A1 1 Litre A2 1 Litre
Cell - I
E ozn  / Zn   0.76V
E oCu / Cu   0.34V
Pt rod Salt Bridge Pt rod
0.01 M Na2HPO4 0.01 M Na2HPO4
A3 1 Litre A4 1 Litre
Cell – II
Given H3PO4 Ka1 = 10–5
Ka2 = 10–8
Ka3 = 10–12
Passage of 9.65 amp. of current for 20 second in both cell, charging reaction take
place in cell – I and electrolysis of water take place during electrolysis O2 liberated
at chamber A4 and H2 liberated at chamber A3. (Consider no charge in volume
after electrolysis).
27.
11 Calculate the cell potential after passage of current.
0.059 0.01 0.059 0.009
A) o
E cell  E cell  log10 B) o
E cell  E cell  log10
2 0.011 2 0.011
0.059 0.08
C) o
E cell  E cell D) o
E cell  E cell  log10
2 0.012
28.
12 Difference in pH value of chamber A3 & A4 after electrolysis
A) 4 B) 4 - 4 log10 2 C) 4 + log10 2 D) 4 + 4 log10 2
Paragraph for Questions Nos. 13 14
29 to 30
A aldehyde A (C11H8O) which does not undergo self aldol condensation, gives
benzaldehyde and two moles of B on ozonolysis. Compound B which can reduce
ammonial silver nitrate and itself oxidizes to oxalate salt.
29 Compound B would be
CHO CHO CHO CH2OH
A) CHO B) CO2H C) CH2OH D) CH2OH

30.
13

conc. NaOH H 3O CH 3COCl
B   C  D   E  F
H O 2eq
3
Oxalic acid
14 F is
CO2H CH2O COCH3
CH2O COCH3
(A) (B) CH2OH
O
O O C OH
C O C CH3 C O C CH3
H2 C O COCH3
(C) (D) O O
SECTION - IV
31.
15 Match Column - I and Column – II
Column – I Column - II
a) (A)
b) (B) yellow or orange-red ppt
c) (C)
d) (D)
32.
16 Match the column I and column II
Column – I Column – II
a) Precipitate with KCN, which is A) Fe2+
soluble in excess of reagent
b) Precipitate with NaOH and NH4OH, B) Hg2+
which is insoluble in excess of both
the reagents separately
c) Coloured ppt. with KI which is C) Pb2+
soluble in excess of reagent
d) Black precipitate with H2S, which is D) Ag+
soluble in hot and dilute HNO3
MATHS Max Marks : 82
SECTION – I
1 n 1 n
33.
1 Let I n   2012x dx , J n   2013x dx, n  2012 n  N & the matrix A   aij 33 where
0
x 1 0
x 1
I I , i j J  J j 3 , i  j
aij   2012 i i & the matrix B   bij 33 where bij   2016  j
 0, i j  0, i j
Then the value of trace  A   det  B         

1 1
34.
2 ‘A box contains 10 balls numbered through 1 to 10. Five balls are drawn
successively, one by one at random without replacement. Let A be the event that
exactly two odd numbered balls are drawn and that they occur on odd numbered
m
drawns from the box. Then P  A   (m, n are coprime) where
n
m+n=__________
x
35.
3 Area enclosed by the curves given by x  60  y 
4
36.
4 Let A  2  B  2i  C  4  be 3 points lying on the argand plane. Now a point P is
taken on the circumcircle of the triangle ABC such that PA . BC  PC . AB where

P, A, B, C are in order). If Z is the complex number associated with the midpoint of
PB, then the value of Z 2 is……………..(  is non real cube root of 1)
SECTION – II
37.
5 In the non-decreasing sequence of odd integers
 a1 , a2 , a3 ,........  1,3,3, 3,5,5,5, 5,5,.......... each positive odd integer k, appears k times. It
is a fact that there are integers b,c and d such that for all positive integer n,
an  b  n  c   d [.] G.I .F  then
A) Possible value of bcd is 2 B) possible value of bcd is 1
b  2d cd
C) Possible value of is 0 D) possible value of is 0
8 2b
38.
6 Which of the following is/are true
A) If f :RR satisfying f  x  f  y  f  f  y  x f  y  f  x 1 x , y  R ,then
2
f  x can be 1 x
2
B) If f  x  ax  b , x  a , a , b , c  R  { 0 } then f  f  x  x
cx  a c
C) Let f be a real valued integrable function satisfying

x 8
f  x  f  x  4  f  x  2  f  x  6 and g  x   f t  dt ,  x  R then g  x can be a

x
constant function
1 f  x  is  0, ., where  f  x  1 x 3  3 x f  x  , x  R
3
D) domain of the function
and f 1  1
 /4
39.
7 Given: f  x    sin
2
x cos 5 x cos t f  t  dt  sin 2 x cos 5 x,    cons tan t  then
0
3 3
A) f x  sin 2 x cos 5 x B) f x  sin x cos x
3  
C) f  x is periodic with period  D) f  x is periodic with period 2 

40.
8 Suppose f  z  is possibly complex valued function of a complex number z, which
satisfies a functional equation af  z   bf  2 z   g  z  ,  z  C where a and b are some
fixed complex numbers and g  z  is some function of z, " " is a cube root of 1
 1 , then f  z  can be determined uniquely if
A) a b  0 B) a2  b2  0 C) a3  b3  0 D) a3  b3  0
SECTION - III
9 to 42
10
A point P is moving in XY-plane such that if it lies inside the triangles formed by
the lines x  3 & y  x then its distance from the origin is always r, otherwise it
always lies on the curve y2  4 x
41.
9 Range of r, such that there exist exactly eight points on the locus of P, from which
if we draw two tangents on the parabola part, then they are at right angle
is………..
A) r 1 B) 1  r  2 C) 1  r  2 D) r 1
42.
10 When r=1 equation of the largest circle which touches the locus of P ,exactly at
three distinct points , can be
A)  x  52  y 2  16 B)  x  52  y 2  20
2
 1 1
C) x 2   y  52  16 D) 2
x   y 
 2 4

11 to 44
12
Two vectors a and b are having unit modulus and angle between then is  . Now
2
ab x y
     2 f 2  x  dx and f  x  satisfies f x  f  y  for all x, y  R  0 &
 a .b xy
2 2 2
h        a  b1 a.b1 where b1  2b & f 2  x    f  x  
43.
11 Which of the following is correct.
A) Fundamental period of    is 

B) Angle between a and b is   for which h   is minimum
3
C)Volume of the parallellopiped formed by a, b and a  b (where angle between
1
a and b is taken as  ) for which h   is minimum is
2
D) Volume of the parallellopiped formed by a, b and a  b (where angle between
1
a and b is taken as  ) for which h   is minimum is
4
44.
12 If a and b are non-collinear vectors, then number of solution of the equation
4    31    0 in  0, 2  are ………………..
A) 2 B) 4 C) 6 D) 8
13 to 4614
Let f  x  e p1x  e x for some real p0

t 1
45.
13 Let g t    f  x et x dx , the value of t  tp for which g t  is minimum is
t
 e p 1 1  l p 1
A)  ln   B) ln  
 p  p  p 
1  p  1e 1

 p 
C) ln 
p 
 D)  
 ln 1  pe p 1
p 
p e p 1 p
46.
14 Use the fact that 1   1  p2 0  p  1 . The value of l t s p  t p   ____

2 p 2 P 0
where x  sP ,for which f  x is minimum

1
A) 0 B) C) 1 D) does not exist
2
SECTION - IV
 5x 
 1   x2 1 0 0 
x x 0
0
 
   3
47.
15 For x  0, let A 0 x 0 , B  0 0
 x 
 0 0 16   
   1
   0 0 
 4
& define, three other matrices X   AB 1   AB 2   AB 3  .........   AB  n . Y  Lt X n 
,
Z  Y 1  2 I ( I  Identity matrix of order 3)
Then
COLUMN-I COLUMN-II
a) minimum value of tr  AY   ............ A) 24
where ( . G.I.F)
b) det Y 1   ........ B) 12
c) If tr  Z  Z 2  Z 3  ......Z 10   2a  b,  a, b  N  C) 6
Then the volue of a  b  ...........
d) The value of adj  5Y 1   K , then D) 19
number of positive divisors of k, which
are odd.
48.
16
Consider the curve sin x  sin y  1, lying in the first quadrant then
COLUMN-I COLUMN-II
a) Lt
d2y
 .......
A) 0
x
 dx 2
2
b)  d2y
where   3 B) 1
Lt x  .......
x  0 dx 2 2
d2y 1
c) Lt  x  ....... where   2 C)
x0 dx 2 2
dy 1
d) Lt  ....... D)
x
 dx 2 2
2
KEY & SOLUTIONS
PHYSICS
1 100 2 007 3 010 4 008 5 CD
6 BC 7 BC 8 AD 9 A 10 D
11 D 12 B 13 B 14 C
15 a-A; 16 a-B;
b-D; b-B;
c-C; c-D;
d-B d-A
CHEMISTRY
17 6 18
2 4 19
3 3 20
4 5 21
5 BCD
22
6 BC 23
7 ACD 24
8 ABD 25
9 D 26
10 C
27
11 A 28
2
12 B 29
13 B 30
14 C
31
15 a-C; 16 a-AD;
32
b-D b-AB
c-B; c-BC;
d-A d-A
MATHEMATICS
33
1 219 34
2 47 35
3 480 36
4 0 37
5 ACD
38
6 ABCD 39
7 AD 40
8 C 41
9 B 42
10 A
43
11 C 44
12 B 45
13 C 46
14 B
47
15 a-C 48
16 a-B,
b-A b-D,
c-D c-A,
d-B d-A
PHYSICS
1. At steady state,
  Br 2   r
mgr0   B  r
  2 R   2
   100 rad / s
2. If we denote light leaching A team each slit S1 and S2 phase of amplitude E0 .

Then phase difference for light from S1 and S 2 should be 120 and S1 should be
2
in phase with phasol of S3 being 2E0 . So resultant is E02   3E0   2 E0  3 E0  cos 120
  9  2  E02  7 E0
 intensity = 7I
db
3.  10 4  db  10 4
b
1 d d  z  b d  2  104
  
2  z b  50
 0.04 104
 4 106
4. At t = 0 assume all of them have a maximum. Let us list out the instants of
maxima (beats) for each pair of sources within t = 0 and t = 1 sec.
1
 400 Hz, 402 Hz   ,1
2
1 2
 402 Hz, 405 Hz   , ,1
3 3
1 2 3 4
 400 Hz, 405 Hz   , , , ,1
5 5 5 5
1 1 2 1 3 2 4
 Beats occur at , , , , , ,
5 3 5 2 5 3 5
 8 beats every seconds

5. Required value of  for rolling
 tan  tan 
 
1  2
So for case 2 and 3, pure rolling happens  h2  h3

So for 1  0
1
mg  h1   mv02
2
And for case 2 and 3,

1
mg  h2   mv02 1  1
2
 h2  2h1
6. For effective internal resistance x,

r
A
 x 2  2rx  2r 2  0
r x
r  x  
3 1 r
B
For effective emf y,

, r
, r
y,  
3 , 1 r
, r
y  2 ,  3 , 1 r 
, r
y  2 

 y
 3 1  r
1 1

r  3 1 r 
 y  3

7.   0   B  r  . 2rdr  0
  rB  r  dr  0 - (1)
Tangential force  rB vr
Torque about centre  rqBvr


 L    dt  q  rBvr dt  q  rBdr  0 (from (1))
 finally v  0
8.
9. For smooth contact situation, the bangle will be in pure translation with its C.M
rotating about centre of cylinder.
10.
B

A
r1
r2
mg
A, B touch each when ring turns without slipping Angle turned by ring 
r1  r2
Now
mg r2   2mr22 
g
   
2r2
g
 
2r1
Here r1  R, r2  2 R
g
 
2R
2R
 time period  2
g
11.
12.
 mg 
13. Gauge pressure remains same at bottom   and decreases linearly to become
 A 
zero at top
14. P  0 at bottom and top
Graph turns at the point of original height.
15. 0 0  P V0  Avt 
PV
PV
0 0
P
V0  Avt
 V0 
Fagent   P0  P  A  P0 1  A
 V0  Avt 
P0 A2vt

V0  Avt
 V0  Avt 
W  PV
0 0 Av ln  
 V0 
v
W  PV
0 0 Av ln
V0
CHEMISTRY
17. ‘D’ & ‘H’ are incorrect
  

  
18.
19. Only ‘B’ is correct
20 statement-3 is wrong
21. X  Borax
22. Conceptual
23. Conceptual
24. SF6 is more likely to react by dissociative mechanism since S 6 is smaller & has
reached is maximum coordination number & therefore unlikely to associate with

another F 
25. x is Na2 SO3
26. Na2 S 3  3O2  Na2 S 2O3  2 S
27. Number of faraday=0.002

Number of moles of Cu 2 dissolve Cl = 0.001
Total moles of Cu 2 = 0.01 + 0.001
= 0.011
0 0.059 0.01
Ecell  Ecell log
2 0.011
28. Meq of  H     HO    2 M eq
Meq of H 2 PO4 initial = 10

In A4 HPO42 left  8
H 2 PO4 formed  2
In A3 HPO42 left =8
PO43 formed =2
29. A is Ph  CH  CH  C  C  C  H
30. Conceptual
31. A  cannizaro
B  Benzoin
C  2, 4 DNP test
D  Pinacole
32.Conceptual qualitative analysis
MATHS
1
x x
i 2012
 1 1
33. I 2012i  Ii   2012
dx 
0
x 1 1 i
1
x j 3  x 2013  1 1
J 2016 j  J j 3   2013
dx 
0
x 1 j4
1/ 2 0 0  1/ 5 0 0 
 A   0 1/ 3 0  & B   0 1/ 6 0 
  
 0 0 1/ 4   0 0 1/ 7 
 
 tr  A1   B 1  2  3  4  5  6  7  219
35. case  i  x  0
x 3x
y   x  60   60
4 4
LHS  ve, not possible

Case (ii) Let 0  x  60
x 5x 5x
y   x  60   60 &  60  0  x  48
4 4 4
Case (iii) x  60
x 3 x
y    x  60    60
4 4
3x
 60  0
4
 x   60,80 
15
48 60 80
 Required area  480

36.
C (- 4)
P   
B
 2i 
A 2 
   

Rotate PA to get PC & rotate BC to get BA & solve we get P as  2iw 
2iw   2iw 
Z 
2
37. an  an 1 iff nc is a perfect square & a2  a1 & a5  a4
 2  c &5  c are perfect square  C  1
a2  3  b  2  c   d  b  d  3
Also a10  a9  a10  3b  d =7
 b  2, d  1
38.
a) put x  0 , f  y  0
 f 0  1
Put x  a , f  y  a
a2
 f  a  1 
2
c) replace x by x2
 f  x  f  x  8
 f  x is periodic function with period 8

x 8 8
  f t dt   f t dt  g  x
x 0
 g  x is a constant function
d) use a 3  b 3  c 3  3abc  0
 a  b  c  a  b  b  c  c  a   0
1 2 2 2
But f 1  1  a bc  0
 f  x  1  x
 /4
39.  cos t f  t  dt  A
0
 f  x   sin 2 x cos 5 x   A sin 2 x cos 5 x    A  1 sin 2 x cos 5 xdx

 /4
A=  cos t   A  1 sin 2 t cos 5 t dt
0
 /4
sin 2 t
A=   A  1  dt
0
cos 4 t
A=   A  1 1
3
3
 f  x  sin 2 x cos 5 x
3 
40. af  z   bf  2 z   g  z  ------- (1)
af  z   bf  z   g  z  -------- (2)
a f  2 z   bf  z   g  2 z  ---------- (3)
For (1), (2), (3)
 a O b   f  z    g  z  
    
 b a O  f  z     g  z  
 
 
  
O b a   f  2 z   g  2 z 
   
The determinant of coefficient matrix is a3  b3 when a3  b3  0 , we have unique

solutions.
41,42. When 1  r  2 the directrix of each parabola intersects the locus at four
points ( two on the parabola and two on the arc which is at a distance of r units
from the origin
Find out the circle which passes through (1,0) and which touches the parabola
internally
sin 2  1
43&44.      cos  dx  4 cos ec 2 2
2
x2
2 2
h        a  b1 a.b1  4 cos ec 2 2  16sin 2  cos 2  is minimum when

cos ec 2 2  1   
4
1
when   
2
 Volume  a b
  a  b  =  a  b  
2 4
4    3  '    0
 16 cos ec 2 2  16 3 cos ec 2 2 cot 2  0

 16 cos ec 2 2 1  3 cot 2  0 
1
 cot 2 
3
 as cos ec 2  0 
2
n 
  
2 6
 Number of solution is 4 in  0, 2  .
45&46. (1,2,3)
f  x  e
p1x
 ex
f '  x  0  px   ln 1 p
1
x ln 1  p  S p
p
t 1
g t   et  e px e x  e x  e x dx
t
g t  
p

1  p1t p
e e  pet  e 
p 1 t

1 1  p e 1 
 p 
g ' t   0  t  ln  
p  p 
1   e p 1 1
l t  s p  t p   l t   ln  p  1  ln  p  1  ln   
p 0 p 0 p   p  2
 5 0 0  1/ 5 0 0  1/ 52 0 0 
  1   2  
47. AB  0 3 0  ,  AB    0 1/ 3 0  ,  AB    0 1/ 32
0  and so …on
 0 0 4  0 0 1/ 4   0 0 1/ 4 2 
   
 
1/ 5  1/ 52  ...  1/ 5n 0 0 
 
1 1 1
X  0  2  ....  n 0 
 3 3 3 
 1 1 1 
 0 0  2  ....  n 
 4 4 4 
1/ 4 0 0 
Y  Lt X   0 1/ 2 0 

n 
 0 0 1/ 3 

 4 0 0
y   0 2 0 
1
 0 0 3
 
adj  
5 y 1  5.  5!
2
 
 1/ 4  x  1/ x  0 0
 
x
AY   0 0
 2 
 16 
 0 0 
 3
3 16
Minimum value of trace(AI)  
2 3
2 0 0  22 0 0  2n 0 0
   
Z   0 0 0  , Z 2   0 0 0  ………………. Z n   0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 1  0 0 1 
   
dy
48. cos x  cos y 0
dx
2
d 2 y  dy 
 sin x  cos y 2    sin y  0
dx  dx 
d 2 y sin x 1  sin y   sin y 1  sin x 

2 2

dx 2 1  sin 2 y  1  sin 2 y
Using sin x  sin y  1
d2y sin 2 x  sin x  1

dx 2  sin x 3/2  2  sin x 3/2
d2 y x  sin 2 x  sin x  1 
Lt  x  .  
x0 dx 2  sin x 3/ 2   2  sin x 3/2 
For non-zero existence of limit   3 / 2

1
(if   3 then limit will be zero) & L when   3
2 2 2 2
dy  cos x
& 
dx sin x  2  sin x 
dy
Lt 0
x
 dx
2
PART A
Numerical type questions [ +5 , -1 ]
1. Two ends of an uniform long chain of fixed length are fixed at the same
height as shown in figure.
Case-1 Case-2
37 53
r1 and r2 are radius of curvature of the chain at its lowest point in the
two cases respectively, then r1 / r2 is equal to
Ans: 0.5625
Sol:
T T cos
Tsin
2T cos = g
T sin = rg
r= tan
2
r tan
r1 tan 37 9
= = = 0.5625
r2 tan 53 16
2. A charged particle is kept at the center of non-conducting spherical shell.
A cap from the surface is cut and replaced by a non-conducting disk,
such that the disk makes half angle of = 600 at the center, as shown.
What is the ratio of charge density of the disk to that of the shell 2
so
1
that the charge remains in equilibrium?
2 1
Ans: 0.75
3. ⃗ = 𝐶 (1 + 𝑥) (+𝑘̂) in region of space
Imagine non-uniform magnetic field 𝐵 𝐿
between x = 0 to x = L as shown in figure. A particle of mass m and

positive charge q enters in this region at origin. While entering and
leaving it makes an angle with planes parallel to YZ as 1 and 2
respectively. Motion of charge particle is confined to xy plane. The

relation
2mv ( cos 2 − cos 1 )= qLC satisfies the above said condition, find the value
of ?
y
2
Ans: 3
4. In the figure, the cross section ABCDEF of a vertical regular hexagonal
column of side 1m is shown as seen. From the top one end of a light
inextensible and inelastic string of length 6 m is attached to the point A
of column and wrapped tightly in a clockwise sense. A small bob S is
connected to the other end of the string. Keeping the string taut, the bob
S is projected with speed V0 = 2 m/s along BA near point A. Calculate the
time taken by the string in seconds to get unwrapped (upto the instant
when string just looses contact with AB part) Take = 0.6 (Neglect
3 3
gravity)
D E
C F
B A
V0
Ans: 8.9
a /3
Sol: t= + 2a + 3a + 4a + 5a
V0 3 V0 / 2
a 2
= + 14a
V0 3 3V0
a 28
= 1+ = 8.9S
V0 3 3
5. Find the ratio of average displacement of a molecule of an ideal gas in
time interval 2t to that in time interval t, considering the assumptions of
KTG to be holding good for the given case.
Ans: 1.414
Sol: 𝑠 2 = 𝑠12 + 𝑠22 + 2𝑠1 𝑠2 cos 𝜃. Relationship between mean square and square of
mean is same for all displacements, and average of 3rd term on right side
is zero. So, 𝑠 = √2𝑠1
6. A uniform rod of length = 4 m is hinged at point A on a ground. It's

other end is resting on the surface of a half cylinder of radius R = 3m as
shown in figure. The rod just looses contact with half cylinder when it is
making 37 with the horizontal. Find the speed of half cylinder at that
instant (in m/s) ( Take g = 10 m / s 2 )
Ans: 7.5
Sol:
4m 3m
1 = 37 2 = 53
A
1 2
sin 4
= 2
=
R sin 1 3
cos
2 = 1
1
R cos 2
tan
= 2
1
tan 1
16
= 1
9
6g
=
5
= 2
2 R
2
6g 16
= 1
5R g
g
1 =
8
V0 = 1
cos 2
4 9 5
=
8 3
= 7.5 m / s
7. Force exerted by a light beam of intensity I, incident on a cylinder (height
h and base radius R) fixed on a smooth surface as shown in figure if
surface of cylinder in having reflection coefficient 0.6 is F 10−6 N is
(assume no transmission)
(Take, R = 3m, h = 6m, I = 100 W / m 2 , C = 3 108 m / s )
Ans: 9.6
8. A spherical cavity is created in a neutral solid conducting sphere, inside

cavity two point charges -2Q and +Q are kept at a distance d = 10 cm
apart from centre of cavity on a line. Given that : charge Q = 6 10−6 C , The
distance between centre of conducting sphere and point P, r1 = 40 m and
between centre of cavity and P is r2 = 20 5 m . 1 = 53 and 2 = 37 . Find
magnitude of electric field at point P due to charge on surface of cavity
and at surface of sphere in N/C. Round off your answer up to four
significant figure.
P
r2
2
+Q
r1
1
-2Q
C
Ans: 20.25
Sol:
P
-Q r2
C1 r1
+2Q
C +Q
field can be obtained by a charge +Q kept at C, a dipole ( P = Q ( 2d ) ) kept
at C1 and due to a +Q charge kept at C1 .
9. A particle of mass m and charge q is projected into a region having a

uniform magnetic field B0 . Initial velocity V0 of the particle is
perpendicular to the magnetic field. Apart from the magnetic force the
particle experience a frictional force which has a magnitude of f = kV
where V is instantaneous speed and k is a positive constant. Given that
m V
= 10−5 SI units, 0 = 23000 SI units. The radius of curvature of the path
q B0
mV0
of the particle after it has travelled through a distance of x 0 = is (in
2k
SI units)
Ans: 0.115
Sol: Let V be the speed of particle at any instant
Fb V
f
V0
d KE = d f
1
d mV 2 = −fds = −kV ds
2
mVdV = −kVds
V s
mdV = −k ds
V0 r
m ( V − V0 ) = −ks
ks mV0
V = V0 − when s =
m 2k
k mV0 V0
V = V0 − =
m 2k 2
m V
R= = 0
qB 2
10. A solid sphere is held at rest on the fixed hemispherical bowl made of
insulating material such that centre of sphere lies on the horizontal
diameter as shown in figure. Total charge q = 5.1 10−1 C and mass m =
252 grams, both are distributed uniformly in the sphere. There exists
uniform magnetic field B is space as shown in figure. Find limiting value
of B (in Tesla) so that on releasing sphere, it does not leave contact with
bowl in course of motion. Consider contact surface to be sufficiently
rough. Spherical bowl is made of non-magnetic material. Radius of bowl
= 10 cm, radius of sphere 3 cm. g = 10 m / s 2 .
C
g
B
Fixed bowl
ANS: 12
PART B
Multichoice multi correct [ +5 , -2 ]
11. Two spherical soap bubbles in vaccum are connected through a narrow
tube. Radius of left bubble is R 0 and that of other is 2R 0 . Air flows from
left to right very slowly. At any instant before steady state is reached,
r1 , A1 , V1 , n1 are radius, surface area, volume and number of moles of gas
in the left bubble and r2 , A 2 , V2 , n 2 are same for right bubble. Assume
that temperature T remains constant : Choose the CORRECT option(s).
Let n1 = 2 initially and S be the surface tension of soap solution.
15RT
A) The total film area of the both the bubbles is
S
B) The rate of change of "A1 + A 2 " with respect to time is zero
3R 0
C) If at an instant number of moles in left bubble is 1 then r2 =
2
R
D) If at an instant number of moles in left bubble is 1 then r1 = 0
2
Sol: ABCD
At any instant the total number of moles n1 + n 2 = n remains constant
n1 P1V1
=
n 2 P2 V2
4S 4 3
R1
R1 3
=
4S 4 3
R2
R2 3
2
R1 1
= =
R2 4
P1V1 P2 V2
+ = 2+8
RT RT
4S 4 3 4S 4
R0 + 8R 30 = 10RT
R0 3 2R 0 3
3
2 ( 4 R 02 + 16 R 02 ) = 10RT
2S
A1 + A2 = 15RT / S and it is constant as T is constant
When n1 = 1 ; n 2 = 9
P1V1 1 r12
= =
P2 V2 9 r22
or r2 = 3r1 and 40 R 02 = 8 (r
1
2
+ r22 ) = 8 (10 r12 )
R0
r1 =
2
12. A circular tube of small uniform cross-section and total length 4
contains 3 different immiscible liquids of density , 2 , and 3
occupying 2 , and length respectively as shown in figure.
3
A) At equilibrium the angle between diameter containing the interface of
1
liquid of smallest density and horizontal is = tan −1
2
B) At equilibrium the angle between diameter containing the interface of
1
liquid of smallest density and horizontal is = tan −1
3
C) If liquid is slightly disturbed and released it executes SHM
g
D) Angular frequency of small oscillations of liquid in tube is
Sol: BC
gR (1 − sin )+2
gR (sin + cos ) = gR (1 + sin )+3 gR ( cos − sin )
1
tan =
3
Also, 2 A+3 A+2 A a
= − 2 Agx + Agx
3g
a=− x
7
3g
=
7
13. Two bulbs are connected to opposite sides of a square loop of wire as
shown. There exists a cylindrical constant magnetic field confined to the
smaller circular area as shown, not symmetric w.r.t the loop. Now the
square loop starts moving in its own plane along PQ towards Q slowly.
Choose the CORRECT options from the following statements (neglect the
size of bulbs)
P
Q
A) Both the bulbs P and Q won't glow till the bulb P reaches the
cylindrical magnetic field region
B) Both the bulbs P and Q glow as long as the bulb P is inside the
cylindrical magnetic field region
C) Both the bulbs P and Q glow throughout the motion of the loop
D) Both the bulbs P and Q won't glow throughout the motion of the loop
Sol AB
14. A container of very large cross section is filled with 3 immiscible, non-
viscous liquids of density , 2 and 3 as shown in figure. The heights of
each layer of liquid are same and is equal to H. A small cylinder of
density , height H/2 and negligible cross section touches it's bottom
plane surface to the bottom of container and it is released from rest. It
rises in the liquids translationally. a1 , a 2 and a 3 are accelerations of
cylinder when it is completely in liquids of densities 3 , 2 and
respectively. V1 , V2 and V3 are velocity of cylinder when it upper surface
touches the upper surface of liquids of densities 3 , 2 and
respectively. (Neglect the motion of liquids)
H 2
H 3
H/2
A) a1 : a 2 : a 3 = 3: 2 :1 B) a1 : a 2 : a 3 = 2 :1: 0
C) V1 : V2 : V3 = 4 : 9 : 10 D) V1 : V2 : V3 = 4 : 7 : 9
Sol: BC
x
2
1 −x
x
= {( 1
− 1) − ( 1
− 2
) }g
V22 − V12 1
=( 1
− 1) − ( 1
− 2
)
2g 2
15. A person wants to go from D to B. The walking speed of person in the
5
unshaded region is 2 m/s and in the shaded region is m/s. Given
2 2
that AF = 20 m = AE and AB = AD = 100 m. Then
y
D C
E H
G
(0, 0) x
A F B
A) The minimum time in which he can reach from D to B is 76 sec
B) The minimum time in which he can reach from D to B is 84 sec
C) Co-ordinates of intersection point on the line GH of the person when

220
he aims to reach from D to B in minimum time is , 20
3
D) Co-ordinates of intersection point on the line GH of the person when

160
he aims to reach from D to B in minimum time is , 20
3
Sol: AC
y
D
100
80 3
3
53
20 45
160
3 45
E
160
3 53
(0, 0) x
B
Applying Snell's law
1 sin 1 = 2 sin 2
sin V1 2 4 2
1
= 2
= = =
sin 2 1 V2 5 / 2 2 5
due to symmetry 2 = 45
4
sin =
5
t min = + = +
(
200 160 2 2 2 100 160 4 )
3 2 3 5 3 3 5
500 + 640 1140
= =
15 15
16. A particle of mass m initially at origin starts moving in x-y plane due to a
force of constant magnitude but varying direction rotating with constant
angular velocity perpendicular to x-y plane as shown in figure. Initially
force is directed along x-axis.
y
F0
= t
F0
A*) Maximum velocity along x-axis is
m
2F0
B*) Maximum velocity along y-axis is
m
2F0
C*) Maximum displacement along x-axis is
m 2
D*) Distance covered by the particle during a complete cycle of rotation of
8F0
force is
m 2
Sol: ABCD
F0 F0
Fx = F0 cos t sin t x= (1 − cos t )
m m 0
F0 F0
Fy = F0 sin t (1 − cos t )
Vy = y= ( t − sin t )
m m 2
2F t
V = Vx2 + Vy2 = 0 sin
m 2
2 /
8F0
d= V dt =
0
m 2
17. Two particles A and B of mass 2m and m respectively are connected by

an inextensible string of length , lying on a smooth horizontal surface
as shown in figure. The particle B is given an initial velocity
perpendicular to the length of string in same horizontal plane. Then,
V
2m
m
A B
V2
A) Initial acceleration of A is
3
2V 2
B) Initial acceleration of B is
3
C) Initial radius of curvature of path followed by B is 3
3
D) Initial radius of curvature of path followed by B is
2
Sol: ABD
V
2m T
m
A T B
T
aA = (i)
2m
T + ma A V 2
=
m
3T V 2 2mV 2
= T=
2m 3
2V 2 V2
a= & aA =
3 3
VA2
rA = =0
aA
VB2 3
rB = =
aB 2
18. A small particle is given an initial velocity V0 = 10 m / s along the tangent
to the brim of a fixed smooth parabolic bowl of revolution of parabola
y = 4x 2 as shown in the figure. The particle slides on the inner surface
and reaches point B which is at a height y 0 from the origin and the
particle again climbs up the bowl from B. Given that r0 = 2m and
g = 10 m / s 2 when y = 10 m, the velocity vector v of the particle makes an
angle with the horizontal tangent drawn to the bowl through P.
y
v0
r0
x0 y0 10m
B
x
(0, 0)
Answer the correct statements given below
A) The value of y0 = 5 m B) The value of x 0 = 1.25 m
3
C) The value of = tan −1 D) The value of = tan −1 (1)
8
Sol: ABC
From the CAM
mv0 r0 = mvr = mvx 0
v 0 r0
V= (1)
x0
From the conservation of energy
V2 = V02 + 2gh = V02 + 2g (16 − y0 )
V02 r02
V 2 = 100 + 20 (16 − 4x 02 ) =
x 02
100 4
100 + 20 (16 − 4x 02 ) =
x 02
20
5 + 16 − 4x 02 =
x 02
21x 02 − 4x 04 − 20 = 0
21 11 5
4x 04 − 21x 02 + 20 = 0 x 02 = = 4,
8 4
5
x 02 =
4
V0 r0 = Vx r
y = 4x 2
10 5
x2 = =
4 2
10 2
Vx =
5
2
From the energy conservation
Vx2 + Vy2 = V02 + 2g ( 6) = 100 + 120 = 220
2
Vy2 = 220 − 400 = 220 − 160 = 60
5
Vy 60 5 300 3
tan = = = =
Vx 20 2 800 8
19. A ribbon of density and thickness d width is wrapped around a fixed
wire of negligible dimensions and mass in multiple layers as shown in
figure. Let the radius of the ribboned disk be 'r' at any time ( r d ) . The
end of ribbon is pulled out at a constant speed u.
1
A) Rate of decrease of radius with respect to time is proportional to
r
1
B) Angular acceleration of system is directly proportional to
r3
C) Force required to pull the ribbon at constant speed is proportional to
1
r4
D) Force required to pull the ribbon at constant speed is constant
Sol: ABD
dr ud
=−
dr 2 r
d d u −u −ud +u 2d
= = = 2 =
dt dt r r 2 r 2 r3
1 u 2d 1
=I = r2 r2 = ( u 2d ) r
2 2 r3 4
u 2d
F= =
r 4
20. An ant travels along a long rod with a constant speed u relative to the
rod, starting from the origin. The rod is rotating with a constant angular
velocity (anticlockwise) in x-y plane about its one end which is at
origin. Then choose the CORRECT statements for a general instant of
time t = t
2
ut
A) The tangential acceleration of the ant is
1+ 2t2
B) The tangential acceleration of ant is zero all at all the instant
C) The centripetal acceleration of ant is 2 u at all instant of time
2 u+ 2 2
t u
D) The centripetal acceleration of ant is
1+ 2 2
t
Sol: AD
at t = t
r
2 v
2
r
u
r =ut
a T = 2 v sin − r 2
cos
a C = 2 v cos + r 2
sin

All (GT) Nitin Sir

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

All (GT) Nitin Sir

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JEE ADVANCED 2021 MOCK TEST @ UNACADEMY [ NITIN SIR ]

POWERED BY [ INDIAN SCHOOL OF PHYSICS ]

Max marks : 75 Time : 75 mins

Numerical response type [ +4 , -1 ]

1. A series combination of 𝑛1 capacitors, each of value C1 , is charged by a

source of potential difference 4V. When another parallel combination of 𝑛2

capacitors, each of value C2 , is charged by a source of potential difference

2. Apply conservation of energy and conservation of angular momentum between points at

infinite separation and on the surface of the sphere

[𝑙𝑛 1 0 = 2.303, 𝑙𝑜𝑔 2 = 0.301]

capacitors reach equilibrium, the charge on C3 is found to be 5 C . The

other force including gravity throughout the motion)

B1 due to total wire at y = 2 R is = 0

ring of radius R. The composite system was placed on rough horizontal

rolls on surface without slipping. When line joining AB becomes horizontal

11. What is magnetic field due to hemi-sphere at it’s center?

12. If uniform magnetic field B, is applied in direction perpendicular to base of

hemisphere ,what will be torque on it about the centre of the base?

12. Force passes through centre.

13. Magnetic field between the plates is –

A) Parallel to the plates and perpendicular to velocity

B)Parallel to velocity and perpendicular to plates

A) 2|𝑃⃗| 𝑐𝑜𝑠 3 0°(𝑖̂ + 2𝑗̂) B) 2|𝑃⃗| 𝑐𝑜𝑠 3 0°(𝑖̂)

C) 2|𝑃⃗| 𝑐𝑜𝑠 3 0°(2𝑗̂) D) Data insufficient

17. A metal sphere of radius a is surrounded by a concentric metal sphere of

A potential difference V is maintained between spheres.

A) Current is 4𝜋𝑟 2 𝑘𝐸 2 , where (𝑎 < 𝑟 < 𝑏)

B) Current is 2𝜋𝑟 2 𝑘𝐸 2 , 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒(𝑎 < 𝑟 < 𝑏)

A) Resistance between faces LMNO and PQRS is 𝜋𝑡 𝑙𝑛 𝑎

Between faces LMNO and PQRS

A) Acceleration of disc along the trajectory is √3𝑔

Name of the Student: ___________________ H.T. NO:

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 2

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 3

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 4

A) 0.5 cm B) 1cm C) 2cm D) 0.25 cm

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 5

9. A particle is projected from the top of an inclined plane at an angle to the

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 7

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 8

A) Heat is given to system in the process AB

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 9

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 11

and S2 ) separated by a distance d = 2 mm. The screen is placed at a distance of

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 13

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 14

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 15

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 16

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 19

saturated aqueous solution of M ( OH )2 at 25o C , would be

40. The number of reducing sugars among the following is

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 20

C) = 6 and is true for more than one plane(p)

D) = 0 and is true for more than one plane(p)

A) 4 ( 9!) B) 4 ( 3!) C) 4 (8!) D) 8P4

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 22

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 23

Sec: Sr. COIPL space for rough work Page Page 24

Then which of the following is true?

C) Minimum value of b for y = f ( x ) to be an onto function is 1.

54. e x ( sin x ) dx = A1 , then which of the following is/are true ?

at eccentric angle = is 2x 2 + y2 + 1xy + 2 x + 3 y + 4 = 0 then which of the following

57. A triangle ABC has position vectors of it's vertices as

(Area of triangle PAC ) then position vectors of P is 1 i+ 2 j+ 3 k then